Home

ViBE EM4000

1. Mains connector Input Control In Out for the optional AC Power Supply only Mains connector Input VIBE EM4000 Release 1 10 13 User Manual 46073586AB02 Chapter 1 Overview Product Description BLANK PAGE 14 ViBE EM4000 Release 1 10 User Manual 46073586AB02 Chapter 2 Installation and Startup Read and follow the important safety information in section A Safety Instructions on page201 noting especially those instructions related to risk of fire electric shock or injury to persons Introduction This chapter provides the procedures required for device installation and initial configuration and describes how to connect the device to other devices in your system In this Chapter UNPACKING M ee D RL page 16 Installing the Device Steps page 17 Mountinguin Rack een page 18 Powering UP MPPRPSPPEPPEETEPFFREPENEIEFEREFENEEFREEEPETERECEFERERLEREFFERFEELEEHEFEFEFEFFERF page 25 Performing the Initial Settings page 26 Connecting the Signal Cables page 35 ViBE EM4000 Release 1 10 15 User Manual 46073586AB02 Chapter 2 Installation and Startup Unpacking Unpacking Table 2 1 lists the accessories that are always shipped with your device Use this list to ensure that your order is complete More accessories can be delivered depending on your chosen options Table 2 1 List of accessories delivered with the device Quantity Desc
2. a Type Proxy address to use Port Proxy server F Use a proxy server For your LAN These settings will not apply to 8 127 0 0 1 E dial up or YPN connections ATO a m N Fo Address 127 0 0 Port 80 Advanced i thal FIP 2 0 04 eo IV Bypass proxy server for local addresses La _ ee IV Use the same proxy server for all protocols r Exceptions A Do not use proxy server for addresses beginning with IP address of the Encoder 10 12 38 201 2 Use semicolons to separate entries Maximum number of connected Users Ten Users can be connected to the Encoder via its Web Interface at any one time No priority rules are set between Users To disconnect from the Encoder you are advised to use the Logout link on the Interface pages to reduce the number of Users ViBE EM4000 Release 1 10 53 User Manual 46073586AB02 Chapter 4 Web Browser Interface Encoder Web Interface Specifications 54 Definition of Encoder Users To operate the Encoder via a Web Browser connected to its Web Interface Users must be declared in the device Users are declared and managed creation deletion passwords rights etc via the Local Console application featured in the Encoder Refer to the Servicing chapter in this User Manual The following Users are set on device shipment They have the following names passwords and profiles Table 4 1 Users set on device shipment
3. Click OK Saving a configuration file to disk To save a configuration file to disk click the Save amp icon associated with the configuration on the Presets page The following page will be displayed Figure 4 53 Saving a configuration file to disk 1 3 Save configuration to disk Click on the link below to save the configuration on your disk configuration 5 1 Click configuration X where X indicates the number of the memory whose content will be saved on the hard drive 106 ViBE EM4000 Release 1 10 User Manual 46073586AB02 Chapter 4 Web Browser Interface Settings 2 If one of the following screens is displayed click Save Figure 4 54 Saving a configuration file to disk 2 3 LI LT x 9 Some files can harm your computer If the file information below Do you want to open or save this file Wy looks suspicious or you do not fully trust the source do not open or save this file a Name config5 zip File name config3 zip Type WinZip File 3 21 KB File type WinZip File From 10 12 38 202 From 172 16 13 13 Oven Se Es IV Always ask before opening this type of file Would you like to open the file or save it to your computer While files from the Internet can be useful some files can potentially __Opm seve Cancel _Moeino C harm your computer Ifyou donota iis source do not open or IV Always ask before opening this type of file save this file What s the risk
4. Commands relating to the date and time Displaying the current date and time ddate To display the current date and time type ddate after the ViBE prompt Figure 5 9 Displaying the current date and time ddate command i 10 12 54 29 PuTTY loj x ViBE gt ddate a Thu Jun 23 20 45 32 UTC 2011 viBE gt J E UTC date and time will be displayed ViBE EM4000 Release 1 10 121 User Manual 46073586AB02 Chapter 5 Servicing Operations performed using the Local Console Editing the date and time sdate To edit the date and time type sdate after the ViBE prompt Figure 5 10 Editing the date and time sdate command ViBE gt sdate i 10 12 54 29 PuTTY loj x a Current UTC time is Thu Jun 23 20 47 37 UTC 2011 Enter the new UTC time with the format MMDDhhmmYYYY UTC time ViBE gt sdate Current UTC time is Thu Jun 23 20 47 53 UTC 2011 Enter the new UTC time with the format MMDDhhmmYYYY UTC time 022911282012 fal Apply datestime now y Enter the following fields m Type the new date and time values in month day hour minute and year format without spaces after UTC time m Type y after Apply date amp time now if you wish to confirm the new values or n if you wish to keep the previous values The Done message will be displayed to indicate that the changes have been acknowledged Commands relating to NTP configuration The purpose of NTP Network Time Protocol is to
5. The following window will be displayed Figure 4 55 Saving a configuration file to disk 3 3 SL zx My Recent Documents Desktop My Dame w My Computer Am e My Network Places File name config5 zip X Save as type WinZip File kd Cancel A 3 Select the destination directory for the file on the hard drive and enter the file name 4 Click Save Loading a predefined configuration file from a disk To load a predefined configuration from a hard drive to amemory click the Add new configuration from file link on the Presets page The following page will be displayed ViBE EM4000 Release 1 10 107 User Manual 46073586AB02 Chapter 4 Web Browser Interface Settings Figure 4 56 Loading a configuration file from a hard drive 1 2 Load from file Load to num 3 File submit i Browse 1 Enter the following fields Load to File Number of the memory that will store the configuration Only unused memory numbers will be displayed Type the path to the configuration file or set the path by clicking Browse 2 Confirm the operation by clicking submit The following screen will be displayed Figure 4 57 Loading a configuration file from a hard drive 2 2 Upload configuration The configuration has been successfully uploaded 108 ViBE EM4000 Release 1 10 User Manual 46073586AB02 Chapter 4 Web Bro
6. ViBE EM4000 Release 1 10 199 User Manual 46073586AB02 Appendix A Technical Specifications Ordering guide BLANK PAGE 200 VIBE EM4000 Release 1 10 User Manual 46073586AB02 Appendix E Safety Instructions ENGLISH Read and follow the important safety information in section Safety Summary English on page 202 noting especially those instructions related to risk of fire electric shock or injury to persons Additional specific warnings not listed there may be found throughout the manual equipment If you remove the cover of the equipment the warranty ceases to apply To reduce the risk of electric shock never remove the cover of the GERMAN Lesen und befolgen Sie die nachstehenden wichtigen Sicherheitshinweise section Sicherheit berblick Deutsch on page 206 Beachten Sie insbesondere die Anweisungen bez glich Brand Stromschlag und Verletzungsgefahr Das Handbuch enth lt weitere hier nicht angef hrte spezifische Warnhinweise Um die Stromschlaggefahr zu verringern die Ger teabdeckung A niemals entfernen Andernfalls erlischt die Garantie FRENCH Il est recommand de lire de bien comprendre et surtout de respecter les informations relatives a la s curit qui sont expos es au paragraphe section Consignes de s curit Frangais on page 210 notamment les consignes destin es a pr venir les risques dincendie les d charges lectriques et les bles
7. PSI Program Specific Information Normative data that is necessary for the demultiplexing of transport streams and the regeneration of programs PSIP Program and System Information Protocol A method of describing Naming and Navigation data for a multi program transport stream as defined in ATSC A 65A PSU Power Supply Unit PTS Presentation Time Stamp The PTS is a metadata field in an MPEG transport stream that is used to achieve synchronization of programs separate elementary streams for example Video Audio Subtitles when presented to the viewer The PTS is given in units related to a program s overall clock reference either Program Clock Reference PCR or System Clock Reference SCR which is also transmitted in the transport stream or program stream PVR Personal Video Recorder QCIF Quarter Common International Format To have one fourth of the area as quarter implies the height and width of the frame are halved video size 176p x 144p OSIF Quarter Screen International Format To have one fourth ofthe area as quarter implies the height and width of the frame are halved video size 160 x 120 pixels NTSC or 192 X 144 pixels PAL OVGA Quarter Video Graphics Array OVGA is a popular term for a computer display with 320x240 display resolution R G B Red Green Blue ViBE EM4000 Release 1 10 243 User Manual 46073586AB02 Glossary Resolution RLC RRT RS RST RTP RTSP RU Scrambling
8. User name Password Profile admin admin administrator service service service technician technician technician operator operator operator user user operator guest guest operator The different profiles provide the following rights Table 4 2 User profiles and corresponding rights operator technician administrator service View Topology X X X X View Predefined X X X X Configurations Create X X X Predefined Configurations Recall X X X Predefined Configurations View Encoder X X X X Configuration Edit Encoder X X X Configuration View Alarms X Reboot Device Create User X X ViBE EM4000 Release 1 10 User Manual 46073586AB02 Chapter 4 Web Browser Interface Reaching the GUI Reaching the GUI Setting up the link between the PC and the Encoder To set up the link between the operating PC and Encoder Web Interface and reach the GUI 1 Connect the PC Ethernet link to the Control 1 connector on the Encoder rear panel or to the network connected to this connector 2 Run the Web Browser on the PC and enter the Encoder IP address as the HTTP address Figure 4 3 Reaching the GUI Internet Explorer cannot display the webpage Windows Internet Explorer QG j 1E http 10 12 54 41 Following connection the Web Interface Login page will be displayed Figure 4 4 Login page Username Password 3 Enter your Username and Password See section Def
9. nnnnnnn 65 Defaut Pattern nn 75 Demo mode Video unnaaaaaannnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn00n 82 Description Configuration unesrsnsnernennen 104 Destination IP Routing cccessceseees 66 Destination IP Address IP Transmission 69 Destination Subnet Mask IP Routing 66 Destination UDP port IP Transmission 69 Dialogue Normalisation Dolby Audio 91 DIMENSIONS uuunueenneennennnennnnnnnnnnnnnnnnenn nn 161 Dolby E decoder ID Audio 0 s 000creees 84 Dolby E Program Number Audio 85 Dolby Surround Mode Dolby Audio 93 DTV SEI Expert parameter scsseeseeees 98 E EMC Ground ua ee 23 Encoder x Name nn ns 111 Equipment Name sense 111 EU declaration of conformity 196 249 Appendix F File Configuration useesensnsnennnnnnnenannnnnnn 108 FORM energie 75 Frequency Area rennes 75 Front Panel Alarms screen ssssssssssssrrrrrrrresrsrrnrrrns 44 Device booting screnn nsss 42 Encoding board information screen 50 Info screen essaie ananena 49 IP Settings screen uuuunnssnnnnnnnennnnnnnnn 45 LCD CAL screen uanneassennenneenneeneennnn 48 Main board information screen 49 50 Main Menu screen unseeseeeennnnenennnn 43 Reboot screen assiriana 48 Recall screen 46 Setup SCIEN Mine 45 Status screen cccccccccsceceeeseeeeeeeeeeseeess 43 Front Panel Description Device status LEDS cc ssceseeeeees 38 Keypad unsinnig 39
10. Chapter 4 Web Browser Interface Settings Used to enable On or disable Off Closed GOP mode Closed GOP mode is used to break temporal dependency between GOPs This requires systematically encoding a P picture before each picture in temporal order This mode reduces encoding quality and should only be used when stream editing operations are expected Note When Closed GOP is used the effective GOP size is enlarged by one picture to handle the additional P picture used to close the GOP Used to enable On or disable Off insertion of AU information in the MPEG Transport Stream adaptation field Click HD VBI to display the HD VBI configuration page Figure 4 28 Editing an HD video component VBI page HD Video Configuration General Advanced AVC Advanced MPEG 2 HD VBI Misc VBR PreProc Time Code On coff Closed caption On Off AFD insertion Off submit reset This page is used to set HD video component VBI parameters Time Code Closed caption ViBE EM4000 Release 1 10 User Manual 46073586AB02 This parameter determines whether the Time Code information should be sent On or not sent Off in the MPEG video component After extraction from the digital field blanking the Time Code is sent in the encoded video component as a picture timing SEI message In 59 94 Hz mode this parameter determines whether the closed caption information extracted from the digital field blanking
11. HD SDI IN 1 BNC cnc Sn m Mux Basic encoder 2 PES amp TS HD SDI IN 2 packetizing BNC cnc Network Interface IP encapsulation CPU board cc CPU Unit Thermal R345 cnc Memory Sensor Main Connector Main Connector Software options Hardware option LAN WAN RJ45 cnc ViBE EM4000 Release 1 10 User Manual 46073586AB02 Chapter 1 Overview Product Overview ViBE EM4000 NEM40IN4AA Encoder The ViBE EM4000 NEMA4OIN4AA Encoder Block Diagram is represented below Figure 1 3 ViBE EM4000 NEM40IN4AA block diagram EM4000 Encoder HD SDI IN 1 BNC cnc HD SDI IN 2 BNC cnc Mux HD SDI IN 3 Q PES amp TS BNC cnc packetizing Network Interface LAN WAN Basic encoder 4 IP encapsulation I RJ45 cnc HD SDI IN 4 H BNC cnc CPU board C amp C IR gt CPU Unit Thermal RJ45 cnc Memory Sensor Main Connector Software options Hardware option Main Connector Encoder modes of operation The ViBE EM4000 Encoder features some Basic encoders The device can be set to have m 1 MPTS at the output of each Basic encoder 1 MPTS atthe output of the ViBE EM4000 Encoder Some examples of these configurations are represented below ViBE EM4000 Release 1 10 11 User Manual 46073586AB02 Chapter 1 Overview Produc
12. Tools Download application 2 Check the box to select the device 3 Click OK Control Panel All Control Panel Items Display and switch to 100 On a Windows 7 platform if the OK button is not displayed go to Then click Apply and log off log on Go gt Control Panel All Control Panel items Display File Edit View Tools Help Control Panel Home Make it easier to read what s on your screen You can change the size of text and other items on your screen by choosing one of these options To Adjust resolution temporarily enlarge just part of the screen use the Magnifier tool Calibrate color Change display settings Smaller 100 default Preview Connect to a projector Adjust ClearType tet Set custom text size DPI Medium 125 Larger 150 Figure 6 15 Toggle command Download application 2 reboot Toggle toggle reboot Software Release 1 Software Release 2 Select Software Release 3 Software Release 4 Inactive Software select Downloaded Software release file Uninstall an inactive software To uninstall an inactive software 1 Position the mouse cursor on the Encoder witch contains the inactive software and then right click to display the shortcut menu ViBE EM4000 Release 1 10 153 User Manual 46073586AB02 Chapter 6 Tools Download application Figure 6 16 Uninstall an inactive software Download application 1 2 Downl
13. 94 Power problem 181 Power problem on unit 4 MTEP syntax alarms matching this probable cause french 5 Alarme alimentation Code 3 66 Probl me d alimentation ou de process 94 Probl me d alimentation 181 Probleme d alimentation sur le module 4 Page 61 Alarm Help X733 syntax 9 60 Probable Cause 1098 Rebooting Category Equipment Default severity major Wording English Re booting Wording French Re d marrage Diagnosis English Re boot of the device is in progress The product does not render the expected service until this alarm disappears Diagnosis French L quipement est en phase de re boot Le produit ne rend pas le service attendu tant que cette alarme persiste Action English Wait for boot to be completed Action French Attendez que le d marrage soit termin Automatic redundancy Current autobackup Impossible Upstream autobackup Impossible The following device s can raise this probable cause DBE 4110 DSNG DBE 4120 Contribution DBE 4130 Broadcast SSEB DSS MSE DBE 4140 Local insertion ViBE EM3000 MPEG4 EM4000 Dual Channel EM4000 Quad Channel EM4000 Hexa Channel EM4000 Octal Channel V SFN Itis Adapter ViBE Encoder SD Encoder MTEP syntax alarms matching this probable cause english 46 Equipment still booting 140 Start Boot Page 62 Alarm Help X733 syntax 9 60 MTEP syntax alarms matching this probable cause
14. Amber EM4000 Dual Channel EM4000 Quad Channel EM4000 Hexa Channel EM4000 Octal Channel DBD 4433 QPSK Input DBD 4433 QAM Input DBD 4433 ASI Input DBD 4433 PDH Input DBD 4433 ATM Input DBD 4433 DSNG Input Q 8 16 DBD 4436 QPSK Input DBD 4436 QAM Input DBD 4436 ASI Input DBD 4436 PDH Input DBD 4436 ATM Input DBD 4436 DSNG Input Q 8 16 Opal II ViBE Mobile TV ViBE Mosaic Generator ASI ViBE Mosaic Generator IP VS7000 v1 x MTEP syntax alarms matching this probable cause english 154 Audio 1 decoder is not operating Page 20 Selectable Alarm Help X733 syntax 9 60 154 Audio 2 decoder is not operating 154 Audio 3 decoder is not operating 154 Video decoder is not operating 155 Decoding stopped MTEP syntax alarms matching this probable cause french 154 D codeur audio 1 inop rant 154 D codeur audio 2 inop rant 154 D codeur audio 3 inop rant 154 D codeur vid o inop rant 155 D codage stopp e Page 21 Alarm Help X733 syntax 9 60 Probable Cause 1068 Half duplex mode Category Communications Default severity minor Wording English Half duplex mode Wording French Mode half duplex Diagnosis English Auto negociation done in half duplex mode transceiver status Diagnosis French N gociation automatique effectu e en mode half duplex statut de l metteur r cepteur Action English Transmission and Reception stream could be c
15. PID PCR Status Used to select the video encoding profile Choice between MP L4 H264 Main Profile and HP L4 H264 High Profile Changing this parameter stops the outgoing video signal for approximately 5 to 10 seconds Used to set the encoding delay Standard Delay 163 fields or frames 3 2 in 50 Hz 2 7 s in 59 94 Hz a Long Delay 249 fields or frames 4 9 s in 50 Hz 4 1 s in 59 94 Hz Changing this parameter stops the outgoing video signal for approximately 5 to 10 seconds Used to set the output bitrate for the video component Possible values are between 2000 kbit s and 20 000 kbit s in 1 kbit s steps Used to identify the TS packets transporting the video component The value must be between 32 and 8190 Used to insert the program clock reference in the headers of the TS packets transporting the video component In this release the PCR must be sent by the video component This parameter cannot be edited Used to select video component broadcasting state Choice between Off Air Component broadcasting is postponed but the component is present in the service configuration On Air The component is On Air ViBE EM4000 Release 1 10 User Manual 46073586AB02 Chapter 4 Web Browser Interface Settings Click Advanced AVC to display the advanced configuration page Figure 4 27 Editing an HD video component Advanced page HD Video Configuration General Ad
16. Table 4 4 Menu bar Command Use Ka to access the Status Summary page Status to access the Status Summary Alarms and HW SW information pages Configuration to access the Encoder and Basic encoder configuration pages Preset to save the Encoder or Basic encoder configuration to the Encoder internal memory or to a disk to recall an Encoder or Basic encoder configuration from the Encoder internal memory or from a disk Maintenance to reboot the Encoder to define the names of the Encoder and Basic encoders to save the Encoder settings to a disk m to load the Encoder settings from a disk m a header indicating the User login name current User profile and the number of Users connected to the device m a Logout link used to end the session m the page contents a footer indicating the Web Interface software version ViBE EM4000 Release 1 10 57 User Manual 46073586AB02 Chapter 4 Web Browser Interface Screen Layout Figure 4 5 Web Interface page breakdown ek Status Configuration Presets Maintenance Menu bar i BE Jser admin administrator 2 gt Logout User Profile User Name Number of Users connected Page content Software version as Thomson Video Networks 2011 THOMSON EM4002 version XXXXX The pages used to configure the equipment also contain the following buttons Table 4 5 Reset and Submit buttons Button Definition submit
17. dans une baie posez le ch ssis sur des querres invers es ou sur des querres avec profil en L et observez les r gles de ventilation et de s curit nonc es section Mounting in Rack on page 18 PR CAUTIONS LORS DES MANIPULATIONS Prenez toutes les pr cautions n cessaires pour ne pas vous blesser lors du montage d montage de l quipement dans une baie N h sitez pas demander l assistance d une autre personne ou utiliser un chariot l vateur adapt Instructions de s curit g n rales ATMOSPHERE EXPLOSIVE Ne mettez en service le produit qu en zone exempte de tout risque d explosion atmosph re et mat riaux HUMIDIT De fa on viter tout risque de choc lectrique ne mettez en service le produit qu en zone s che REMPLACEMENT DE M MOIRE AVEC PILE AU LITHIUM INCORPOR E l quipement contient des m moires sauvegard es avec des piles au lithium incorpor es Ces composants ont une dur e de vie suffisante pour ne jamais tre chang s Si pour une raison quelconque le remplacement s av re n cessaire il convient de respecter les conditions suivantes ViBE EM4000 Release 1 10 User Manual 46073586AB02 Appendix B Safety Instructions Mises en garde m L op ration ne doit tre r alis e que par un personnel qualifi m Le composant doit tre remplac par un composant de m mes caract ristiques m Respectez le sens de montage du composant
18. re ue trop tard Action English In Remote Flextream context Check RTD allocator TACT and encoder TANT values or decrease network latency Action French Dans le contexte Remote Flextream V rifier les valeurs du RTD du TACT et du TANT ou diminuer la latence du r seau Automatic redundancy Current autobackup Impossible Upstream autobackup Impossible The following device s can raise this probable cause Net Processor 9030 Net Processor 9040 ViBE EM3000 MPEG4 EM4000 Dual Channel EM4000 Quad Channel EM4000 Hexa Channel EM4000 Octal Channel ViBE Encoder SD Encoder Page 18 Alarm Help X733 syntax 9 60 MTEP syntax alarms matching this probable cause english 143 REMOTE FLEXTREAM Excessive response time MTEP syntax alarms matching this probable cause french 143 REMOTE FLEXTREAM Temps de r ponse excessif Page 19 Alarm Help X733 syntax 9 60 Probable Cause 1108 function not operating Category Equipment Default severity major Wording English Function not operating Wording French Fonction inop rante Diagnosis English A function of the equipment is found inoperating Diagnosis French Une fonction ou module d un quipement est inop rant Action English Contact Customer Service Action French Contact Customer Service Automatic redundancy Current autobackup Impossible Upstream autobackup The following device s can raise this probable cause
19. 0000009 00000000 449 4 44 15 o sen Bl 3 Ly E 8 g N or O1 a N in S o O1 bl lo 1 L J p Fr e D 483 i 1 olf N S REAR PANEL o O eo ViBE EM4000 Release 1 10 161 User Manual 46073586AB02 Appendix A Technical Specifications General Device Specifications Weight Table A 3 ViBE EM4000 weight Item Weight Kg EM4000 NEM40IN2AA with one PSU 10 7 EM4000 NEM40IN4AA with one PSU 11 0 Optional PSU option NEMH4PSUAA 1 0 Ventilation Table A 4 ViBE EM4000 ventilation Built in ventilation Description and Value system Ventilation Air circulated from front to rear and sides Ventilated air flow 46 m h Temperature difference lt 20 C Delta T Figure A 2 Cooling air flow Air out rear and side panels Air in front panel Heat dissipating power Table A 5 ViBE EM4000 heat dissipating power Item Description and Value EM4000 NEM40IN2AA with one PSU 680 BTU Hour EM4000 NEM40IN4AA with one PSU 920 BTU Hour Optional PSU option NEMH4PSUAA 85 BTU Hour 162 ViBE EM4000 Release 1 10 User Manual 46073586AB02 Appendix A Technical Specifications General Device Specifications Reliability Table A 6 ViBE EM4000 and MTBF Mean Time Between Failure Items MTBF 30 C EM4000 NEM40IN2AA with one PSU 62 400 hours EM4000 NEM40IN2AA with two
20. 34 Flextream configuration error 63 Failed to update the configuration 64 Failed to update the configuration 66 Output port configuration failed 87 Configuration or customisation error 87 replaceable unit configuration mismatch 94 Configuration or customisation error 134 Board programmation lost 135 Board programmation lost 136 Board programmation lost code lost 145 Transmit parameter signal out of loop MTEP syntax alarms matching this probable cause french 34 Erreur de configuration du Flextream 63 Impossible de changer la configuration 64 Impossible de changer la configuration 66 Echec de la configuration du port de sortie 87 Erreur de configuration ou de personnalisation 87 Configuration de l unit incompatible 94 Erreur de configuration ou de personnalisation 134 Perte de la programmation 135 Perte de la programmation 136 Perte de la programmation 145 Param tres de transmission non synchronisable Page 8 Alarm Help X733 syntax 9 60 Probable Cause 1175 configuration inconsistency Category Processing error Default severity critical Wording English Configuration inconsistency Wording French Incoh rence dans la configuration Diagnosis English Illegal or inconsistent configuration Diagnosis French La fonction est dans un tat instable Action English Contact Customer Service Action French R initialiser la fonct
21. 34 Helper channel out of use 34 Bad SSEB MIGHT for 4150 45 encoder C1P out of use 45 Bad SuperEncoder MIGHT for 4150 63 Failed to update the alarm LED 64 Failed to update the alarm LED 95 Hardware failure 97 ECM computed without associated card 97 ECM computed without associated card 97 the ciphering module has broken down 97 ECMG out of order 97 no ciphering module 97 smart card unknown 97 ECMG is shutting down 98 ECM computed without associated card 98 ECMG out of order 98 no ciphering module 98 smart card unknown 98 ECMG is shutting down 102 Hardware failure 103 Hardware failure 106 Hardware failure 111 Hardware failure 115 Hardware failure 116 Hardware failure 119 Hardware failure 132 Ancillary data block lt gt composite decoder link failed 132 Automatic calibration failure 132 LTCe FIFO overflow failure 132 Ancillary data processing hardware default 132 Front panel lt gt User Maintenance link fail synthesis 132 Front panel lt gt Supervisor link fail synthesis 132 Front panel lt gt CIVA link fail synthesis 138 Hardware malfunction from the synthetiser 138 Hardware malfunction from the RF phase lock DRO 138 Hardware malfunction from the 100MHz local oscillator PLL 138 Hardware malfunction from the 70MHz local oscillator PLL 138 MC amp C board internal alarm Page 25 Alarm Help X733 syntax 9 60 138 Modu
22. En cas de retour au D partement Service Clients l quipement d fectueux doit tre plac autant que possible dans son emballage d origine cales de protection et bo tes Si vous ne disposez plus de l emballage l quipement d fectueux doit tre prot g afin de supporter les chocs pendant le transport Notre D partement Service Clients examine les emballages l arriv e et pourra refuser d effectuer une r paration en cas de d faut visuel sur l emballage d au ViBE EM4000 Release 1 10 213 User Manual 46073586AB02 Appendix B Safety Instructions Mises en garde 214 transport et ayant entra n de nouveaux d fauts par rapport la nature de l anomalie que vous avez constat e Il est rappel que le transport pour le retour des quipements est la charge et aux risques du Client l quipement ne doit tre retourn qu accompagne d une autorisation de retour d quipement RMA Return Material Authorisation ANNULATION DE GARANTIE Respectuez les r gles suivantes pour ne pas annuler la garantie m Seul le remplacement des cartes enfichables et qui ne requiert pas le d montage du capot est autoris Dans tous les autres cas remplacez l quipement par un quipement de rechange m Ne d montez jamais le capot ViBE EM4000 Release 1 10 User Manual 46073586AB02 Appendix B Safety Instructions Specific Safety Instructions Safety Instructions for Finland Norway Sweden
23. English Check input stream Action French V rifier le flux d entr e Automatic redundancy Current autobackup Impossible Upstream autobackup Selectable The following device s can raise this probable cause Net Processor 9030 DBX 2200 4 TS inputs DBX 2200 12 TS inputs Barco Quasar without RF converter Barco Agile Quasar VHF Barco Quasar MKII without RF converter Barco Agile Quasar MKII VHF Barco Agile Quasar MKII Full Band Net Feeder 9010 EM4000 Dual Channel EM4000 Hexa Channel Integrated Receiver Decoder ViBE Decoder VIBE Front End 100BT Opal J N O1 C Net Processor 9040 DBX 2200 8 TS inputs DBX 4300 6 to 26 TS inputs Barco Channelized Quasar Barco Agile Quasar UHF Barco Channelized Quasar MKII Barco Agile Quasar MKII UHF XNA 4600 adapter ViBE EM3000 MPEG4 EM4000 Quad Channel EM4000 Octal Channel ViBE Encoder ViBE Front End PDH ViBE Front End ASI SD Encoder Alarm Help X733 syntax 9 60 MTEP syntax alarms matching this probable cause english 23 TS interface overflow 55 input overflow 110 Stream overflow 117 Stream overflow 135 Input overflow 137 Input bitrate high 137 Input bitrate out of range 148 Overflow 148 Teletext overflow 155 TS Buffer overflow 183 AAL5 packet buffer overflow MTEP syntax alarms matching this probable cause french 23 D bordement sur entr e TS 55 D bordement entr e 110 D bordement du flu
24. Figure 6 5 Download application folder borlndmm dil D 5 0 12 34 Borland Memory Manager cc3250mt dil Borland C Multi thread RTL Download exe vcl50 bpl Firmware downloader FH BPL File THOMSON VIDEO NETWORKS EB 1 976 KB A vcx50 bpl xms ini BPL File Configuration Settings 243 KB 6 KB 1 Click the Download exe file The application s main window will be displayed Figure 6 6 Main window Download application Download version XMS_04 50 00 j iol x Software Release Devices to upgrade Add Remove Update til Device address Family Status Screen description The main window features two pages m Devices Software Release The Download application release number is displayed in the title bar of the main window Devices page ViBE EM4000 Release 1 10 147 User Manual 46073586AB02 Chapter 6 Tools Download application Figure 6 7 Devices page Download application Download version XMS_04 50 00 a Devices software Release Devices to upgrade Device Address 2 5 x Add Remove Update All Status Family elemaoog 103 e EM4000 12 54 56 10 12 54 57 VIBE EMA000 VIBE EM4000 IK SW status reads OK SW status read This page displays the list of installed devices and their status Click a column header to sort its content Software Release page Figure 6 8 Software Release page Download appl
25. Je soussign Ithe undersigned D clare avoir acquis la pr somption de conformit du mat riel ci dessus r f renc utilis et Declare that the herebove references product used and installed according to its user notice install conform ment la notice aux exigences essentielles des directives suivantes acquired the presumption of conformity to the essential requirement of the following directives e S curit Directive Basse Tension 2006 95 EC par l application de la norme EN 60950 1 2006 Safety Low Voltage Directive 2006 95 EC by application of the standard EN 60950 1 2006 Compatibilit lectromagn tique Directive 2004 108 EC par l application des normes EN 55022 2006 A1 2007 EN 55024 2010 EN 61000 3 2 2006 A1 2009 A2 2009 EN61000 3 3 2008 Electromagnetic compatibility Directive 2004 108 EC by application of the standards EN EN 55022 2006 A1 2007 EN 55024 2010 EN 61000 3 2 2006 A1 2009 A2 2009 EN61000 3 3 2008 Date Nom Fonction 19 03 2012 JL Diascorn Product Manager THOMSON VIDEO NETWORKS 6 rue du Clos Courtel CS 31719 35510 CESSON SEVIGNE Cedex France Tel 33 0 2 99 28 50 00 Fax 33 0 2 99 28 50 01 www thomson networks com THOMSON VIDEO NETWORKS SAS au capital social de 4 427 000 euros Si ge social 6 rue du Clos Courtel 35510 Cesson S vign France RCS Rennes 477 555 718 VAT FR58477555718 196 ViBE EM4000 Release 1 10 User Manual 4
26. Recycling the Prod css 230 Appendix E a EE 1 1 Le SSSR SRE RER ER ET EEE 231 Glossary sub een een 233 ViBE EM4000 Release 1 10 11 User Manual 46073586AB02 Contents 12 ViBE EM4000 Release 1 10 User Manual 46073586AB02 Preface Standard Documentation Set The standard ViBE EM4000 documentation set consists of m a User Manual m a Quick Start Guide The ViBE EM4000 User Manual contains background information about the ViBE EM4000 Encoder and describes operating procedures This manual can be used while learning about ViBE EM4000 and for enhancing your basic knowledge of the product The ViBE EM4000 Quick Start Guide contains information about installing and quickly configuring the equipment Software version This manual covers the functionality of software Release 1 10 of the ViBE EM4000 Encoder This manual continues to be relevant to subsequent software versions where the functionality of the equipment has not changed When a new software version changes the functionality of the product a new version of this manual is provided About this Manual This manual is written for Operators of the ViBE EM4000 Encoder This manual should be kept in a safe place for reference for the life time of the equipment If the equipment is passed on to a third party please ensure to pass on all relevant documentation including this manual The manual is organized into the following chapt
27. User admin administrator 1 gt Logou Eth1 Out EM CONTROLLER EM ENCODER 1 Eth2 Out a _ e PO This command is used to configure the Encoder s LAN WAN ETH1 network interface Figure 4 14 Eth1 Out configuration Network Interface page IP Configuration Network Interface Routing enabled disabled Internal Configuration automatic al 100 Mbps hl full duplex z Adresses 10 12 52 12 Interface State when disabled Interface State when standby Interface Status Disabled z submit reset enabled Used to enable the Eth1 interface disabled Used to disable the Eth1 interface 64 ViBE EM4000 Release 1 10 User Manual 46073586AB02 Chapter 4 Web Browser Interface Settings In the Internal Configuration group box Negotiation Speed Mode The Ethernet interface supports automatic or manual mode In automatic mode the interface automatically sets 100 Mbps or 1000 Mbps bitrate and half duplex or full duplex mode In manual mode the interface must be configured manually This parameter is used to configure Ethernet bitrate in manual mode Available bitrates are 100 Mbps or 1000 Mbps This parameter is used to configure the Ethernet operating mode in manual mode The available modes are half duplex or full duplex recommended mode In the Addresses group box IP address Netmask Default Gateway Interface address It must be betwee
28. Wording French Liaison coup e Diagnosis English The line transceiver of the board cannot lock on signal Note This event as many other reception alarms is generally produced by transmission problems in the network It can also comes for a device partial failure The quality of transmission shall be analysed by skilled staff A check of network state shall be made If no cause is directly detected there a transmission analyser shall be used in place of the device for comparison If a test system is not available a device exchange can be performed Hereunder analysis proposal covers only trivial causes Diagnosis French L metteur r cepteur de lignes de la carte ne peut pas verrouiller le signal Remarque cet v nement est g n ralement d des probl mes de transmission du r seau Il peut galement provenir d une d faillance partielle de l quipement La qualit de la transmission doit tre analys e par un personnel qualifi L tat du r seau doit galement tre v rifi Si aucune cause n est directement d tect e de cette mani re remplacer l quipement par un analyseur de transmission et effectuer une comparaison Si aucun syst me de test n est disponible il est possible d changer les quipements Action English Check if the good cable is plug on the board If signal conformity is proved de plug and re plug the board Wait until it is recognised by the control and command software Action
29. on page 64 Configuring TS streams and IP encapsulation On the Status Summary page click on the stream to be configured The number of streams to be configured depends on the Encoder operating mode Figure 4 17 Status Summary page breakdown Streams to configure D D Outputs Eth1 Out P ernabied Eth1 Out gt Eth2 Out 10000 kbit s gt TS 2 nues Disabled gt Ethi Out 20129220 Eth1 Out gt Eth2 Out add service add ghost Eth2 Out Expert parameters OFF Fer iq enabled 10000 kbit s gt TS 1 10 12 52 55 225 15 15 15 5000 gt Eth1 Out Ethi Out gt Eth2 Out 10000 kbit s gt TS 2 Disabled gt Eth1 Out hi Out gt ut add service add ghost The Basic encoders number depends on the Encoder type Editing the Transport Stream parameters ViBE EM4000 Release 1 10 67 User Manual 46073586AB02 Chapter 4 Web Browser Interface Settings Figure 4 18 Transport Stream configuration page TS parameters Transport Stream Transmission IP 1 Transmission IP 2 Scrambling Original Network Id f Transport Stream Id 1 Signalling Mode ISO Conformity hd NIT in PAT con Off On Of 10 s TS bitrate 10000 000 kbit s submit reset Original Network Id Used to uniquely identify the outgoing stream They are Transport Stream Id inserted in the signalling tables Signalling Mode Used to setthe signalling mode ISO Conformity Only ISO tables PAT PMT CAT are sent in
30. 18 AWG 10 A minimum 250 V compliant with the applicable standard or rules of the country where the device is installed Mains outlet end of cable plug compliant with the applicable standard or rules of the country where the device is installed Connecting AC Mains Power Supply Cord s Power Supply End The connection panel should comply with the legislation in force in the country of installation The connection panel must be positioned in the rack in such a way that the plug and power cord s are within easy reach for switching off purposes For each mains inlet the wiring system must feature overload and earth fault protection and a bipolar cut off device or a differential circuit breaker If in doubt contact a qualified electrician ViBE EM4000 End Plug the power cord s into the mains inlet s VIBE EM4000 Release 1 10 User Manual 46073586AB02 Chapter 2 Installation and Startup Powering Up Powering Up Check that ViBE EM4000 is not yet connected to the LAN as factory set IP addresses may cause disturbance on the LAN when ViBE EM4000 is switched on address conflict Connect the power cords The green Power LED s PSU 1 and PSU 2 if optional PSU is installed will come on After a start up phase the device will become operational When the device is switched on the last stored configuration will be active ViBE EM4000 Release 1 10 25 User Manual 46073586AB02 Chapter 2 Ins
31. 24 depending on the compression standards from encoders that are compressed together in a single DVB compliant transport stream for delivery to a Modulator N In a GOP Group Of Picture N is the distance between successive I Frames NAL Network Abstraction Layer H264 NIT Network Information Table A mandatory Digital Video Broadcast DVB SI table that provides a grouping of Transport Streams TSs and the relevant tuning information ViBE EM4000 Release 1 10 241 User Manual 46073586AB02 Glossary NMS NTP NTSC NVOD P frame Packet PAFF PAT PCM PCR 242 Network Management System Network Time Protocol National Television Systems Committee An American based committee who sets color television broadcast transmission and reception standards used in the US Canada Mexico and Japan as well as other Latin American and Asian countries This system uses 525 picture lines and a 59 97 Hz field frequency Near Video On Demand NVOD is a consumer video technique used by multi channel broadcasters using high bandwidth distribution mechanisms such as satellite and cable television Multiple copies of a program are broadcast at short time intervals typically 10 20 minutes providing convenience for viewers who can watch the program without needing to tune in at a scheduled point in time The video can be sold Predicted frame A P frame holds only the changes in the image from the previous frame I
32. 32 MPEG RTP UDPAP z Tx Encapsulation Number of MPEG packets per IP frame 3 enabled disabled 233 246 0 1 5000 In the Tx parameters group box Output Destination IP Address Destination UDP port Virtual Source IP Address ViBE EM4000 Release 1 10 User Manual 46073586AB02 This parameter is used to enable or disable the output IP 1 Destination IP address for IP frames transporting MPEG packets unicast or multicast address It must be between 0 0 0 0 and 255 255 255 255 Destination UDP port number for IP frames transporting MPEG packets It must be between 5000 and 50000 Virtual IP address for transmitted frames It must be between 0 0 0 0 and 255 255 255 255 The virtual source address is used to set an IP address that is different from the port address in the multicast packet source address field This feature is used in some redundancy architectures implementing an IGMP v3 network when all Ethernet interfaces of all encoders including those of redundant encoders need to be accessible via the ping command If not used set the enabled disabled parameter to disabled 69 Chapter 4 Web Browser Interface Settings 70 TOS DiffServe byte This parameter is used to configure the TOS DiffServ field for IP frames transporting MPEG packets If Other is selected the Operator can edit the field value and enter the required value in the right hand field The default value i
33. 94 D faillance de la batterie d horloge temps r el Page 69 Alarm Help X733 syntax 9 60 Probable Cause 1331 Saturated signal Category Communications Default severity major Wording English Saturated signal Wording French Signal satur Diagnosis English Signal saturation detected on specified channel Diagnosis French Saturation du signal d tect sur la voie sp cifi e Action English Check input signal level or disable saturation detection Action French V rifier le niveau du signal d entr e ou d sactiver la d tection de saturation Automatic redundancy Current autobackup Impossible Upstream autobackup Impossible The following device s can raise this probable cause ViBE EM3000 MPEG4 EM4000 Dual Channel EM4000 Quad Channel EM4000 Hexa Channel EM4000 Octal Channel MTEP syntax alarms matching this probable cause english MTEP syntax alarms matching this probable cause french Page 70 Alarm Help X733 syntax 9 60 Probable Cause 156 sfwrDownloadFailure Category Processing error Default severity major Wording English Sfwr download failure Wording French Echec de t l chargement de logiciel Diagnosis English Impossible to download a firmware in a programmable component Diagnosis French Impossible de t l charger un logiciel embarqu dans un composant programmable Action English Contact Customer Service for analysi
34. ASI ViBE Mosaic Generator IP VS7000 v1 x MTEP syntax alarms matching this probable cause english 62 1 MTEP syntax alarms matching this probable cause french 62 1 Page 56 Alarm Help X733 syntax 9 60 Probable Cause 154 outOfCPUCycles Category Processing error Default severity Critical Wording English Out of CPU cycles Wording French Plus de ressource processeur disponible Diagnosis English Diagnosis French Action English Action French Automatic redundancy Current autobackup Impossible Upstream autobackup Impossible The following device s can raise this probable cause Net Processor 9030 Net Processor 9040 Net Feeder 9010 EM4000 Dual Channel EM4000 Quad Channel EM4000 Hexa Channel EM4000 Octal Channel MTEP syntax alarms matching this probable cause english MTEP syntax alarms matching this probable cause french Page 57 Alarm Help X733 syntax 9 60 Probable Cause 1329 No valid bitrate allocation received Category Communications Default severity major Wording English No valid bitrate allocation received Wording French Allocation de d bit re ue non valide Diagnosis English No valid bitrate allocation received Diagnosis French Allocation de debit recue non valide Action English For Remote Flextream check the remote allocator work Check that a transmission error has been detected Check if errors appear on encode
35. ASI ViBE Mosaic Generator IP VS7000 v1 x VS7000 v2 0 CP6000 MTEP syntax alarms matching this probable cause english Page 77 Alarm Help X733 syntax 9 60 111 Unreachable destination 116 Unreachable destination MTEP syntax alarms matching this probable cause french 111 Destination inaccessible 116 Destination inaccessible Page 78 Alarm Help X733 syntax 9 60 Probable Cause 1339 Unsuitable link speed Category Communications Default severity minor Wording English Unsuitable link speed Wording French Vitesse de la liaison inadaptee Diagnosis English The affected ethernet interface has detected a connection but the speed is not compatible with the port speed Diagnosis French Une connexion a t d tect e sur l interface ethernet mais la vitesse n est pas compatible avec celle du port Action English For the Control and Command ethernet check that the network is a 10Mbps or a 100Mbps network For the Ethernet streaming ports check that the network is a 100Mbps or 1000Mbps network Action French Pour l ethernet Contr le et Commande v rifier que le r seau est un r seau 10Mbps ou 100 Mbps Pour les ports ethernet de flux v rifier que le r seau est un r seau 100 Mbps ou 1000 Mbps Automatic redundancy Current autobackup Impossible Upstream autobackup Impossible The following device s can raise this probable cause EM4000 Dual Channel EM4000 Quad
36. Active packages Inactive packages EM4000 01 00 00 019 EM4000 01 00 00 002 MAIN Board Board Type Prod Unit Part Number Product Serial Number Main Unit Part Number Main Serial Number Equipment Code Hardware Level Prod Unit Variant Number Power2 Product Unit Variant Power2 Option Unit Part Number AES Board Unit Part Number AES Option Unit Part Number MAIN Board NEM40IN4 psn47501012 Product serial number 46073401AC mbsn89524577 839E a een 4 Equipment code 2 Provide Thomson Video Networks with the equipment code and specify the software option required Thomson Video Networks will then supply a specific key which is unique and can only be used for this Encoder 3 Install the software option See section Installing a software option insopt on page 127 Installing a software option insopt To install a software option using the code Thomson Video Networks 1 Type insopt after the ViBE prompt ViBE EM4000 Release 1 10 User Manual 46073586AB02 supplied by 127 Chapter 5 Servicing Operations performed using the Local Console Figure 5 19 Enabling a software option insopt command 1 2 10 12 54 24 PUTTY lo x ViBE gt insopt al Option key L E 2 Enter the software Option key Figure 5 20 Enabling a software option insopt command 2 2 i 10 12 54 24 PuTTY lalx ViBE gt insopt a Option key 41507D Installat
37. Audio Stream if the Syntax is MPEG 4 ViBE EM4000 Release 1 10 89 User Manual 46073586AB02 Chapter 4 Web Browser Interface Settings 90 Click Dolby to display the Dolby Metadata Control page Figure 4 34 Editing an audio component Dolby Metadata Control page Audio Configuration AUD1 General Dolby Misc Metadata Control Metadata Parameters 1 Metadata Parameters 2 12215 DIGITAL Dolby and the double D symbol are registered trademarks of Dolby Laboratories submit reset Internal z Internal z This page is used to set the Metadata source when Dolby Digital AC3 or Dolby Digital Plus E AC3 has been chosen as the audio Output Standard on the General page Metadata source Metadata Reversion Mode Used to set the Metadata source if Input Format is set to Dolby E on the General page Choice between Internal Metadata is set via the Metadata parameters 1 and Metadata parameters 2 pages Dolby E Metadata is extracted from the Dolby E encoded stream This parameter can not be changed It indicates Encoder behavior when the expected Metadata is missing Last valid The last Metadata parameters to be enabled are used Internal The parameters set on the Metadata parameters 1 and Metadata parameters 2 pages are used ViBE EM4000 Release 1 10 User Manual 46073586AB02 Chapter 4 Web Browser Interface Settings On the Dolby page click
38. Caution statements identify conditions or practices that may result in Notes provide supplementary information They are highlighted for I emphasis as in this example and are placed immediately after the relevant text ViBE EM4000 Release 1 10 3 User Manual 46073586AB02 Preface Documentation Feedback Formatting Naming conventions for the interface elements and Windows elements in this manual follow the Microsoft Manual of Style Third Edition Naming conventions for MPEG 2 ATSC and DVB structures follow the conventions derived from the standards documents listed in Appendix A Technical Specifications In addition the following formatting conventions apply to this manual m Pale blue text refers to specific interface elements that you are instructed to select click or clear Example Select Settings from the Configuration menu m Blue text refers to document names sections figures or tables Example Refer to Section Warnings Cautions and Notes on page 13 for more information m Mono spaced text can indicate the following Text you enter from a keyboard Example Enter administrator for your login and administrator for your password Paths to components on your hard drive Example The MIB is at the following location C MIB Documentation Feedback We take great care with our publications Please help us to improve them by sending your feedback with the refe
39. Channel EM4000 Hexa Channel EM4000 Octal Channel SD Encoder MTEP syntax alarms matching this probable cause english Page 79 Alarm Help X733 syntax 9 60 MTEP syntax alarms matching this probable cause french Page 80 Alarm Help X733 syntax 9 60 Probable Cause 1183 unvalid saved configuration Category Processing error Default severity critical Wording English Invalid saved configuration Wording French Configuration sauvegard e non valide Diagnosis English The configuration stored in the non volatile memory is invalid and has been discarded The product is working with its default configuration Diagnosis French La configuration sauvegard e dans la m moire non volatile est invalide et n a pu tre appliqu e Le produit fonctionne dans sa configuration par d faut Action English Load a new configuration and if the problem persists Contact Customer Service Action French Charger une nouvelle configuration Automatic redundancy Current autobackup Impossible Upstream autobackup Selectable The following device s can raise this probable cause Net Processor 9030 Net Processor 9040 Mediation Unit Audio Video Acquisition Net Feeder 9010 ViBE EM3000 MPEG4 EM4000 Dual Channel EM4000 Quad Channel EM4000 Hexa Channel EM4000 Octal Channel V SFN Itis Adapter ViBE ViBE Encoder ViBE Decoder ViBE Front End PDH ViBE Front End 100BT ViBE Front End ASI SD Encoder MTEP syntax a
40. E to PCM 2 0 switching Dolby E detected PCM 2 0 detected ee Rate set by the User Fixed default bitrate kbit s kbit s Dolby Digital AC3 384 192 448 256 Dolby Digital Plus 192 96 E AC3 256 128 If another Main bitrate is proposed by the User and auto switch mode is ON the bitrate will remain the same for both the stereo and surround streams and the signaling will remain of Surround type in fact in this case silence is inserted on Ls Rs Center and LFE channels When auto switch mode is OFF and the Dolby E stream disappears the last valid Dolby E frame will be repeated 3 times and if it is still not resynchronized the encoder will be muted encoding of silence at the same bitrate Dolby E 5 1 to Dolby E 2 0 auto switch mode Dolby Dual configuration The Encoder can monitor the Dolby E input and encode in the 5 1 or 2 0 program This switch mode can be set ON OFF by the User When automatic switching mode is ON the Encoder switches to the default bitrate when 2 0 is detected in the Dolby E stream instead of 5 1 and signals a stereo stream rather than a surround stream The default bitrate mode cannot be set by the User The bitrates used are Table A 26 Bitrates in Dolby Dual configuration mode Dolby E 5 1 to Dolby E 2 0 switching Dolby E 5 1 Dolby E 2 0 Output Standard detected detected selected Rate set by the User Fixed default bitrat
41. French S assurer que le cable appropri est correctement raccord la carte Si la conformit du signal est tablie retirer puis r ins rer la carte Automatic redundancy Current autobackup Impossible Upstream autobackup Impossible Page 30 Alarm Help X733 syntax 9 60 The following device s can raise this probable cause EM4000 Dual Channel EM4000 Quad Channel EM4000 Hexa Channel EM4000 Octal Channel RD 2000 RD 5000 SD RD 5002 SD RD 1000 RD 1002 RD 5000 HD SD RD 3000 SD Encoder ViBE Mosaic Generator ASI ViBE Mosaic Generator IP VS7000 v1 x CP6000 MTEP syntax alarms matching this probable cause english 111 Link down 116 Link down 135 Unconnected linked tributary 136 Unconnected linked tributary 155 Fast ethernet link down 183 No data link 184 Lower layer down 185 Lower layer down 186 Lower layer down 187 Lower layer down 187 SSCOP link down 187 ILMI link down 188 Lower layer down 189 Lower layer down 190 Lower layer down 191 Lower layer down MTEP syntax alarms matching this probable cause french 111 Liaison coup e 116 Liaison coup e 135 Affluent li non connect 136 Affluent li non connect 155 Liaison coup e 183 Pas de lien data 184 Couche inf rieure HS 185 Couche inf rieure HS 186 Couche inf rieure HS 187 Couche inf rieure HS 187 Perte du lien de signalisation 187 Perte du lien ILMI 188 Couche inf r
42. Ger te werden ohne AC Netzkabel geliefert Diese sind separat zu bestellen Netzkabel sollten stets gem den Anweisungen im Abschnitt section Power Supply and Protective Ground on page 24 verwendet werden und den anwendbaren Rechtsvorschriften im jeweiligen Installationsland entsprechen BERSPANNUNG DES STROMNETZES STROMKREISES F r jeden Abzweigstromkreis ist an der Anschlussplatte ein berspannungs und Erdschlussschutz sowie eine doppelpolige Abschaltung oder ein Differentialschutzschalter vorzusehen STROMNETZ ANSCHLUSSPLATTE Die Anschlussplatte hat den landesspezifischen Rechtsvorschriften zu gen gen Die Anschlussplatte ist so im Rack zu montieren dass alle Stecker und Netzkabel zum Ausschalten leicht zug nglich sind BERSPANNUNGSSCHUTZ Das Netzanschlussger t ist mit einem nicht zug nglichen und nicht zur cksetzbaren berspannungsschutz ausgestattet F r die Behebung eventueller St rungen ist der Kundendienst von Thomson Video Networks zust ndig TRENNUNG DER STROMVERSORGUNG Einige Ger te verf gen ggf ber mehrere Spannungsversorgungskabel Zur Verringerung der Stromschlaggefahr sind vor jedem Eingriff s mtliche Kabel herauszuziehen Sicherheitshinweise bez glich Rackgeh use BETRIEBSTEMPERATURUMGEBUNG Bei geschlossenen Racks bzw Mehrfach Racks kann die Umgebungstemperatur im Rack h her als die Raumtemperatur sein Durch eine ausreichende Bel ftung gem Abschnitt section M
43. Isolation class Installation category Overcurrent protection Built in protection cannot be accessed or reset Power Consumption m The chassis is designed to operate at high power to account for future upgrades The maximum power required for this type of chassis is 600W primary at 240VAC m The maximum power required primary for the ViBE EM4000 Encoder depends on the chassis configuration Table A 2 ViBE EM4000 Power Consumption Item Power Consumption W EM4000 NEM40IN2AA with one PSU 200 EM4000 NEM40IN4AA with one PSU 270 Optional PSU option NEMH4PSUAA 25 VIBE EM4000 Release 1 10 User Manual 46073586AB02 Appendix A Technical Specifications General Device Specifications Mechanical Features Dimensions ViBE EM4000 has the following dimensions m Width 19 449 mm m Height 1RU m Depth 633 mm without connector 639 mm with connectors Figure A 1 ViBE EM4000 dimensions 465 888888888 RN 223988888 5 k G00000000 Kalle o O 0000000 NT
44. LC HE AAC 2 0 encoding 177 AAC LC HE AAC 5 1 encoding 177 Dolby Digital AC3 Dolby Digital Plus E AC3 Transport external encoding 177 Audio description encoding nenn nenn 178 Dolby EB d ecodindis sssssis errant ne 179 Audio other features iii 180 Audio silence alarms VV 180 Audio saturation alarms namen 180 Additional audio delay VV 180 VB PrOCeSSINQ est energie nee ren tue 180 Time COGS VITC are nannten 180 Closed Captionssssisinisnnmmnnihiinnanhiheneshse 180 PVR descriplon an AR he Men ie 180 Active Format Description AFD 181 TD Teletext ss na een NAS de coca 181 FlexXtream iss seen ded Steen Goo rein vera Binnen 182 Control Command ns 183 Control Command via a Web Browser 183 Control Command via the XMSUR 183 Control Command via SNMP 183 NTP Time Synchronization sssiasenonhatstnrinesel 183 Control Command via the Encoder front panel 183 OPHOMS cts E E ee ee 185 Hardware options 185 Additional AC Power Supply 185 Software Opto NS retient Een nent 185 AUCIO OPTIONS Has stand net en Sound venus ee nn ones 185 MPEG 1 Layer Il audio encoding 185 Dolby Digital AC3 Dolby Digital Plus E AC3 2 0 encoding 186 Dolby Digital AC3 Dolby Digital Plus E AC3 5 1 encoding 187 AAC LC HE AAC HE AAC v2 2 0 encoding 188 AAC LC HE AAC 5 1 encoding 189 Dolby E decoding
45. Mosquito Off No expert parameter m Conf_50_720p_WBU_ISOG Audio parameter definition Audio1 Standard AC3 Transport Source SDI Grp1 Ch1 Mode Stereo Rate 192 kbit s Audio2 Standard MPEG 1 Layer Il Source SDI Grp1 Ch1 Mode Stereo Rate 192 kbit s Video parameter definition Frequency 50 Hz Profile HP L4 Standard Resolution 720p x 1280 Bitrate 8 Mbps GOP 48 8 PAFF Frame Compression Delay Long Delay PVE On PVR Off Adaptive GOP Full Preprocessing Noise Reduction 1 Adapt Filter 2 Entropy Shaping 1 Mosquito Off No expert parameter ViBE EM4000 Release 1 10 103 User Manual 46073586AB02 Chapter 4 Web Browser Interface Settings 104 Figure 4 45 WBU_ISOG configurations stored in factory Configurations stored in factory Stored predefined confiqurations 33 14 03 985302788 23 54 19 admin x x 34 14 03 985302788 23 57 36 admin x 35 14 03 985302788 23 56 24 admin g x 36 14 03 985302788 23 58 18 admin RO RO RO RO 18Kb 18Kb 18Kb 18Kb Chassis Chassis Chassis Chassis WBU ISOG 5 svc Ji WBU ISOL_ 720p WBU ISOG_5 _ WBU ISO _ _ p Add new confiquration from file Save active configuration 0 KB Save Recall Configurations Save to Coder Chassis Description Saving the active configuration in the device To save the active configuration in the dev
46. On This parameter enabled in 5 0 or 5 1 mode is used to indicate that a project was mixed in the Surround EX format with a matrix encoded surround signal embedded within the two surround channels Choice between Not Surround Ex Dolby Surround Ex Small Room Default value Not Surround Ex This parameter enables audio that has passed through a particular A D conversion stage to be marked as such so that a decoder may apply the complementary D A process Choice between Standard or HDCD Default value Standard Click the Misc tab to display other audio component parameters VIBE EM4000 Release 1 10 User Manual 46073586AB02 Chapter 4 Web Browser Interface Settings Figure 4 37 Editing an audio component Misc page Audio Confiquration AUD1 General Dolby Misc Additional Delay 0 ms Alarm Saturation con Off Alarm Detected Silence 2 s gt Language Select a language gt z Audio Type Undefined z fo Copyright With v Content Original bd submit reset This page is used to set other audio component encoding parameters Additional Delay Used to adjust the audio component in keeping with the video component to obtain correct lip sync by compensating for audio video phase shift generated upstream an external audio encoder for instance This parameter may also be used with a non standard decoder Range of settings available 500 ms to 500 ms Alarm Satura
47. One channel HD AVC encoding license 1 license must be ordered per channel System licenses EM4000 LIC FLEXTRE NEMS4FLEAA LAN Flextream 1 license must be ordered per channel EM4000 LIC FLEXALL NEMS4FLAAA WAN LAN Flextream Audio software options EM4000 LIC DD20 NEMS4DOLAA DD DD stereo encoding one 2 0 Up to 12 options can be ordered per chassis NEM40IN2AA or 24 options per chassis NEM40IN4AA EM4000 LIC AAC NEMS4AACAA AAC HE AAC stereo encoding one stereo Up to 12 options can be ordered per chassis NEM40IN2AA or 24 options per chassis NEM40IN4AA EM4000 LIC MPEG1L2 NEMS4MP1AA MPEG1LII stereo encoding one stereo Up to 12 options can be ordered per chassis NEM40IN2AA or 24 options per chassis NEM40IN4AA EM4000 LIC DD51 NEMS4D51AA DD DD surround encoding one 5 1 or three 2 0 Up to 4 options can be ordered per chassis NEM40IN2AA or 8 options per chassis NEM40IN4AA 198 VIBE EM4000 Release 1 10 User Manual 46073586AB02 Appendix A Technical Specifications Ordering guide Table A 29 Ordering references for VIBE EM4000 Commercial Part me code number Description EM4000 LIC HEAAC51 NEMS4A51AA AAC LC HE AAC surround encoding one 5 1 or three 2 0 Up to 4 options can be ordered per chassis NEM40IN2AA or 8 options per chassis NEM40IN4AA EM4000 LIC DE NEMS4DDEAA Dolby E decoding Up to 4 options can be ordered per chassis NEMA40IN2AA or 8 options per chassis NEM40IN4AA
48. PSU is On m Keypad The keypad features 7 keys used to display and select a menu or a setting Table 3 3 Keypad specifications Key Function gt Move the cursor to the right Move the cursor to the left N Move the cursor up NY Move the cursor down OK Access the main menu a sub menu or confirm a setting value ESC Go back to the menu above HOME Go back to the MAIN menu To change a numeric value with the keypad 1 Select the value to change using the or gt key until the marker indicates the value to change 2 Set the value with the or key 3 Press the OK key to confirm the new value LCD screen The LCD screen features a graphic display 192 x 64 pixels It provides up to 4 lines Line 1 menu context Lines 2 3 and 4 2 x 3 menu matrix ViBE EM4000 Release 1 10 39 User Manual 46073586AB02 Chapter 3 Front Panel Operation Front Panel Description Figure 3 2 LCD menu matrix overview MENU CONTEXT lt ITEM1 gt lt ITEM2 gt lt ITEM3 gt lt ITEM4 gt lt ITEM5 gt lt ITEM6 gt Symbols or markers help to locate and or select displayed items Table 3 4 Meaning of Encoder front panel LCD symbols Symbol Meaning lt Animated symbol in the top right of the status screen indicating that the Encoder is operational Text preselection marker The selected text can then be gt lt confirmed by pressing the OK key on the keypad Move th
49. Se Sew x x REN aa Ss gt ne EL TI I TS TS NE EN EN Fresh air supply for the units and racks 18 C 50 60 relative humidity 20 ViBE EM4000 Release 1 10 User Manual 46073586AB02 Chapter 2 Installation and Startup Mounting in Rack Figure 2 3 Second example ViBE EM4000 on an unpressurized floor in a standard rack front view Hot air Fresh air supply for the units and racks 18 C 50 60 relative humidity ViBE EM4000 Release 1 10 21 User Manual 46073586AB02 Chapter 2 Installation and Startup Mounting in Rack Figure 2 4 ViBE EM4000 in a standard rack side view RIGHT SIDE LEFT SIDE RACK RACK RACK FRONT REAR FRONT 1RU I Lprofle e MIN 800mm MIN 800mm Note The 1RU side blank panel and pre cut L profiles can be replaced by an inverted L profile 22 ViBE EM4000 Release 1 10 User Manual 46073586AB02 Chapter 2 Installation and Startup Mounting in Rack Cabling It is essential to separate the power supply cables from the signal cables When facing the rear ofthe rack as the device is connected via the rear panel the power supply cables must be guided to the right ofthe chassis and the signal cables to the left EMC Ground The EMC connection is required to ensure ground equipotentiality between the different devices in the technical center only one
50. Sequences for Multiple Picture Rates SMPTE 291M 2006 Ancillary Data Packet and Space Formatting SMPTE 292M 2006 1 5 Gb s Signal Data Serial Interface SMPTE 296M 2001 1280 x 720 Progressive Image Sample Structure Analog and Digital Representation and Analog Interface SMPTE 425M AB2006 3 Gb s Signal Data Serial Interface SMPTE 372M 2009 Dual Link SMPTE 292M Interface for 1920 x 1080 Picture Raster SMPTE RP 165 1994 Error Detection Checkwords and Status Flags for Use in Bit Serial Digital Interfaces for Television SMPTE 2031 Carriage of DVB SCTE VBI Data in VANC SMPTE 2016 Vertical Ancillary Data Mapping of Active Format Description and Bar Data SMPTE RP188 1999 Transmission of Time Code and Control Code in the Ancillary Data Space of a Digital Television Data Stream ViBE EM4000 Release 1 10 193 User Manual 46073586AB02 Appendix A Technical Specifications Certifications and environmental specifications Certifications and environmental specifications Category Table A 28 Certifications and environmental specifications Standard Designed tested for compliance with Safety 2006 95 EEC European Low Voltage Directive 2006 95 E replacing 73 23 EEC and 93 68 EEC EN60950 Safety of Information Technology Equipment including Electrical Business Equipment En 60950 1 First Edition 2006 ANSI UL60950 Standard for Safety of Information Technology Equipmen
51. Sp cifiGatiQNs ni ea 164 VME MEAG OS SORENUNREBRAEDEREEDEBEEHREBREPERNEREERSEERNOEEEERFEEREHNEREFCHIBECER 164 Input Processing 164 INBUETOrNAR ne benne 164 SHV PCP ZEN nannten 164 Video behavior ou e eeeeeeeccteceeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteeeteeeeeenees 164 Audio behavior nn nn nenn nennen 165 VBl behaviar nennen 165 Ouiputinterlates ai 166 P Adaptations a a ara A ie 167 Ethernet interface 167 Physical layer u ahnen 167 MAC Layer ne 167 IP Layer u a einen 167 ROUINO WERBEEERUPERRREEEEBBEHFUERIRERTEEETEETEEESEITETHITESEITERSTERTRTTELERT 167 Mapping encapsulation uuuesersennnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn 167 UDP mode MPEG UDPIIP u 168 RTP mode MPEG RTP UDP IP nssessssssssesssssesnnn 168 ViBE EM4000 Release 1 10 9 User Manual 46073586AB02 Contents 10 MPEG transmission sense 168 Control amp Command interfaces ccccceeeeeeeeeesenttaeeeeeeeeeeees 169 FRQTUFCS nc ae essen 170 MPEG system layer un en en 170 HD Video encoding VV 171 Input HD video encoding formats ann 171 HD Video preprocessing sss44444444nnnnnnnn non nn nennen 171 HD Video processing 173 Audi processing anna seen et 175 WES SIQNGIS ER NA arin 175 Audio capabilities 176 MPEG 1 Layer Il audio encoding 177 Dolby Digital AC3 Dolby Digital Plus E AC3 2 0 encoding 177 Dolby Digital AC3 Dolby Digital Plus E AC3 5 1 encoding 177 AAC
52. Specific Safety Instructions SPECIFIC SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS FOR FINLAND Laite on liitett v suojamaadoituskoskettimilla varustettuun pistorasiaan SPECIFIC SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS FOR NORWAY Apparatet m tilkoples jordet stikkontakt SPECIFIC SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS FOR SWEDEN Apparaten skall anslutas till jordat uttag ViBE EM4000 Release 1 10 215 User Manual 46073586AB02 Appendix B Safety Instructions Specific Safety Instructions BLANK PAGE 216 ViBE EM4000 Release 1 10 User Manual 46073586AB02 Appendix C Regulatory Notices FCC Emission Control This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital device pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when the equipment is operated in a commercial environment This equipment generates uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and if not installed and used in accordance with the instruction manual may cause harmful interference to radio communications Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause harmful interference in which case the user will be required to correct the interference at his own expense Changes or modifications not expressiy approved by Thomson Video Networks can affect emission compliance and could void the user s authority to operate this equipment Canadian EMC Notice of Compliance
53. Telecommunications Formerly CCITT Produces global telecommunication standards and defines tariff and accounting principles An audio mode in which the left and right channels of audio are encoded into one channel This mode is used to reduce bandwidth needs and thus improve compression efficiency Joint Photographic Experts Group Name of the committee that created the JPEG standard and also other standards The JPEG standard specifies the codec which defines how a still image is compressed into a stream of bytes and decompressed back into an image Joint Video Team JVT The Joint Video Team is a group of video coding experts from ITU T Study Group 16 VCEG and ISO IEC JTC 1 SC 29 WG 11 MPEG created to develop an advanced video coding specification The JVT s main result has been ITU T Rec H 264 ISO IEC 14496 10 commonly referred to as H 264 MPEG 4 AVC H 264 AVC or MPEG 4 Part 10 AVC Kilo bits per second Local Area Network A local area network is a network that connects computers and devices in a limited geographical area such as home school computer laboratory or office building Low overhead Audio Transport Multiplex LATM is part of the method to encapsulate HE AAC audio into transport stream Low Complexity Advanced Audio Coding Liquid Crystal Display Light Emitting Diode Low overhead Audio Stream LOAS is part of the method to encapsulate HE AAC audio into a transport stream In a GOP Group
54. This type of encoding is used to transparently transport audio samples encoded in Dolby Digital 2 0 or 5 1 If a Dolby Digital Transport component has been instantiated and the I input is a Dolby Digital Plus stream then the Dolby Digital Plus stream is passed through and an alarm is raised If a Dolby Digital Plus Transport component has been instantiated and the input is a Dolby Digital stream then the Dolby Digital stream is passed through and an alarm is raised The error masking error detection and last frame repetition feature is implemented Table A 14 Dolby Digital AC3 Dolby Digital Plus E AC3 Transport audio bitrates Mode Bitrates kbit s Dolby Digital AC3 Transport 96 128 192 224 256 320 384 448 512 576 640 Dolby Digital Plus E AC3 Transport 96 128 192 224 256 320 384 448 512 576 640 Audio description encoding Audio descriptions can be encoded in MPEG 1 Layer Il or HE AAC if the associated options are available The Audio Description feature is used to send an audio commentary channel and associated data fade and pan values in addition to its normal stereo sound This channel is designed for the visually impaired and is used to send a verbal description ofthe visual scene on the screen subject to decoder compatibility The data associated with the commentary is used to define the mix adjust right left levels for the pan values and the commentary lev
55. active Topology Read current shelf topology status Display NTP configuration Set NTP configuration Setup FTP server parameters Get version of the active and inactives Product Packages FTP Download Setup and Test the specified Product Package Activate the specified Product Package Remove the specified Inactive Product Package Get last action result Reboot the equipment to launch new active Product Package Add user Remove user list users save current conf as predefined conf To continue lt RETURN gt To abort lt CTL C gt Figure 5 6 List of Local Console commands 2 2 0 12 54 29 PuTTY Available commands cont d al PDCLOAD CONF PDCREM CONF PDCGET CONF load a predefined conf remove a predefined conf get one or all predefined conf RINFO SNMP Get System info WINFO SNMP Set System info CLIST SNMP Show Communities CAD Danana SNMP Add a new Community CDEL SNMP Delete Community CREAD SNMP Read Communities from file CSAVE SNMP Save Communities to file LSOPT OPTSW get function options list INSOPT OPTSW add options RMOPT OPTSW remove options EQCOD RID Display equipment code DRID RID Display board and shelf status SETKEYID KEY Set injected id key HELP Display help QUIT Quit tool ViBE gt Jj Overview of commands The Local Console application provides many commands Some of these commands are not however intended for the device User
56. autobackup Impossible The following device s can raise this probable cause XNA 4600 adapter EM4000 Dual Channel EM4000 Quad Channel EM4000 Hexa Channel EM4000 Octal Channel MTEP syntax alarms matching this probable cause english 183 Board inhibited MTEP syntax alarms matching this probable cause french 183 Carte inhib e Page 68 Alarm Help X733 syntax 9 60 Probable Cause 1077 rtc battery failure Category Equipment Default severity minor Wording English Real time clock battery failure Wording French D faillance de la batterie d horloge temps r el Diagnosis English Backup battery is discharged Product may loose its configuration after the next reboot or switch off Diagnosis French La batterie de secours est d charg e Le produit risque de perdre sa configuration apr s la prochaine r initialisation ou mise hors tension Action English Contact your Sales representative for maintenance Action French Contacter le Service Clients pour maintenance Automatic redundancy Current autobackup Impossible Upstream autobackup Impossible The following device s can raise this probable cause ViBE EM3000 MPEG4 EM4000 Dual Channel EM4000 Quad Channel EM4000 Hexa Channel EM4000 Octal Channel ViBE SD Encoder MTEP syntax alarms matching this probable cause english 94 Real time clock battery failure MTEP syntax alarms matching this probable cause french
57. be displayed To read the Encoder serial number type drid after the ViBE prompt Figure 5 17 Reading the Product serial number via the Local Console drid command PATES ET T sl ViBE gt drid Article code Serial number E C Product H NEM40IN4 psn47501012 I Main board 46073401AC wbsn895245 z ViBE gt J Product serial number The serial number will be displayed b Reading the Encoder equipment code and Product serial number via a Web Browser The Encoder equipment code and Product serial number can be read via a Web Browser connected to the Encoder s Web Interface Select HW SW Information in the Status page For further information about operation via the Web Interface see section Web Browser Interface on page 51 126 ViBE EM4000 Release 1 10 User Manual 46073586AB02 Chapter 5 Servicing Operations performed using the Local Console Figure 5 18 Reading the equipment code and the serial number via a Web Browser Hardware Installed options Option Quantity Name NEMH4PSU 0 Additional PSU Software Installed options Option Quantity Name NEMS4H4A 4 One channel HD SD AVC encoding NEMS4FLA 4 WAN LAN Flextream NEMS4FLE 0 LAN Flextream NEMS4D51 8 DD DD surround encodina 1x5 1 3x2 0 NEMS4DDE 8 Dolby E decodina NEMS4DOL 24 DD DD stereo encodina NEMS4AAC 24 AAC stereo encoding NEMS4A51 8 AAC HE surround encodina 1x5 1 3x2 0 NEMS4MP1 24 MPEG1 L2 stereo encodina Software
58. booting xxx is a code reserved for Thomson Video Networks use only RID indicates whether the read information is correct Possible messages are OK the information is correct Not Read the information has not been read Part number Chassis ordering reference Name Chassis name Managing software options Software options are managed via the Local Console The purpose of this section is to explain the procedures for displaying device software option status and ordering and installing software options If options are ordered with the product they will have been installed I at the factory and will be immediately available to the operator Displaying software options sopt To display the software options installed type lsopt after the VIBE prompt 124 ViBE EM4000 Release 1 10 User Manual 46073586AB02 Chapter 5 Servicing Operations performed using the Local Console Figure 5 15 Displaying software option status Isopt command 11x a id ref status key comment nb 50 NEMS4H4A Installed 3238C8 One channel HD SD AVC encoding 4 51 NEMS4FLA Installed 332FB6 WAN LAN Flextream 4 52 NEMS4FLE XXXXXX LAN Flextream 0 60 NEMS4D51 Installed 3C7450 DD DD surround encoding 1x5 1 3x2 0 8 61 NEMS4DDE Installed 3D6342 Dolby E decoding 8 62 NEMS4DOL Installed 3E083C DD DD stereo encoding 24 63 NEMS422C Installed SFO9CR AAC stereo encoding 24 64 NEMS451 Installed 405985 AAC HE surround encoding 1x
59. but reserved VIBE EM4000 Release 1 10 User Manual 46073586AB02 Chapter 5 Servicing Operations performed using the Local Console for Thomson Video Networks use Only the commands available to Users are therefore described The following table lists these commands Table 5 1 Commands available on the Local Console application User operations and related commands Command description amp page Setting basic parameters ipdisp To display IP Control parameters page 120 ipset To edit IP Control parameters page 121 ddate To display the current date and time page 121 sdate To edit the date and time page 122 Synchronizing Encoder time with an NTP server dntp sntp To display NTP synchronization status page 122 To initialize the synchronization process via the NTP server page 122 Displaying chassis topology read To display the chassis topology page 123 shelf To display the status name and Managing software options ordering reference of the board page 123 sopt To display installed software options page 124 eqcod To read the Encoder equipment code page 125 drid To read the Encoder serial number page 125 insopt To install a software option page 127 rmopt To uninstall a software option page 128 Managing software licenses page 129 Downloading software Product Package page 130 view down togg un
60. choice for mux 2 Source Bsl Bsr Not used In the Input group box Input format Precompressed Input Format Used to indicate the format of the de embedded audio Choice between Dolby E Audio PCM Precompressed Source Used to select the source of the precompressed audio signal Choice between SDI Group 1 Channel 1 2 1 3 1 4 1 group choice for mux 1 and SDI Group 1 Channel 2 2 2 3 2 4 2 group choice for mux 2 Auto Switch mode Not used ViBE EM4000 Release 1 10 87 User Manual 46073586AB02 Chapter 4 Web Browser Interface Settings 88 Standard Mode PID PCR Status In the OUTPUT group box Used to select the compression standard MPEG Layer Il This standard is not available if Input format is Dolby E or Precompressed MPEG Layer AD The Audio Description feature is enabled and the audio description is encoded in MPEG1 Layerll This standard is not available if Input format is Dolby E or Precompressed AACLC or HE AAC or HE AAC v2 The syntax and packet type are set on the AAC page These standards are not available if Input format is Dolby E or Precompressed HE AAC AD The Audio Description feature is enabled and the audio description is encoded in HE AAC The syntax and packet type are set on the AAC page This standard is not available if Input format is Dolby E or Precompressed Dolby Digital AC 3 AC3 encoding parameters are set on the Dolby page This standard i
61. comply with the legislation in force in the country of installation Connection panel position in the rack must ensure that plugs and power cords are within easy reach for switching off purposes OVERLOAD PROTECTION Power supply unit has integrated overload protection which cannot be accessed or reset In the event of a malfunction please contact the Thomson Video Networks Customer Services Department POWER DISCONNECTING The equipment may or does feature more than one power supply cord To reduce the risk of electric shock disconnect all power supply cords before any intervention Rack Mount Safety Instructions ELEVATED OPERATING AMBIENT If installed in a closed or multi unit rack assembly the operating air ambient temperature of the rack environment may be greater than room ambient Provide proper ventilation as described in section Mounting in Rack on page 18 to keep the equipment in an environment compatible with the maximum operating temperature specified by the manufacturer ViBE EM4000 Release 1 10 203 User Manual 46073586AB02 Appendix B Safety Instructions Danger MECHANICAL LOADING Mounting of the equipment in the rack should be such that a hazardous condition is not achieved due to uneven mechanical loading CIRCUIT OVERLOADING Consideration should be given to the connection of the equipment to the supply circuit and the effect that overloading of the circuits might have on overcur
62. du clos Courtel 35517 CESSON SEVIGNE Cedex France Contact http www thomson networks com Name ANDROMEDE ViBE gt Jj The following information will be displayed m Location sysLocation information m Contact sysContact information m Name sysName information Writing SNMP agent information winfo To write SNMP agent Mib 2 system branch sysContact sysName and sysLocation information type winfo after the VIBE prompt Figure 5 33 Writing SNMP agent sysContact sysName and sysLocation information winfo command i 10 12 54 29 PuTTY loj x ViBE gt winfo Al Location Yxxxx Contact http www thomson networks com Name ANDROMEDE Location Thomson Video Networks Cesson Sevigne Contact Name ViBE gt Jj The current information will be displayed Enter the following fields m Location sysLocation information m Contact sysContact information m Name sysName information Displaying the list of community strings cread To display the list of community strings type cread after the ViBE prompt 138 VIBE EM4000 Release 1 10 User Manual 46073586AB02 Chapter 5 Servicing Operations performed using the Local Console Figure 5 34 Displaying the list of SNMP communities cread command P 1012 5429 purr Re Al ViBE gt cread Read communities from file Done Communities that can be used to access the agent Rights Community ro
63. during transportation The company may not be held liable for any consequence resulting from non observance of this return procedure The company will not be able to guarantee a repair time for any RMA request for which we do not have a clear and complete fault description If no fault is found a fixed price will be raised to cover shipping and testing of the unit ViBE EM4000 Release 1 10 227 User Manual 46073586AB02 Appendix D Customer Services Repackaging for Shipment Repackaging for Shipment Retain original packaging Unless specifically agreed cost and risks for return shipment of equipment are borne by the Customer The faulty device must be packed where possible in its original packaging protective corners and boxes If you no longer have the packaging the faulty device must be protected against shocks during transportation The company may not be held liable for any consequence resulting from non observance of this return procedure The Thomson Customer Service Department will examine packaging on arrival and can refuse to carry out repairs if the packaging has been visibly damaged during transportation and this has led to further damage in addition to the fault originally noted 228 ViBE EM4000 Release 1 10 User Manual 46073586AB02 Appendix D Customer Services Long Term Product Support Long Term Product Support Long Term Product Support LTPS is the Thomson support provided during
64. in the following cases One of the fans is faulty m The temperature on one of the boards exceeds 55 C This high temperature could be due to a faulty or blocked fan or an outside temperature which is too high VIBE EM4000 Release 1 10 User Manual 46073586AB02 Chapter 6 Tools Introduction This chapter describes the Download application which can be supplied by Thomson Video Networks Customer Service In this Chapter Download appliCation ss amsn page 144 LOE E en a ain page 144 Download procedure ss page 148 ViBE EM4000 Release 1 10 143 User Manual 46073586AB02 Chapter 6 Tools Download application Download application Overview Downloading is used to upgrade device firmware It can be performed via the Download application which is supplied by Thomson Video Networks Customer Service The procedure is described below Encoder boards feature two program banks each When downloading is complete the inactive bank will contain the software release that has just been downloaded but which is inactive and the active bank will contain the active software release The inactive bank can contain up to 4 inactive software releases The toggle function can be used to toggle one software release from the inactive bank so that it becomes the active software release in the active bank The Download application provides the following features Simultaneous upgrade of several Encoders m F
65. kbit s When auto switch mode is OFF and the Dolby E stream contains 2 0 instead of 5 1 a 5 1 signal is still encoded with front left and right using the Dolby E 2 0 input and the other channel will be silenced VIBE EM4000 Release 1 10 User Manual 46073586AB02 Chapter 4 Web Browser Interface Settings PCM Reversion Source If automatic switch mode is ON choice of the PCM source when PCM 2 0 is detected instead of Dolby E Choice between SDI Group 1 Channel 1 2 1 3 1 4 1 group choice for mux 1 and SDI Group 1 Channel 2 2 2 3 2 4 2 group choice for mux 2 In the Input group box Input format Audio PCM Input Format Used to indicate the format of the de embedded audio Choice between Dolby E Audio PCM Precompressed Source L R Used to select the source of the L R signal or mono signal Choice between SDI Group 1 Channel 1 2 1 3 1 4 1 group choice for mux 1 and SD Group 1 Channel 2 2 2 3 2 4 2 group choice for mux 2 Source C LFE Used to select the source of the C LFE signal when 5 0 or 5 1 mode are selected Choice between SD Group 1 Channel 1 2 1 3 1 4 1 group choice for mux 1 and SDI Group 1 Channel 2 2 2 3 2 4 2 group choice for mux 2 Source Ls Rs Used to select the source of the Ls Rs signal when 5 0 or 5 1 mode are selected Choice between SD Group 1 Channel 1 2 1 3 1 4 1 group choice for mux 1 and SDI Group 1 Channel 2 2 2 3 2 4 2 group
66. layer m The Ethernet Interface chooses between half duplex and full duplex for the operating mode Thomson Video Networks recommends operating the IP data in full duplex mode If Auto negotiation results in another mode alarms will be raised m The interface can be switched off by the User for the automatic redundancy mechanism MAC Layer The MAC Layer is compliant with IEEE 802 3 2002 m Unicast and Multicast transfer modes are available Unicast destination MAC are recovered by the ARP protocol Multicast destination MAC are computed by the embedded software from the user defined IP multicast address RFC 1112 Corrupt Ethernet input frames are discarded The MAC layer supports multiple Ethernet frame types and lengths Video frames whose length depends on the configured number of MPEG packets per IP packet Network management frames IP Layer m Pv4 protocol is used Destination IP can be statically set by the User Routing m One default gateway can be set when no routing protocol is handled Default Gateway IP can be statically set by the User m Routing management has the following features Four static routes can be set by the User RIPv2 and OSPF dynamic routing protocols can be selected by the User RIPv2 and OSPF parameters can be set by the User QoS is supported by tagging TOS Diffserv bytes to classify the data packets RFC 2597 amp RFC 2598 Mapping encapsulation m MPEG U
67. load a predefined configuration type pdcload after the ViBE prompt 134 ViBE EM4000 Release 1 10 User Manual 46073586AB02 Chapter 5 Servicing Operations performed using the Local Console Figure 5 29 Loading a predefined configuration via the Local Console pdcload command 10 12 54 29 PuTTY lol x ViBE gt pdcload Al conf number 5 cuid 0 load conf 5 in cuid 0 OK ViBE gt J Enter the following fields m conf number enter the predefined configuration number 1 to 32 m cuid enter the predefined configuration cuid 0 The configuration is applied to the chassis and EM Encoder The configuration loaded must be of chassis type x The configuration is applied to the Basic encoder x The configuration loaded must be of EM Encoder type The following information will be displayed m load conf x OK configuration x has been successfully loaded a warning message may be displayed If the operation is not successful the load KO lt xxxx gt message will be displayed where xxxx indicates the reason for failure For example if the configuration is saved pdcsave with a cuid 1 EM Encoder type and the same configuration is recalled pdcload with a cuid 0 chassis type the load KO lt conf type mismatch gt message will be displayed Deleting a predefined configuration pdcrem To delete a predefined configuration type pdcrem after the ViBE prompt Figure 5 30 Deleting a predef
68. ne 1 Chapter 1 OVErViIEW a E 7 Product Overview de 8 PUMP OSG sms en nent sed ds ee tete es a Net NE rare eq eure 8 MainFe l res ns seen 8 Encoder block diagrams nn 10 ViBE EM4000 NEM40IN2AA Encoder 10 ViBE EM4000 NEM40IN4AA Encoder 11 Encoder modes of operation a 11 Product Desenpli n a ceeeleeatecdeeentdvinendaetice 13 CHASSIS oriona uga E FREE EFEHRERREERFE 13 DVI tandis entente et eee 13 Front Panel een nn 13 Rear Panel secret 13 Chapter 2 Installation and Startup 15 Unpackihg zes 16 Installing the Device Steps 2222222uuennnnnennnnnnnnnnnennnn nennen 17 Mounting in Backen an 18 ViBE EM4000 Installation Requirements 18 Ventilation u nee nennen 18 CODING PR ern EE 23 EMC Ground 23 Power Supply and Protective Ground 24 Power Supply Cord s Specifications 24 Connecting AC Mains Power Supply Cord s 24 Power Supply End seseccccscsscsansccassestiniaetacccascntaninscnscanasane 24 VIBE EM4000 End anne 24 Powering MB en anne sn ae eee 25 Performing the Initial Settings 26 Accessing the Local Console application 26 aldgeXe 87011 0 1 NEHREEFERBHRARRERREHERRCHERFEERFEERFEFIFERESEFILEFEEFFFERFFEFERFEFSERFERERS 26 SSH client application setting en nenn 27 Accessing the Local Console nn nn 27 Setting Initial Parameter
69. pattern or a color pattern End to end delay Two compression delays are available Standard Delay 163 fields Long Delay 249 fields End to end delay 50Hz Standard Delay 3 2s Long Delay 4 9s m 59 94Hz Standard Delay 2 7s Long Delay 4 1s a Profile switching is not seamless p Capped VBR The Encoder adapts its bitrate to a quality level without being part of a Flextream pool 1 to 20 Mbit s in Flextream mode if Slide mode Management is activated d Measured between the Encoder HD SDI input and the PTS value Audio processing Test signals To facilitate device installation and or testing 2 types of test signal can be substituted for digital audio inputs m Sine tone 2 114 kHz 20 bits OdBFS for both the left and right channel This test signal is used to calibrate the audio system encoder and decoder ViBE EM4000 Release 1 10 User Manual 46073586AB02 175 Appendix A Technical Specifications Features m Setup tone 2 kHz for the right channel and 1 kHz for the left channel 24 bits 15 dBFS This test signal is used for system setup As the left and right channels have different frequencies they are easy to identify The audio level is approximately the same as the average level of a standard audio signal and this therefore prevents the unwanted change in audio level when switching between the audio input and the test signal Audio capabilities For
70. played back at the decoder device Virtual Channel Table ATSC A VCT contains a list of all the channels that are or will be online along with their attributes This table is critically important as it contains the set of data that enables a receiver to tune and locate the service being broadcast Video Graphics Array 640x480 pixels Vertical Interval Time Code VITC is Time Code information inserted in the vertical blanking of the video signal Vertical Interval Test Signal VITS signals may be inserted in the lines of the vertical blanking interval to permit on the air testing of video circuit functions and adjustments Virtual Local Area Network A local area network with a definition that maps workstations on some other basis than geographic location for example by department type of user or primary application The virtual LAN controller can change or add workstations and manage load balancing and bandwidth allocation more easily than with a physical picture of the LAN Network Management System software keeps track of relating the virtual picture of the local area network with the actual physical picture VLANs are based on logical instead of physical connections Video Programming System VPS is an older system which helped video recorders in Germany to automatically record TV broadcasts correctly Since replaced with Program Delivery Control PDC Allows an encoder to specify the use of a scaling and offset when
71. right way round m Please dispose of dead memories according to the manufacturer s instructions A Danger of explosion if memory is incorrectly replaced 204 ViBE EM4000 Release 1 10 User Manual 46073586AB02 Cautions Appendix B Safety Instructions Cautions The following caution statements identify conditions or practices that can result in damage to equipment or other property USE CORRECT POWER SOURCE Do not operate this equipment from a power source that applies a voltage outside the voltage range specified for the product PROVIDE PROPER VENTILATION To prevent product overheating provide equipment ventilation in accordance with installation instructions All empty slots should be fitted with blank panels mask plates so as not to impair ventilation DO NOT OPERATE WITH SUSPECTED EQUIPMENT FAILURE If you suspect equipment damage or equipment failure have the equipment inspected by qualified service personnel ENSURE MAINS DISCONNECT As mains switch is not provided the power cord s of this equipment provide the means of disconnection The socket outlet must be installed near the equipment and must be easily accessible ROUTE CABLE PROPERLY Route power cords and other cables so that they are not likely to be damaged Properly support heavy cable bundles to avoid connector damage RETAIN ORIGINAL PACKAGING If equipment is returned to the Customer Service Department th
72. s can raise this probable cause EM4000 Dual Channel EM4000 Quad Channel EM4000 Hexa Channel EM4000 Octal Channel MTEP syntax alarms matching this probable cause english 104 No AD Control Track in signal MTEP syntax alarms matching this probable cause french 104 Pas de donn es de contr le pour l AD dans le signal Page 39 Alarm Help X733 syntax 9 60 Probable Cause 1052 no AFD in signal Category Communications Default severity warning Wording English No AFD in signal Wording French Pas de AFD dans le signal Diagnosis English AFD not detected Diagnosis French AFD non d tect Action English Check input signal Action French V rifier le signal d entr e Automatic redundancy Current autobackup Impossible Upstream autobackup Impossible The following device s can raise this probable cause DBE 4110 DSNG DBE 4120 Contribution DBE 4130 Broadcast SSEB DSS MSE DBE 4140 Local insertion EM4000 Dual Channel EM4000 Quad Channel EM4000 Hexa Channel EM4000 Octal Channel ViBE Encoder ViBE Decoder SD Encoder MTEP syntax alarms matching this probable cause english 26 No AFD in signal 105 No AFD in signal 107 no AFD in signal 109 no AFD in signal Page 40 Alarm Help X733 syntax 9 60 MTEP syntax alarms matching this probable cause french 26 AFD absent 105 Pas de AFD dans le signal 107 Pas de AFD dans le signal 109 Pas de AF
73. shipped with the device The factory set IP address and Netmask for the Control amp Command port are 192 168 1 1 and 255 255 255 0 The Encoder IP address can be viewed edited via the Encoder Front panel Refer to section IP Settings screen on page 45 The IP address can be changed during the installation setup see section Editing IP parameters ipset on page 29 or via the Encoder Front panel Refer to section IP Settings screen on page 45 This IP address will be the new customer set IP address that will be required for subsequent connections to the device As the ViBE EM4000 Control Ethernet interfaces host an autocrossover mechanism you can use a direct or crossed cable connection between the PC and ViBE EM4000 SSH client application setting The SSH client application must be set with the following parameters Host name or IP address Encoder IP address Port 22 Accessing the Local Console 1 Runthe SSH application on the PC connected to the network using the Encoder IP address The Login page is displayed 2 Enter user as Login Figure 2 8 Enter login Login page P 10 12 54 29 purr lcixi login as user user 10 12 54 29 s password 3 Enter user as password The Local console main screen is displayed ViBE EM4000 Release 1 10 27 User Manual 46073586AB02 Chapter 2 Installation and Startup Performing the Initial Settings Figure 2 9 Local
74. synchronize devices via a shared network An external NTP server serves as a reference for the Encoder which is an NTP client its internal clock is synchronized with the NTP server Displaying NTP server status and IP address dntp To display the NTP server status and IP address type dntp after the VIBE prompt Figure 5 11 Displaying NTP server status and IP address dntp command 10 12 54 29 PuTTY o x ViBE gt dntp NTP time synchronization Disable Preferred NTP server address address ViBE gt Jj Editing NTP server status and IP address sntp GI To edit the NTP server status and IP address type sntp after the ViB prompt 122 ViBE EM4000 Release 1 10 User Manual 46073586AB02 Chapter 5 Servicing Operations performed using the Local Console Figure 5 12 Editing NTP server status and IP address sntp command i 10 12 54 29 PuTTY lalx ViBE gt sntp al NTP time synchronization 1 Enable 0 Disable 0 1 Preferred NTP server IP address fi 172 32 63 35 Enable NTP time synchronization servers 172 32 63 38 Change takes effect after board reboot viBE gt J m To enable disable time synchronization type 1 Enable or 0 Disable To edit the server IP address type the new address on the second line rebooted The first synchronization operation may take up to 20 minutes The changes will be acknowledged after the Encoder has been Co
75. systems network infrastructure equipment for switching signaling transmission as well as network management for telecommunications Date Nom Fonction Visa 19 03 2012 JL Diascorn Product Manager THOMSON VIDEO NETWORKS 6 rue du Cios Courtel CS 31719 35510 CESSON SEVIGNE Cedex France Tel 33 0 2 99 28 50 00 Fax 33 0 2 99 28 50 01 www thomson networks com THOMSON VIDEO NETWORKS SAS au capital social de 4 427 000 euros Si ge social 6 rue du Cios Courtel 35510 Cesson S vign France RCS Rennes 477 555 718 VAT FR58477555718 ViBE EM4000 Release 1 10 197 User Manual 46073586AB02 Appendix A Technical Specifications Ordering guide Ordering guide Table A 29 Ordering references for VIBE EM4000 Commercial Part Descupuon code number Chassis ViBE4000 2BB IN NEM40INZAA EM4000 platform single PSU capability for 2 HD channels Capability for up to 4 xDolby E decoding and 4x surround 5 1 encoding or 12 x stereo encoding ViBE4000 4BB IN NEMA0IN4AA EM4000 platform single PSU capability for 4 HD channels Capability for up to 8 xDolby E decoding and 8x surround 5 1 encoding or 24 x stereo encoding Hardware option EM4000 OPT DUALPSU NEMH4PSUAA Double PSU HW option Up to 1 PSU can be ordered per chassis Software license EM4000 SW 110 NEMC4011AA EM4000 Software v1 10 1 license must be ordered per chassis Video encoding license EM4000 LIC HDAVC NEMS4H4AAA
76. the Local Console Operations performed using the Local Console Introduction The device features the Local Console application The Local Console application can be accessed by connecting to the Encoder via the Ethernet link and an SSH client application The Encoder IP address can be viewed edited via the Encoder Front panel The free PUTTY SSH client application is used in this chapter The PuTTY application can be downloaded on http www putty org Figure 5 1 PuTTY application xl Category Session Basic options for your PuTTY session bee de M Specify the destination you want to connect to 1 Keyboard Host Name or IP address Port Bell 22 Features Connection type Window C Raw Telnet Rlogin SSH Serial Appearance z Behaviour Load save or delete a stored session Translation Saved Sessions Selection Colours Default Settings Load E Connection Accessing the Local Console application IP parameter values on Encoder shipment The parameters are indicated on the Acceptance Test Report shipped with the device or can be viewed via the Encoder Front panel see section Front Panel Operation on page 37 SSH client application setting The SSH client application must be set with the following parameters Host name or IP address Encoder IP address Port 22 116 ViBE EM4000 Release 1 10 User Manual 46073586AB02 Chapter 5 Servic
77. the ViBE EM4000 Encoder the audio capabilities are Encoding m NEMA40IN2AA The Encoder features 12 audio encoders 12 x AUD m NEM4OIN4AA The Encoder features 24 audio encoders 24 x AUD Each Audio encoder can encode audio in the following formats MPEG 1 Layer II Dolby Digital AC3 2 0 Dolby Digital AC3 5 1 Dolby Digital Plus E AC3 2 0 Dolby Digital Plus E AC3 5 1 Dolby Digital AC3 transport Dolby Digital Plus E AC3 transport AAC LC 2 0 HE AAC 2 0 HE AAC v2 2 0 AAC LC 5 1 HE AAC 5 1 Software options Decoding m NEMA40IN2AA The Encoder features 4 Dolby E decoders Up to 4 Dolby E streams can be decoded and encoded in Dolby Digital format software options m NEMA40IN4AA The Encoder features 8 Dolby E decoders Up to 8 Dolby E streams can be decoded and encoded in Dolby Digital format software options 176 ViBE EM4000 Release 1 10 User Manual 46073586AB02 Appendix A Technical Specifications Features Audio limitations I NEM40IN2AA 4 Dolby Digital 5 1 or Dolby Digital Plus 5 1 audio can be encoded at the same time 4 Dolby E streams can be decoded at the same time a NEM40IN4AA 8 Dolby Digital 5 1 or Dolby Digital Plus 5 1 audio can be encoded at the same time 8 Dolby E streams can be decoded at the same time Interm of audio computing 1 Audio Description AD component is equivalent to 1 st
78. the product life cycle starting at the announcement of the end of product manufacture and ending at the announcement of the end of services After product phase out announcement LTPS data is provided by the Thomson Regional Sales and Field Services organizations The Thomson OneCare SLA commitment concerning LTPS data and associated services may differ from those included as part ofthe general Thomson LTPS policy In such cases LTPS data and associated services governed by the terms and conditions of OneCare contracts override the general LTPS policy ViBE EM4000 Release 1 10 229 User Manual 46073586AB02 Appendix D Customer Services Recycling the Product Recycling the Product 230 Thomson Video Networks has developed a comprehensive end of life product take back program for recycling or disposal of end of life products Our program meets the requirements of the European Union s WEEE Directive and in the United States those of the Environmental Protection Agency individual state or local agencies Thomson Video Networks guarantees the proper disposal of your end of life products A Certificate of Recycling or a Certificate of Destruction depending on the ultimate disposition of the product can be sent upon request Thomson Video Networks will be responsible for all costs associated with recycling and disposal including freight however you are responsible for the removal of the equipment from your facil
79. there is one according to the manufacturer s recommendations and clean ViBE EM4000 s air inlet grill at least once a year m There must be enough room for a column of cold air to circulate on the front of the chassis and a column of hot air to circulate on the rear of the chassis m Cutthe L profiles so as they do not exceed 4 mm in height in the areas facing ViBE EM4000 s air outlet This will prevent any hot air from accumulating in the device Figure 2 1 L profiles Tapped hole M4 for Air outlet EMC tape connecton fe o o o F Eig co 4 gt o amp According to rack deph Cut the L profiles so as they do not exceed 4 mm in height in the areas facing ViBE EM4000 s air outlet m Given its 1RU height ViBE EM4000 can be placed on top of another ViBE EM4000 It is however advisable to observe the following restrictions It is possible to stack ViBE EM4000s in groups of two each group being separated from another group by a space of 1RU Failure to observe these installation requirements will directly result in a deterioration in performance reliability and service life of equipment VIBE EM4000 Release 1 10 19 User Manual 46073586AB02 Chapter 2 Installation and Startup Mounting in Rack Figure 2 2 First example ViBE EM4000 on a pressurized floor in a standard rack front view Hot air 5 Ra ne SEN
80. this probable cause ViBE EM3000 MPEG4 EM4000 Dual Channel EM4000 Quad Channel EM4000 Hexa Channel EM4000 Octal Channel SD Encoder MTEP syntax alarms matching this probable cause english 104 No expected standard in signal 120 No expected standard in signal MTEP syntax alarms matching this probable cause french 104 Standard attendu absent du signal 120 Standard attendu absent du signal Page 46 Alarm Help X733 syntax 9 60 Probable Cause 1044 no PCM in signal Category Communications Default severity minor Wording English No PCM in signal Wording French Pas de PCM dans le signal Diagnosis English Input signal is not PCM audio Diagnosis French Le signal d entr e n est pas un signal audio PCM Action English Check input signal Action French V rifier le signal d entr e Automatic redundancy Current autobackup Impossible Upstream autobackup The following device s can raise this probable cause ViBE EM3000 MPEG4 EM4000 Dual Channel EM4000 Quad Channel EM4000 Hexa Channel EM4000 Octal Channel ViBE ViBE Encoder SD Encoder MTEP syntax alarms matching this probable cause english 104 No PCM in signal 110 No PCM in signal 120 No PCM in signal MTEP syntax alarms matching this probable cause french 104 Pas de PCM dans le signal 110 Pas de PCM dans le signal Page 47 Impossible Alarm Help X733 syntax 9 60 120 Pas de PCM dans le s
81. to a specified or implied reference level A ratio in decibels is ten times the logarithm to base 10 of the ratio of two power quantities A decibel is one tenth of a bel a seldom used unit dBFS Decibel Full Scale ViBE EM4000 Release 1 10 235 User Manual 46073586AB02 Glossary De blocking Filter Decoder DTS DET DID Dolby Digital Downconvert Downmixing DPI DSNG DSP DTVCC DVB DVB H DVB T DVB SI DVS 053 DVS 157 236 An in loop deblocking filter is designed to smooth out artifacts introduced by the compression process in the reconstructed image in both the encoder and decoder The device containing the electronic circuitry necessary to decode encrypted signals Some Decoders features a receiver Decoding Time Stamp A field that may be present in a PES packet header that indicates the time that an access unit is to be decoded in the system target Decoder Data Event Table ATSC Data Identifier DID is used for embedded audio within the SDI or HD SDI signal The Data Identifier word indicates the type of ancillary data that the packet corresponds to Formerly AC 3 An audio coding system based on transform coding techniques and psychoacoustic principles The process by which the frequency of a broadcast transport stream is shifted to a lower frequency range Combining or mixing down the content of n original channels to produce m channels where m lt n Digital Program Insertio
82. to replace the Management System but to provide a basic control command interface for the main settings Device operation via its front panel is generally limited to m changing basic settings IP settings etc m displaying device codes and serial numbers m displaying installed software releases m displaying raised alarms m recalling predefined configurations These configurations are defined via the Web Interface or in factory For more information see section Web Browser Interface on page 51 m displaying device internal temperature m rebooting the device Description and overview The Encoder front panel features an LCD screen a 7 key keypad Home ESC OK and 4 arrow keys and a set of three status LEDs and 2 Power Supply LEDs Figure 3 1 ViBE EM4000 Front Panel Running Alarm HOME UP OK RIGHT PSU 1 Warning LEFT ESC DOWN PSU2 Device status LEDs They indicate the following Table 3 1 Device status LED specifications LED Color Description RUNNING green The Device is On ALARM red At least one major alarm has been raised WARNING orange At least one minor alarm has been raised ViBE EM4000 Release 1 10 User Manual 46073586AB02 Chapter 3 Front Panel Operation Front Panel Description m Power Supply LEDs They indicate the following Table 3 2 Power Supply LED specifications LED Description PSU 1 Power Supply No 1 is On PSU2 Power Supply No 2 optional
83. und den Transport verbundenen Kosten und Risiken sind vom Kunden zu tragen Dem eingeschickten Ger t ist ein ordnungsgem ausgef llter R ckgabeschein beizulegen Garantieleistung Folgende Regeln sind f r die Inanspruchnahme der Garantie zu beachten m Das Auswechseln der Steckkarte hat ausschlie lich durch qualifiziertes Personal zu erfolgen In allen anderen F llen ist das Ger t durch ein Ersatzger t zu ersetzen m Niemals die Abdeckungen des Ger tes abnehmen ViBE EM4000 Release 1 10 209 User Manual 46073586AB02 Appendix B Safety Instructions Consignes et symboles de s curit Consignes de s curit Fran ais Consignes et symboles de s curit Signal tique appos e sur le produit La signal tique suivante peut tre appos e sur le produit DANGER Risque de danger imminent pour l utilisateur MISE EN GARDE Risque d endommagement du produit des installations ou des autres quipements Symboles appos s sur le produit Les symboles suivants peut tre appos s sur le produit Signale la pr sence d une tension lev e et dangereuse dans le bo tier de l quipement cette tension peut tre suffisante pour constituer un risque de d charge lectrique Signale que l utilisateur l op rateur ou le technicien de maintenance doit faire r f rence au x manuel s pour prendre connaissance des instructions d utilisation de maintenance ou d entretien Il s agit d une invit
84. usrlist To display the list of Users and their profiles type usrlist after the ViBE prompt Figure 5 27 Displaying the list of Web Interface Users usrlist command i 10 12 54 29 PuTTY lolx ViBE gt usrlist Users list 0 No User Profile 1 admin administrator 2 service service 3 technician technician 4 operator operator 5 guest guest 6 xms xms 7 user operator ViBE gt J The following information will be displayed m User User name m Profile User profile Managing predefined configurations Foreword Predefined configurations are stored configurations A maximum of 32 configurations can be stored This number may be reduced according to the complexity ofthe configurations stored The Local Console is used to manage configurations saving loading deleting status reading etc It cannot be used to define configuration contents Configuration contents are defined via the Web Interface which is also used for configuration management Table 5 4 Configuration use according to the application Local Console Web Interface Defining configurations X Managing configurations X X saving loading deleting ViBE EM4000 Release 1 10 133 User Manual 46073586AB02 Chapter 5 Servicing Operations performed using the Local Console There is no locking mechanism between the different interfaces which have access to predefined configurations It is therefore up to the User to ma
85. 0 Probable Cause 160 configurationOrCustomisationError Category Processing error Default severity critical Wording English Configuration or customization error Wording French Erreur de configuration ou de personnalisation Diagnosis English Configuration or customization error detected Diagnosis French Erreur de configuration ou de personnalisation d tect Action English Check consistency between configuration of board or equipment declared and the booad or equipment physically installed If the problem persists contact Customer Service Action French V rifier la coh rence entre la configuration de la carte ou de l quipement d clar et la carte ou l quipement physiquement pr sent Si le probl me persiste contacter le Service Clients Automatic redundancy Current autobackup Selectable Upstream autobackup Selectable The following device s can raise this probable cause DBE 4110 DSNG DBE 4120 Contribution DBE 4130 Broadcast SSEB DSS MSE DBE 4140 Local insertion Net Processor 9030 Net Processor 9040 MUXEMB DSS 23 TS inputs Net Feeder 9010 ViBE EM3000 MPEG4 EM4000 Dual Channel EM4000 Quad Channel EM4000 Hexa Channel EM4000 Octal Channel DBD4431 COFDM Rate Shaper ViBE Opal Opal II ViBE Mobile TV ViBE Mosaic Generator ASI ViBE Mosaic Generator IP VS7000 v1 x Page 7 Alarm Help X733 syntax 9 60 MTEP syntax alarms matching this probable cause english
86. 000 kbit s Used to set the picture quality level required The value must be between 0 and 100 Default value 100 best quality 81 Chapter 4 Web Browser Interface Settings Click PreProc parameters to display the HD video component preprocessing Figure 4 31 Editing an HD video component PreProc page HD Video Configuration Noise Reduction Adaptive Filter Demo Mode submit reset General Advanced AVC Advanced MPEG 2 HD VBI Misc VBR PreProc 1 X Ra Disabled iff This page is used to set preprocessing for the HD video component Noise Reduction Adaptive Filter Demo Mode 82 Used to set noise reduction processing Noise reduction processing is adjusted according to the noise level estimated during the motion estimation process This means that filtering will be stronger on noisy materials leading to lower contrast pictures Noise Reduction processing must be set according to the noise level Off Noise reduction processing is off 1 Noise reduction processing is low 2 to 4 Intermediate values 5 Noise reduction processing is high Used to set Adaptive Filter processing This processing reduces the high frequency spatial texture which noticeably increases encoding complexity The Adaptive Filter must be set according to the spatial texture of the picture to be encoded Off Adaptive filter processing is off 1 Adaptive filter processing is low 2 to 4
87. 02 Appendix A Technical Specifications Introduction This chapter gives m specifications of the device m device compliance Declarations of Conformity m ordering guide to order the device and its options In this Chapter General Device Specifications page 160 Interface Specifications aaa page 164 AE LUI LE page 170 OS een nine page 185 Standard Complante san page 193 Certifications and environmental specifications page 194 EU declaration of COMOrMINN aaa page 196 ROMS declaration of conformity na page 197 Kere RO RAR E nee ER IEHIBLNETEREERANE page 198 ViBE EM4000 Release 1 10 159 User Manual 46073586AB02 Appendix A Technical Specifications General Device Specifications General Device Specifications 160 Electrical Specifications Power supply Table A 1 Power Supply specifications Standards Title Mains voltage 100 240 VAC one range with no switching Mains type 50 60 Hz Max input current with 6 5A 2 5A 1 PSU Max input current per 3 1A 1 3A PSU with 2 PSUs Hardware option Inrush current lt 50A cold start up 230V per unit lt 10ms Network connection Type A device connected with a non industrial IEC 60320 compliant plug Earthing arrangement TN TT For Norway and only for this country this device can be connected to an earthing arrangement of IT type for an interphase voltage of 230V
88. 3586AB02 Appendix D Customer Services Support Center Contacts Any additional system configuration information relating to your product ViBE EM4000 Release 1 10 223 User Manual 46073586AB02 Appendix D Customer Services Warranty Warranty 224 Thomson Video Networks guarantees that the product will be free from defects in materials and workmanship and that the product and or software will conform to the applicable specifications within the duration of the warranty The product is under warranty for a period of twelve 12 months The software is under warranty for a period of ninety 90 days Concerning the software warranty Thomson guarantees that for a period of 90 days after the product s delivery date or after a system s Site Acceptance Test the physical media will be free from defects and viruses and the embedded software will conform to applicable specifications There is no warranty that Thomson software will be error free The purchase of a software license entitles the customer to use the Thomson software release shipped at the time the license is purchased Rights to new releases upgrades are only provided through a Thomson OneCare service level agreement or can be priced upon request Concerning third party firmware amp software e g Java SunMicrosystems etc when supplied with a Thomson product Thomson is not responsible for supplying any support or information regarding
89. 3586AB02 Chapter 4 Web Browser Interface Settings Figure 4 39 Adding a PMT descriptor PCR On Status On Air E submit reset Descriptors There is no descriptor for this element Add PMT descriptor Add PMT descriptor The Descriptor editing page will be displayed Figure 4 40 Editing a PMT descriptor page PMT Descriptor Confiquration Tag video stream descriptor 2 0x02 Body type hexadecimal values only example 01 2B FF C8 the length is computed automatically maximum 255 bytes submit reset This page is used to set PMT descriptor parameters Tag Used to select the descriptor type The descriptor number is displayed in the right hand box It is also possible to directly enter the descriptor number decimal value in this box Body Used to add parameters to the selected descriptor Bytes must be entered in hexadecimal format in groups of 2 digits or letters separated or not by spaces Upper and lower case letters can be used The Length field is calculated automatically Editing Expert parameters Expert Parameters are parameters which are used to set video audio and VBI Encoders to specific encoding modes for particular clients On the Status Summary page click Expert parameters xx To access to Basic encoder Expert parameter EM ENCODER 1 Expert parameters OFF servicel 1 i 258 pcr HD SDI 1920x1080 8000 kbit s H TV Service 0 The Expert parameters pag
90. 39 Bad bitrate 191 Tributary rate out of band MTEP syntax alarms matching this probable cause french 104 Mauvais d bit 110 Mauvais d bit 136 D bit affluent hors bande 139 Mauvais d bit 191 D bit affluent hors bande Page 4 Alarm Help X733 syntax 9 60 Probable Cause 1063 bad embedded signal Category Communications Default severity minor Wording English Bad embedded signal Wording French Mauvais signal ins r Diagnosis English Bad embedded signal Diagnosis French Mauvais signal ins r Action English Check input signal Action French V rifier le signal d entr e Automatic redundancy Current autobackup Selectable Upstream autobackup Selectable The following device s can raise this probable cause DBE 4110 DSNG DBE 4120 Contribution DBE 4130 Broadcast SSEB DSS MSE DBE 4140 Local insertion ViBE EM3000 MPEG4 EM4000 Dual Channel EM4000 Quad Channel EM4000 Hexa Channel EM4000 Octal Channel ViBE ViBE Encoder MTEP syntax alarms matching this probable cause english 17 Embedded audio out of use 104 Bad embedded signal 110 Bad embedded signal 120 Bad embedded signal Page 5 Alarm Help X733 syntax 9 60 MTEP syntax alarms matching this probable cause french 17 Audio ins r e hors service 104 Mauvais signal ins r 110 Mauvais signal ins r 120 Mauvais signal ins r Page 6 Alarm Help X733 syntax 9 6
91. 4 L initialisation du module MMI a chou 144 L initialisation du module d entr e a chou 144 Entr e Euroboard en panne 144 L initialisation du module TS a chou 144 L initialisation du module de contr le d acc s a chou 144 L initialisation du module de decodage a chou 147 625 Ln pas de r amp ponse 147 525 Ln pas de r ponse 147 PTS pas de r ponse 147 Genlock pas de r ponse 148 Pas de r ponse 148 Pas de r ponse 148 Pas de r ponse 149 Pas de r ponse 149 Audio ne fonctionne pas 150 Pas de r ponse 151 Pas de r ponse 151 Pas de r ponse 151 Pas de r ponse 151 Pas de r ponse 154 Defaillance mat rielle 3 155 Defaillance mat rielle 173 D faut de la NV RAM 173 D faut de l horloge interne de l organe de surveillance 173 Checksum du code du programme erron 179 Mauvais checksum de la NVRAM Toutes options du MCC d sactiv es 180 Probl me de configuration usine de la carte MCC 183 D faillance mat rielle 184 D faillance mat rielle 190 Defaillance mat rielle 191 D faillance mat rielle Page 27 Alarm Help X733 syntax 9 60 Probable Cause 123 highTemperature Category Environmental Default severity Critical Wording English High temperature Wording French Temp rature lev e Diagnosis English Internal temperature is over maximum ratings The device may be permanently dama
92. 5 1 3x2 0 8 65 NEMS4MP1 Installed 41507D MPEG1 L2 stereo encoding 24 si a The following information will be displayed m id software option ID number m ref software option sales reference m nb number of options installed m status option status installed indicates that the option has been installed indicates that the option has not been installed m key key used to install the option m comment option name Ordering and installing software options To order and install a software option please observe the following procedure 1 Order the software option from Thomson Video Networks by providing the equipment code and the serial number of the Encoder 2 Install the option using the key supplied by Thomson Video Networks Ordering a software option eqcod drid 1 Read the Encoder equipment code and Product serial number Two methods are available via the Local Console via a Web Browser a Reading the Encoder equipment code and Product serial number via the Local Console To read the Encoder equipment code type eqcod after the ViBE prompt ViBE EM4000 Release 1 10 125 User Manual 46073586AB02 Chapter 5 Servicing Operations performed using the Local Console Figure 5 16 Reading the equipment code via the Local Console egcod command P 1oazsazs parre cx al ViBE gt eqcod equipment code 839E viBE gt fj z Encoder equipment code The code will
93. 6073586AB02 Appendix A Technical Specifications RoHS declaration of conformity RoHS declaration of conformity THOMSON gt VIDEO NETWORKS Ref Certificat de conformit la directive Europ enne Certificate of compliance of European Directive 2002 95 EC RoHS Nous soussign s We the undersigned Certifions que les produits suivants ainsi que leurs d riv s Hereby certify that the following product and their by products Code Article Produit Part number Products ViBE 4000 XXXXXX ViBE EM4000 Multi Channel Encoder Satisfont aux exigences impos es par la directive Europ enne 2002 95 EC du Parlement Europ en et du Conseil du 27 janvier 2003 traitant des restrictions d utilisation de certaines substances dangereuses dans les quipements lectriques et lectroniques par application de l exemption du plomb dans les soudures pour les serveurs les syst mes de stockage et de matrices de stockage les quipements d infrastructure de r seaux destin s la commutation la signalisation la transmission ainsi qu la gestion de r seaux dans le domaine des t l communications Are compliant with the requirements imposed by the European Directive 2002 95 EC of the European Parliament and of the Council of 27 January 2003 on the restriction of the use of certain hazardous substances in electrical and electronic equipment using the exemption concerning lead in solders for servers storage and storage array
94. 63 Predefined Configuration anne page 99 Maintenance scene ne Mi ere page 109 ViBE EM4000 Release 1 10 51 User Manual 46073586AB02 Chapter 4 Web Browser Interface Encoder Web Interface Specifications Encoder Web Interface Specifications Protocol used HTTP protocol version 1 1 is supported Compatible Web Browsers The Web Interface has been tested with a Web Browser installed on a Windows XP system You can run the ViBE EM4000 GUI provided you observe the following requirements for your personal computer m Web browser must be Internet Explorer 7 0 or higher or Mozilla Firefox 3 0 or higher m Java script must be enabled Web Browser setting 1 Versions of stored pages in the Web Browser This setting must be set to Every time visit the webpage Example with Internet Explorer version 8 Figure 4 1 Every visit to the page setting a oo x Google G Delete Browsing History Ctr Shift Del _ _ Private Browsing Ctrl Shift P we Reopen Last Browsing Session 33 em 4000 InPrivate Filtering Ctrl Shift F InPrivate Filtering Settings Vous Recherche Imagag Pop up Blocker SmartScreen Filter Manage Add ons Compatibility View Compatibility View Settings Windows Update Every time visit the Webpage 21 x Developer Tools Fiz General security Privacy Content Connections Programs Advanced Diagnose Conne
95. Adjust resolution temporarily enlarge just part of the screen use the Magnifier tool Calibrate color Change display settings Connect to a projector Smaller 100 default Preview Adjust ClearType text Set custom text size DPI D Medium 125 Larger 150 CA 154 ViBE EM4000 Release 1 10 User Manual 46073586AB02 Chapter 6 Tools Download application Other application commands m Edit command This command is used to edit the name and IP address of the device selected in the main window This command will only be enabled if a device has been selected 1 Select the device 2 Select the Edit command in the shortcut menu m Remove command This command is used to delete the selected device from the main window 1 Select the device 2 Select the Remove command in the shortcut menu or click the Remove button m Update All command This button on the Devices page is a shortcut command that is equivalent to Select All Full Update Status messages The following status messages may be displayed in the Status column on the Devices page Table 6 1 Status messages Download application Status messages Indications Connecting A socket has been opened to set up a session with the Encoder Logging The session is open The connection name has been sent The application is waiting for a reply from the Encoder Read topology The Encoder topology rea
96. All traps transporting MIB variables to the NMS are sent with a community string set to public The access level is used to refuse write access to an MIB variable for a specific community string even if the MIB authorizes this write access The Local Console is used to manage community strings maximum of 30 community strings can be created The device is shipped with 2 predefined community strings a public one with read only rights and a private one with read write rights The list of community strings is edited in a temporary memory using the Cadd or Cdel commands The contents of this temporary memory are sent to the community string memory used by the SNMP agent using the csave command You can view the content of the community string memory at any time using the cread command The cread command displays the contents of the community string memory and resets the temporary memory The Local Console is also used to define sysContact sysName and sysLocation information for the SNMP agent Mib 2 system branch Reading SNMP agent information rinfo To read SNMP agent Mib 2 system branch sysContact sysName and sysLocation information type rinfo after the ViBE prompt ViBE EM4000 Release 1 10 137 User Manual 46073586AB02 Chapter 5 Servicing Operations performed using the Local Console Figure 5 32 Reading SNMP information rinfo command inixi ViBE gt rinfo aj Location THOMSON VIDEO NETWORKS 6 rue
97. B4 B2 P6 N 12 Coding order I Intra coded picture P Predictive coded picture B Bidirectionally predictive coded picture Note The best video quality is achieved with the P picture period M set to M 8 GOP Size N Used to set the repetition rate for l pictures Value between P Picture Period M and 64 The GOP Size N value must be a multiple of the P Picture Period M value As l pictures require more bits than B or P pictures a bigger GOP size leads to better encoding performance Adaptive GOP Used to set the Adaptive GOP feature Choice between Fixed GOP In this mode both P picture period and GOP size are set to the values M and N above Adaptive GOP Full In this mode the effective GOP size N and the P picture period M vary according to video content i e spatio temporal complexity and events such as scene changes or fades In this case the effective GOP size varies from M up to N 8 max encoding order where M and N are the values set above Adaptive GOP Restricted This mode is a limitation of the full adaptive mode where the effective GOP size varies from M up to N 1 This restriction can lead to lower video quality around scene changes Note The best video quality is achieved with full adaptive GOP mode The other two modes are used for conformance tests and or interoperability purposes 78 ViBE EM4000 Release 1 10 User Manual 46073586AB02 Closed GOP PVR Descriptor
98. Channel RD 2000 RD 5002 SD RD 1002 RD 5000 HD SD Opal II Gecko 8900TFN V ViBE Mobile TV ViBE Mosaic Generator ASI VS7000 v1 x CP6000 MTEP syntax alarms matching this probable cause 11 Excessive temperature 94 High temperature 95 High temperature 102 High temperature 106 High temperature 115 High temperature 116 High temperature 119 High temperature 132 CIVA board overheating 133 Overheating 137 Temperature high 146 Excessive temperature MTEP syntax alarms matching this probable cause 11 temp rature excessive 94 Temp rature lev e 95 Temp rature lev e 102 Temp rature lev e 106 Temp rature lev e 115 Temp rature lev e 116 Temp rature lev e 119 Temp rature lev e 132 Surchauffe de la carte 133 Temp rature excessive 137 Temp rature lev e 146 Temp rature excessive Page 29 Barco Quasar without RF converter Barco Agile Quasar VHF Barco Quasar MKII without RF converter Barco Agile Quasar MKII VHF Barco Agile Quasar MKII Full Band Audio Video Acquisition Net Feeder 9010 EM4000 Dual Channel EM4000 Hexa Channel MSU 4422 RD 5000 SD RD 1000 Maestream RD 3000 Gecko 8900FFN Junger C8000 SD Encoder ViBE Mosaic Generator IP VS7000 v2 0 english french Alarm Help X733 syntax 9 60 Probable Cause 1067 Link down Category Communications Default severity major Wording English Link down
99. Confirms changes made on the current page reset Cancels changes made on the current page Status Summary page The Status Summary page is displayed as soon the User has been identified via the Login page or by clicking on the ex logo or on the encoder name link on the current page It features the following information 58 VIBE EM4000 Release 1 10 User Manual 46073586AB02 Chapter 4 Web Browser Interface Screen Layout Figure 4 6 Status summary page breakdown ViBE EM4000 3asic encoder no 1 Service name Encoder name To access Basic encoder name Expert parameters Status Bi onfiguration Presets Maintenance 3 a tratoy 2 gt Logout EM CONTROLLER Syfnma Service component characteristics Expert parameters OFF Outputs m o name MI 256 pcr HD SDI 1920x1080 8000 kbit s a ervice H Audio 258 DolbyE AUD1 AC3 stereo 192 kbit s t Audio 259 DolbyE AUD2 AC3 stereo 192 kbit s U 40000 kbit s 2TS 1 Eth1 Out 3 i Disabled gt Eth1 Out Audio 260 DolbyE AUD3 AC3 m left 64 kbit s H Reste disabled 0 0 0 0 Expert parameters OFF 10000 kbit s gt TS 1 Eth2 Out Disabled gt Eth1 Out disabled Disabled gt Eth2 Out a disabled add service 0 0 0 0 To add a service To add a component to a service Transport Stream ID Physical output interface status IP1 stream destination address with UDP port IP addresses of the video outputs IP2 stream destination address with UDP
100. Console main screen 10 12 54 29 PuTTY ViBE utilities 28 ViBE EM4000 Release 1 10 User Manual 46073586AB02 Chapter 2 Installation and Startup Performing the Initial Settings Setting Initial Parameters Commands Relating to IP Parameters The following procedure is used to set the IP parameters ofthe Control 1 amp 2 port located on the ViBE EM4000 s rear panel Displaying IP Parameters ipdisp To display the Encoder IP parameters type ipdisp after the VIBE prompt Figure 2 10 Displaying Encoder IP parameters ipdisp command 10 12 54 29 PuTTY lO x ViBE gt ipdisp a IP address IP netmask IP gateway sessessecsoscosoeososo 10 12 54 29 sassssssansaasaasaasaa 255 255 255 0 sesssessssssosossessee 0 0 0 0 ViBE gt fj a Editing IP parameters ipset To edit the Encoder IP parameters type ipset after the ViB E prompt Figure 2 11 Editing Encoder IP parameters ipset command ViBE gt ipset IP address 10 12 54 29 10 12 54 29 IP netmask 255 255 255 0 255 255 255 0 IP gateway 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 10 12 54 29 PuTTY o x a New configuration will he IP address IP netmask IP gateway 10 12 54 29 255 255 255 0 Sure to modify vil Enter the new value of the parameter s to be edited and press Return If the parameter does not require editing you do not need to enter its value Just press Return straight after to confirm the current va
101. D dans le signal Page 41 Alarm Help X733 syntax 9 60 Probable Cause 1053 no ED in signal Category Communications Default severity warning Wording English No ED in signal Wording French Pas de ED dans le signal Diagnosis English EDS not detected Diagnosis French EDS non d tect Action English Check input signal Action French V rifier le signal d entr e Automatic redundancy Current autobackup Impossible Upstream autobackup Selectable The following device s can raise this probable cause DBE 4110 DSNG DBE 4120 Contribution DBE 4130 Broadcast SSEB DSS MSE DBE 4140 Local insertion ViBE EM3000 MPEG4 EM4000 Dual Channel EM4000 Quad Channel EM4000 Hexa Channel EM4000 Octal Channel ViBE Encoder SD Encoder MTEP syntax alarms matching this probable cause english 26 No extended data in signal 105 No ED in signal MTEP syntax alarms matching this probable cause french 26 Extended Data absent Page 42 Alarm Help X733 syntax 9 60 105 Pas de ED dans le signal Page 43 Alarm Help X733 syntax 9 60 Probable Cause 1062 no embedded signal Category Communications Default severity minor Wording English No embedded signal Wording French Pas de signal ins r Diagnosis English No embedded signal Diagnosis French Pas de signal ins r Action English Check input signal Action French V rif
102. DP IP Ethernet or MPEG RTP UDP IP Ethernet encapsulation is available for the transmission path The encapsulation mode can be selected by the User ViBE EM4000 Release 1 10 167 User Manual 46073586AB02 Appendix A Technical Specifications Interface Specifications 168 UDP mode MPEG UDP IP m UDP implementation is compliant with RFC 768 m Destination UDP ports can be statically set by the User m The number of transmitted MPEG packets per IP frame can be set by the User 1 to 7 MPEG packets can be selected per frame RTP mode MPEG RTP UDP IP RTP implementation is compliant with RFC 2250 m The number of transmitted MPEG packets per frame can be set by the User 1 to 7 MPEG packets can be selected per frame MPEG transmission The MPEG packet size is 188 bytes VIBE EM4000 Release 1 10 User Manual 46073586AB02 Appendix A Technical Specifications Interface Specifications Control amp Command interfaces Table A 10 ViBE EM4000 Control amp Command connectors Connector Description C C 1 2 CONTROL CONTROL ViBE EM4000 Release 1 10 User Manual 46073586AB02 Purpose Ethernet links for device Configuration and Monitoring Features Type IEEE 802 3 100 BaseT Connector type RJ45 110 Ohms line impedance Type IEEE 802 3 100 BaseT Bitrate 10 100 Mb s with autosensing Operating mode Half Full duplex autonegotiation Auto crossove
103. Degraded signal 137 Signal low 145 Fluctuating input 155 Satellite BER too high 155 Eb NO too low 155 Eb NO too low signal noise ratio too low MTEP syntax alarms matching this probable cause french 110 Signal d grad 120 Signal d grad 137 Signal faible 145 Entr e fluctuante 155 Taux d erreur trop lev 155 Eb NO trop faible 155 Eb NO too low rapport signal sur bruit trop faible Page 15 Alarm Help X733 syntax 9 60 Probable Cause 1330 Detected silence Category Communications Default severity major Wording English Detected silence Wording French Silence d tect Diagnosis English Silence detected on specified channel Diagnosis French Silence d tect sur la voie sp cifi e Action English Check input signal level or increase delay for silence detection Action French V rifier le niveau du signal d entr e ou augmenter le d lai pour la detection du silence Automatic redundancy Current autobackup Impossible Upstream autobackup Impossible The following device s can raise this probable cause Amber ViBE EM3000 MPEG4 EM4000 Dual Channel EM4000 Quad Channel EM4000 Hexa Channel EM4000 Octal Channel ViBE Mobile TV ViBE Mosaic Generator ASI ViBE Mosaic Generator IP VS7000 v1 x MTEP syntax alarms matching this probable cause english MTEP syntax alarms matching this probable cause french Page 16 Alarm Help X733 s
104. E EM4000 Release 1 10 User Manual 46073586AB02 Chapter 4 Web Browser Interface Settings WBU ISOG configuration specifications m Conf_xxx_xxx_WBU_ISOG Configuration mode 1MPTS over IP PID definition for 1st Basic encoder VIDEO PID 0x0200 Audio1 PID 0x1010 Audio2 PID 0x1020 PMT PID 0x0100 PCR PID VIDEOPID 0x0200 PID definition for 2nd Basic encoder VIDEO PID 0x0201 Audio1 PID 0x1011 Audio2 PID 0x1021 PMT PID 0x0101 257 PCR PID VIDEO PID 0x0201 PID definition for 3rd Basic encoder ViBE EM4000 NEM40IN4AA only VIDEO PID 0x0202 Audio PID 0x1012 Audio2 PID 0x1022 PMT PID 0x0102 257 PCR PID VIDEO PID 0x0202 PID definition for 4th Basic encoder ViBE EM4000 NEM40IN4AA only VIDEO PID 0x0203 Audio1 PID 0x1013 Audio2 PID 0x1023 PMT PID 0x0103 257 PCR PID VIDEO PID 0x0203 m Conf 59 94 1080i_WBU_ISOG Audio parameter definition Audiol Standard AC3 Transport Source SDI Grp1 Ch1 Mode Stereo Rate 192 kbit s Audio2 Standard MPEG 1 Layer Il Source SDI Grp1 Ch1 Mode Stereo Rate 192 kbit s Video parameter definition ViBE EM4000 Release 1 10 101 User Manual 46073586AB02 Chapter 4 Web Browser Interface Settings Frequency 59 94 Hz Profile HP L4 Standard Resolution 1080i x 1920 Bitrate 8 Mbps GOP 32 8 PAFF Auto Compres
105. EA EEEE 74 U UNPACKING ae 16 Username unse 55 Users number ss 53 V VBI processing features 9 NBI Type VBI antenne 96 VBR Mode Video nn nn 81 Ventilation JU 18 162 Ventilation restrictions cccccceessssssseeees 18 Video features cccecccecceeeeeeeeeeeseeeseeesseseeeeees 8 Virtual Source IP Address IP Transmission 69 252 ViBE EM4000 Release 1 10 User Manual 46073586AB02
106. EUR AC Les cordons secteur ne sont fournis avec l quipement que s ils ont t command s Sinon il est pr conis d utiliser des cordons conformes ceux d crits section Power Supply and Protective Ground on page 24 Les cordons secteur doivent tre en conformit avec la l gislation du pays o le produit est install ALIMENTATION SECTEUR ET PROTECTIONS LECTRIQUES Pour chaque circuit lectrique le c blage doit comporter une protection contre les surintensit s une protection contre les d fauts de fuite la terre etun syst me de coupure des deux p les ou un disjoncteur diff rentiel ALIMENTATION SECTEUR PANNEAU DE CONNEXION Le panneau de connexion doit tre conforme la l gislation du pays o le produit est install Ce panneau de connexion doit tre plac dans la baie de telle sorte que les prises et les cordons d alimentation soient port e de main afin de permettre la mise hors tension de l quipement PROTECTION CONTRE LES SURINTENSITES L alimentation lectrique dispose d une protection int gr e contre les surintensit s non accessible et non r armable En cas de dysfonctionnement contactez le D partement Services Clients de Thomson Video Networks SOURCES D ALIMENTATION ET INTERVENTION DANS LE CH SSIS Le chassis peut tre aliment par deux sources d alimentation pourvues pour chacune d elles d un cordon d alimentation D connectez tous les cordons d alimentation avan
107. Each managed host runs a process called an agent The agent is a server process that maintains the Management Information Base MIB database for the host SNMP uses ports 161 and 162 Simple Network Time Protocol Single Program Transport Stream Secure Real Time Transport Protocol Statistical Multiplexing Statistical multiplexing is a proven technique used to dynamically assign compression bitrates based upon video complexity and motion requirements of individual channels The principle of statistical multiplexing is that a group or pool of encoders shares a fixed quantity of bandwidth The bandwidth is allocated on a frame by frame basis by a centralized controller multiplexer so the encoder with the most complex video is allowed to borrow more bandwidth from the pool of encoders with less difficult video Set Top Box A device that provides access to the Broadband broadcast or Internet and displays information on a TV screen System Time Table ATSC Scalable Video Coding SVC is the name for the Annex G extension of the H 264 MPEG 4 AVC video compression standard SVC standardizes the encoding of a high quality video bitstream that also contains one or more subset bitstreams A subset video bitstream is derived by dropping packets from the larger video to reduce the bandwidth required for the subset bitstream The subset bitsteam can represent a lower spatial resolution smaller screen lower temporal resolution lower fr
108. FLE zen XXXXXX LAN Flextream 0 60 NEMS4D51 Installed 3C7450 DD DD surround encoding 1x5 1 3x2 0 8 61 NEMS4DDE Installed 3D6342 Dolby E decoding 8 62 NEMS4DOL Installed 3E083C DD DD stereo encoding 24 m Ordering and installing software licenses To order and install a software license please observe the following procedure 1 Order the software license from Thomson Video Networks by providing the equipment code and the seria number of the Encoder refer to section Ordering a software option eqcod drid on page 125 2 Install the software license using the key supplied by Thomson Video Networks refer to section Installing a software option insopt on page 127 Software downloading Downloading is used to upgrade device firmware It can be performed via the Download application supplied by Thomson Video Networks Customer Service The Download application is described in section Tools on page 143 The view down uninst and togg commands are for factory use only Up to 5 software packages can be downloaded to the ViBE EM4000 memory via the Download application 1 active package and 4 inactive packages The term software package also refers to a software release Managing Web Interface Users Foreword The Encoder can be operated via a Web Browser connected to the Web Interface featured on the device Users accessing the Encoder via this Interface must have been declared in the devic
109. Fan unit default 133 Fan fault 182 Air fans KO MTEP syntax alarms matching this probable cause french 32 Ventilation HS 94 D faillance de la ventilation 132 rotor s bloqu s 133 D faut de ventilation 182 Ventilation HS Page 84 Alarm Help X733 syntax 9 60 Probable Cause 1064 video standard mismatch Category Communications Default severity major Wording English Video standard mismatch Wording French Norme video incompatible Diagnosis English Input standard is different from the declared standard Diagnosis French La norme d tect e est diff rente de celle d finie dans la configuration Action English change preferred standard in configuration or change standard of input signal Action French Red finir la norme dans la configuration ou modifier la norme du signal d entr e Automatic redundancy Current autobackup Selectable Upstream autobackup Selectable The following device s can raise this probable cause DBE 2100 1 external video 4 audios DBE 2110 1 internal video 4 audios DBE 2120 8 audios DBE 2120 12 audios DBE 2110 1 internal video 8 audios DBE 2120 4 audios DBE 4110 DSNG DBE 4120 Contribution DBE 4130 Broadcast SSEB DSS MSE SSEB ISO MSE DBE 4140 Local insertion Audio Video Acquisition ViBE EM3000 MPEG4 EM4000 Dual Channel EM4000 Quad Channel EM4000 Hexa Channel EM4000 Octal Channel RD 2000 RD 5000 SD RD 5002 SD
110. Figure 2 20 Login page Username Password 3 Log in by entering your Username and Password admin can be entered for both the default username and password if it has not been deleted from the list of Users The device Status Summary page will be displayed Figure 2 21 Status Summary page Status Configuration Presets Maintenance BE EM4002 EM CONTROLLER Jser admin administrator 1 gt Logout 2M CONTROLLER Summary Expert parameters ON Outputs 3000 HD SDI 1280x720 11000 H s P Audio SDI AUD1 MPEG 1 stereo 128 kbit s H 10000 kbit s gt TS 1 Audio SDI AUD2 MPEG 1 stereo 128 kbit s H Disabled gt Eth1 Out disabled Eth1 Out Audio SDI AUD3 MPEG 1 stereo 128 kbit s H Disabled gt Eth2 Out disabled 0 0 0 0 add service add ghost EM ENCODER 2 Expert parameters OFF Eth2 Out To operate the Encoder via its Web Browser Interface refer to Chapter 4 Web Browser Interface on page 51 36 ViBE EM4000 Release 1 10 User Manual 46073586AB02 Chapter 3 Front Panel Operation Introduction This chapter explains how to use the Front Panel to configure the equipment In this Chapter Front Panel Description ss issus annees page 38 Screen Description un he page 41 ViBE EM4000 Release 1 10 37 User Manual 46073586AB02 Chapter 3 Front Panel Operation Front Panel Description Front Panel Description 38 Foreword The aim of the front panel is not
111. GOP 2 2 2222 78 Additional Delay Audio sssseeeeneenennnnnnnnen 95 AFD data Video VBI u a 80 AFD insertion Video VBI ni 80 Alarm Detected Silence Audio 95 Alarm Saturation Audio sms 95 Alignment Level Audio 87 Audio features u 9 Audio encoding Vu 9 Audio transcoding 9 Audio transport 1 0 0 eee 9 Audio Type Audio sisine 95 Auto Switch Mode Audio uu 86 B Bandwith Lowpass Filter Dolby Audio 93 Bitstream Mode Dolby Audio neennne 91 Block diagram nunnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn 10 Body Descriptor eeeensananennnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn 97 C Closed caption Video VBI sssccccssseeees 79 Closed GOP anna nimnnen 79 VIBE EM4000 Release 1 10 User Manual 46073586AB02 Coder Chassis Configuration sses 104 Compression Delay nassen 76 Configurations uuuussnnnennennnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn 100 predefined in factory s s s 100 WBU ISOG configurations na sana 101 Connecting the cables sssssssssssssssnrresssen 31 Content Audio sississcccecesdcecssssisicisisauadacieataed 96 Content VideO cscs 80 ODIO PFARREI NN kriansa 169 Control amp Command interfaces 169 Copyright AUdIO ahnen 96 Copyright Dolby Audio enesssnnesnnnenennnnnnens 93 Copyright Video nennen 80 Creating a new configuration 63 64 67 71 72 D DC Highpass Filter Dolby Audio 93 Default Gateway IP interface
112. IBE EM3000 2 Enter the device name IP address and device family of the device to be upgraded 3 Click OK This information will be displayed in the main window Method 2 1 Position the mouse cursor on the Devices page and then right click to display the following shortcut menu ViBE EM4000 Release 1 10 149 User Manual 46073586AB02 Chapter 6 Tools Download application 150 Figure 6 10 Devices page Download application Download version XMS_04 50 00 004_B ioj xj Devices Software Release Devices to upgrade Add Update All Unselect All 2 Click Add The following dialog box is displayed Figure 6 11 Name IP address and Device family of the device to be upgraded Download application 4 5 Inddadee _ ____ x Name emaoo0 IP address 10 12 54 66 Device family QE VIBE EM4000 VIBE EM1000 2000 VIBE EM3000 Enter the device name IP address and device family of the device to be upgraded Click OK This information will be displayed in the main window Step 2 Selecting the directory containing the file to be downloaded 1 Click the Software Release tab ViBE EM4000 Release 1 10 User Manual 46073586AB02 Chapter 6 Tools Download application 2 Click the Browse button 3 Select the directory containing the file to be downloaded Figure 6 12 Directory containing the file to be downloaded Download appli
113. Interface Settings Dolby E to PCM auto switch mode configuration Dolby E to PCM 2 0 detection When automatic switch mode is ON and if PCM 2 0 is detected at the input instead of Dolby E the audio encoder switches to the source defined by the PCM Reversion Source parameter below The encoder signals a stereo stream rather than a surround stream The default bitrates cannot be set by the User and are indicated in the tables below Dolby E Output detected pene standard Rate set by the Rate fixed User Dolby Digital 384 kbit s 192 kbit s AC3 448 kbit s 256 kbit s Dolby Digital Plus 192 kbit s 96 kbit s E AC3 256 kbit s 128 kbit s When auto switch mode is OFF and the Dolby E stream disappears the last valid Dolby E frame will be repeated 3 times and if it is still not resynchronized the encoder will be muted encoding of silence atthe same bitrate m Dolby E 5 1 to Dolby E 2 0 detection When automatic switch mode is ON and if Dolby E 2 0 is detected at the input instead of Dolby E 5 1 the encoder switches to the default bitrate The default bitrates cannot be set by the User and are indicated in the table below Dolby E 5 1 Output detected N er standard Rate set by the Rate fixed User Dolby Digital 384 kbit s 192 kbit s AC3 448 kbit s 256 kbit s Dolby Digital Plus 192 kbit s 96 kbit s E AC3 256 kbit s 128
114. Intermediate values of Adaptive filter processing 5 Adaptive filter processing is high This parameter is used to split the picture into 2 one part with Preprocessing and the other part without This feature should only be used for demonstration purposes Choice between Disabled Demonstration mode is disabled Vertical split Demonstration mode is enabled and the picture is split vertically Horizontal split Demonstration mode is enabled and the picture is split horizontally ViBE EM4000 Release 1 10 User Manual 46073586AB02 Chapter 4 Web Browser Interface Settings Mosquito Noise Reducer Used by setting the Mosquito Noise Reducer and Block Artefacts Reducer to Auto Off Not available in this release Editing an Audio component A video component must be present in the service Click add a component to select the shortcut menu and click Add Audio or click the audio component If the maximum number of audio components per service has already been reached Add Audio will not be underlined and the link will be unavailable About Audio encoders I EM40IN2AA The Encoder features 12 audio encoders 12 x AUD EM40IN4AA The Encoder features 24 audio encoders 24 x AUD Audio limitations EM40IN2AA 4 Dolby Digital 5 1 or Dolby Digital Plus 5 1 audio can be encoded at the same time 4Dolby E streams can be decoded at the same time EM40IN4AA 8 Dolby Digital 5 1
115. Local Console Adding a community string cadd To add a community string type cadd after the ViBE prompt Figure 5 36 Adding a community string cadd command LP 10125429 Pa ST El ViBE gt cadd Add a new community Community house Right ro rw ro Done ViBE gt fj Enter the following fields m Community community name m Right lt ro rw gt community right ro read only authorized and rw read write authorized The following information will be displayed m Done the community has been created in the temporary memory Creation should be confirmed using the csave command Deleting a community string cdel To delete a community string type cdel after the ViBE prompt Figure 5 37 Deleting an SNMP community cdel command 10 12 54 29 PuTTY lalx ViBE gt cdel al Remove community Community house Done viBE gt fj Enter the following fields m Community name of community to be deleted The following information will be displayed m Done the community has been deleted from the temporary memory Deletion should be confirmed using the csave command Saving the list of community strings csave To save the list of community strings transfer the temporary memory to the community memory type csave after the ViBE prompt 140 ViBE EM4000 Release 1 10 User Manual 46073586AB02 Chapter 5 Servicing Operations performed using the Local Co
116. M Input DBD 4436 DSNG Input Q 8 16 DBD 4437 B Dual Service 420 DBD 4437 8 Single Service 420 422P DBD 4437 9 Single Service 420 422P DBD 4437 X Single Service 420 DBD 4437 Y Single Service 420 DBD 4437 Z Single Service 420 RD 5000 SD Tandberg TT5031 Conax Tandberg TT5032 Mediaguard Tandberg TT5033 Nagravision Tandberg TT5034 Viaccess Rate Shaper V SFN Itis Adapter RD 5000 HD SD HDD 8200 Gecko 8900FFN Gecko 8900TFN V Junger C8000 ViBE Mobile TV SD Encoder ViBE Mosa c Generator ASI ViBE Mosa c Generator IP VS7000 v1 x CP6000 MTEP syntax alarms matching this probable cause english 7 no signal in PES INTF 17 No SDI signal 25 No signal 26 No analog signal 26 No SDI signal 27 no signal 27 no reference signal 34 No SDI signal 45 no SDI signal 47 Internal secure mode activated 63 Signal is lost at the input port 2 64 Signal is lost at the input port 2 110 Loss of signal 115 Loss of signal 120 Loss of signal 132 No signal on reference input 132 No signal on digital video input 132 No signal on analog video input 134 Signal lost 135 Tributary lost 137 Input data loss 138 ASI optical signal loss 138 LVDS input signal loss 140 Input Loss 140 Input Loss 145 Absence RF 145 No signal 145 No G703 signal 146 No input 147 No signal 154 No signal is detected input 1 155 Loss of signal 186 Signal lost 190 Tributary
117. M keys to select Address Netmask or Gateway setting and press OK The first digit is blinking ViBE EM4000 Release 1 10 45 User Manual 46073586AB02 Chapter 3 Front Panel Operation Screen Description Usethe and gt keys to select the field to be modified and then use the and A keys to adjust the value Refer to figure below Figure 3 11 IP Address Settings screen IP Address 010 141 127 040 01 141 127 040 Confirm the new value by pressing OK The Confirm screen will be displayed Figure 3 12 IP Address settings Confirm screen IP Address 11 141 127 40 Do you Confirm update No ESC Yes OK Press OK to enable the new IP address or press ESC HOME to exit this screen a The consistency between the IP address and Gateway address is I checked If an error is detected a Bad value message can be displayed The Gateway address can also be resetted The changes will be acknowledged after the Encoder has been rebooted Recall screen The Recall screen is used to recall a predefined configuration Configurations are predefined via the Web Interface To define configurations see section Predefined Configurations on page 99 To display the Recall screen go to the Setup screen select RECALL using the and gt keys and press OK Figure 3 13 Recall screen RECALL XX YY XX indicates the number of the currently selected predefined configuration YY indicates t
118. Of Picture M is the distance between successive P Frames A area of the TV picture Macroblocks are usually composed of two or more blocks of pixels The size of a block depends on the codec and is usually a multiple of 4 In MPEG 2 the size is fixed at blocks of 8x8 pixels In H264 the overarching macroblock size is fixed at 16x16 pixels but this is broken down into smaller blocks or partitions which are either 4 8 12 or 16 pixels by 4 8 12 or 16 pixels MacroBlock Adaptive Frame Field coding Use a macroblock pair structure for pictures coded as frames Million bits per second Master Guide Table ATSC VIBE EM4000 Release 1 10 User Manual 46073586AB02 Glossary Management Information Base SNMP collects management information from devices on the network and records the information in a management information base The MIB information includes device features data throughput statistics traffic overloads and errors Motion Compensation The use of motion vectors to improve the efficiency of the prediction of Motion Estimation Motion Vector sample values The prediction uses motion vectors to provide offsets into the past and or future reference frames or fields containing previously decoded sample values that are used to form the prediction error signal The process of estimating motion vectors in the encoding process A two dimensional vector used for inter prediction that provides an offset from the co
119. PSUs option NEMH4PSUAA 62 200 hours EM4000 NEM40IN4AA with one PSU 52 800 hours EM4000 NEM40IN4AA with two PSUs option NEMH4PSUAA 52 700 hours These MTBFs are Telcordia SR332 Issue 2 compliant If the temperature increases the MTBF will be reduced ViBE EM4000 Release 1 10 163 User Manual 46073586AB02 Appendix A Technical Specifications Interface Specifications Interface Specifications 164 Input interfaces Table A 7 ViBE EM4000 input connectors Connector Description NEM40INZ AA NEM40IN4AA SDIIN Purpose 2 or 4 HD SDI inputs Features Connectors 2 or 4 BNC 75 Ohms Standard compliance SMPTE 259M 292M 425M Input Processing Input formats The video input formats supported are m 720p 50 as per SMPTE 296M 2001 m 1080i 50 as per SMPTE 274M 2003 and ANSI SMPTE 274M 2005 m 720p 59 94 as per SMPTE 296M 2001 m 1080i 59 94 as per SMPTE 274M 2003 and ANSI SMPTE 274M 2005 The serial inputs offer automatic cable equalization and support attenuation and jitter as defined in SMPTE 259M 525i 625i SMPTE 292M 720p 1080i Synchronizer Each video input has a pseudo synchronizer to improve product behavior when using a deteriorated input signal Video behavior sm Source switching compliant with RP168 2002 clean switch between 2 synchronous signals is managed seamlessly VIBE EM4000 Release 1 10 User Manual 46073586AB02 Appendix A Technical Spe
120. Power Supply LEDS sue 39 Screen tree menu nneessneennnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn 41 G Gateway IP Routing sau 66 Generate TSDT uuuunnseeennsnnnennnnnnnnnnnennnnnnnnn 68 GOP Size UN a i dcssssscaciaciiiadidestiniiiiaaas 78 I IDR Insertion Expert parameter nasses 98 Initial settings mirisni nas 26 Input Format Audio 84 87 Input processing 164 Inputs Outputs features eeneennnnnnnnnnnneennnn 8 Insert PCR on RAI Expert parameter 98 Installation Accessing the Local Console applica TOM anne 26 Connecting the Signal Cables 35 Running the Web Browser nsss 36 Setting Initial Parameters 29 Installing the Device sssr 17 Interface Deactivation IP interface 65 Interface Status IP interface wee 66 IP adaptation eeeeeecesecceeccececeeceeeeeeeeteetees 167 IP address IP interface s sssensssssnsesssrensenes 65 IF OUT1 amp 2 4 0u ee 166 250 IP parameters Displaying cc 29 L Language Audio unesesnsnsnnnnnnnnnnonnnsnnennnnnenn 95 LCD screen brightness and contrast setting 40 LFE Channel Filter Dolby Audio 94 Line Mode DRC Dolby Audio ssessssssssssssens 91 Lo Ro Center Downmix Level Dolby Audio 92 Lo Ro Surround Downmix Level Dolby Audio Load to CONIQUPANON zeige 108 Lt Rt Center Downmix Level Dolby Audio 92 Lt Rt Surround Downmix Level Dolby Audio 92 M Max Bitrate Video us 81 Metadata Reversio
121. SBR SD SDI SDT SDTV SI SIF 244 Determined by the number of pixels displayed per line or for a given area Run Length Coding Run length encoding is a method of compressing digital information by representing repetitive data information by a notation that indicates the data that will be repeated and how many times the data will be repeated Rating Region Table ATSC Reed Solomon coding Reed Solomon is an algorithm for Forward Error Correction FEC It does not specify a block size or a specific number of check symbols instead these variables can be set to the best variables for each transmission medium Reed Solomon codes are used in a wide variety of commercial applications such as CDs DVDs and in data transmission technologies like DVB and WiMAX Rating System Table ATSC Real Time Transport Protocol This Protocol defines a standardized packet format for delivering audio and video over IP networks Real Time Streaming Protocol A network control protocol designed for use in entertainment and communications systems to control streaming media servers Used for establishing and controlling media sessions between end points Rack Unit A unit of measure used to describe the height of equipment intended for mounting in a 19 inch rack or a 23 inch rack One rack unit is 1 75 inches 44 45 mm high Alteration of the characteristics of a television signal in order to prevent unauthorized reception of the inform
122. THOMSON ViBE EM4 HD Encode VIBE EM4000 Release 1 10 46073586AB02 September 2012 CE Contacting Thomson Video Networks http www thomson networks com THOMSON Sa gt VIDEO NETWORKS PICTURE THE PASSION VIDEO COMPRESSION BANDWIDTH PERFORMANCE SUPERIOR QUALITY 2 ViBE EM4000 Release 1 10 User Manual 46073586AB02 Contacting Thomson Video Networks Support Centers http www thomson networks com about us contact us technical su pport International Support Centers EMEA APAC Canada Toll Free Number 800 9010 1010 Available from following countries Australia Belgium Canada Cyprus Finland France Germany Hong Kong Ireland Israel Italy Malaysia The Netherlands Norway Philippines Russia Singapore South Africa South Korea Spain Sweden Switzerland Taiwan The UK Hungary Toll Free Number 802 05133 India Toll Free Number 000 800 852 1339 USA Toll Free Number 1866 420 8666 LATAM Toll Free Numbers Argentina 800 9010 1010 Brazil 0800 8923 721 Mexico 001 800 514 2514 Peru 0800 54 852 For all countries including the ones above we can also be reached through our regular line caller charged at standard fee 33 1 70 48 07 76 Email contact support thomson networks com ViBE EM4000 Release 1 10 3 User Manual 46073586AB02 BLANK PAGE ViBE EM4000 User Manual 46073586AB02 Contents Contents Preface een nennen ernennen Ener
123. This digital apparatus does not exceed the Class A limits for radio noise emissions from digital apparatus set out in the Radio Interference Regulations of the Canadian Department of Communications Le pr sent appareil num rique n emet pas de bruits radio lectriques d passant les limites applicables aux appareils numeriques de la classe A pr scrites dans le Reglement sur le brouillage radio lectrique dict par le minist re des Communications du Canada EN55022 Class Warning In a domestic environment products that comply with Class A may cause radio interference in which case the user may be required to take adequate measures ViBE EM4000 Release 1 10 217 User Manual 46073586AB02 Appendix C Regulatory Notices VCCI Class A Warning VCCI Class A Warning CORES PHLBRESERRSAEMABRS VCCI OBS BOC VFZAMRRMRECT CORBtRER CEM TS OBR MEAs ET TIEKE COMPILISHAAPHBICHREBST BLIBKENSCEPHVETF Laser Compliance Laser Safety Requirements The device used in this product is a Class 1 certified laser product Operating this product outside specifications or altering from its original design may result in hazardous radiation exposure and may be considered an act of modifying or new manufacturing of a laser product under U S regulations contained in 21CFR Chapter 1 subchapter J or CENELEC regulations in HD 482 S1 People performing such an act are required by law to recertify and reidentify this product in accor
124. V channels depending of the EM4000 version Full MPEG 4 AVC support with MBAFF and PAFF for interlaced contents Remote Flextream statistical multiplexing Capped VBR mode 8 ViBE EM4000 Release 1 10 User Manual 46073586AB02 Chapter 1 Overview Product Overview m Audio HD SDI embedded audio input Audio transcoding Dolby E transcoding to Dolby Digital AC3 or Dolby Digital Plus E AC3 stereo Dolby E transcoding to Dolby Digital AC3 5 1 or Dolby Digital Plus E AC3 5 1 Audio encoding MPEG 1 Layer II 2 0 1 0 Dolby Digital AC3 2 0 1 0 Dolby Digital AC3 5 1 Dolby Digital Plus E AC3 2 0 1 0 Dolby Digital Plus E AC3 5 1 AAC LC 2 0 1 0 HE AAC 2 0 1 0 HE AAC v2 2 0 AAC LC 5 1 HE AAC 5 1 Audio transport external encoding Dolby Digital AC3 Dolby Digital Plus E AC3 VBI processing VITC Closed Caption PVR descriptor WST HD teletext AFD m Control and Monitoring Control and Monitoring through Web Browser or XMS eXtensible Management System Monitoring through SNMP ViBE EM4000 Release 1 10 9 User Manual 46073586AB02 Chapter 1 Overview Product Overview 10 Encoder block diagrams ViBE EM4000 NEM40IN2AA Encoder The ViBE EM4000 NEM40IN2AA Encoder Block Diagram is represented below Figure 1 2 ViBE EM4000 NEM40IN2AA block diagram EM4000 Encoder Basic encoder 1
125. VIBE EM4000 Encoder and its Basic encoders Figure 4 61 Encoder Identification page ViBE EM4000 NEM40IN2AA EM CONTROLLER Identification THOMSON X t O ia E an me EM 4000 Encoder Identification Equipment Name Encoder 1 Name Encoder 2 Name 110 ViBE EM4000 Release 1 10 User Manual 46073586AB02 Chapter 4 Web Browser Interface Maintenance Figure 4 62 Encoder Identification page VIBE EM4000 NEM40IN4AA EM CONTROLLER Identification VIBE EM4000 i A pret ET 7 EM 4000 Encoder Identification Equipment Name Encoder 1 Name Encoder 2 Name Encoder 3 Name Encoder 4 Name submit reset Parameters are directly edited in the related box Equipment Name of the ViBE EM4000 Encoder Encoder x Name of the Basic encoder x Save Load Encoder settings On the Maintenance menu click Save settings Load Settings to save load a settings file The Save Settings command is used to save a file containing all the Encoder settings to a hard drive The Load Settings command is used to load a settings file from a hard drive Figure 4 63 Maintenance menu Maintenance menu Status Configuration Presets Maintenance Reboot Identification Load Settings ES Di r Jser admin administrator 3 gt Logout Save Settings FM CONTROII FR Rehani Saving Encoder settings to a
126. ViBE Encoder ViBE Decoder RD 5000 HD SD RD 3000 SD Encoder CP6000 Page 85 Alarm Help X733 syntax 9 60 MTEP syntax alarms matching this probable cause english 34 Bad standard 50 60Hz 45 Bad standard 50 60Hz 107 videoStdMismatch 110 Video standard mismatch 132 Unknown or wrong standard on reference input 132 Unknown or wrong standard on digital video input 132 Unknown composite standard MTEP syntax alarms matching this probable cause french 34 Mauvais standard 50 60Hz 45 Mauvais standard 50 60Hz 107 Norme vid o incompatible 110 Norme vid o incompatible 132 R f rence synchroniseur inconnue ou incorrecte 132 Standard vid o num rique inconnu ou incorrect 132 Standard composite inconnu Page 86 Glossary This glossary is common to all products Defined words do not necessarily apply to this product 100 1000Base T An Ethernet standard designed to generate monitor and capture 100 1000 Ethernet traffic 3 2 pulldown A technique used when converting film material which operates at 24 pictures per second to 525 line video operating at 29 97 pictures per second 3G SDI 3 Gbps High Definition Serial Digital Interface 4 2 0 A chrominance sub sampling system in which the color difference signals are sampled on alternate lines at half the luminance rate 4 2 2 A chrominance sub sampling system in which the color difference signals are sampled on all lines at half the luminance
127. a ee 190 Dolby E monitoring ou ecseessccseccseececceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 190 Dolby E to PCM auto switch mode Dolby Dual configura ViBE EM4000 Release 1 10 User Manual 46073586AB02 Contents 1 0 1 WEPPEBELTRPERLPERFEREPFETEEEBETELEENEERFIEEEUELE ESBELEEFFEREETEFEEEESSEHIEBEEN 190 Dolby E 5 1 to Dolby E 2 0 auto switch mode Dolby Dual c nfig ratio n Le te te 191 Flextream options ss 192 Local Flextream ss 192 Remote Flextream ss 192 Standard Compliance 193 Certifications and environmental specifications 194 EU declaration Of Con foORMItY screens 196 ROHS declaration of conformity uuu222sssnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn 197 Ordering LI ee 198 Appendix B Safety Instructions 201 Safety Summary English s ismes 202 Sicherheit berblick Deutsch uuusessnsrsennnnennnneennnnnnn 206 Consignes de s curit Fran ais 210 Safety Instructions for Finland Norway Sweden n 215 Appendix C Regulatory Notices 217 Appendix D Customer Services uuuusaunnnennannnnnnnannennn 221 Support Center Contaots u 222 Warranty 2er 224 Servit Soe oeiia aeneae E Er IP E r Eer DOE A RA TEREE CRETO Raas saan 225 Spare Parts 226 Returning Equipment sen a 227 Repackaging for Shipment 228 Long Term Product Support 229
128. al 46073586AB02 Chapter 3 Front Panel Operation Screen Description Reboot screen The Reboot screen is used to reboot the device To display this screen go to the Setup screen select REBOOT using the and gt keys and press OK Figure 3 17 Reboot screen REBOOT Reboot Equipment No ESC Yes OK Procedure for rebooting the device m Press OK to reboot the device If you do not wish to reboot the device press ESC HOME to exit this screen LCD CAL screen The LCD Calibration screen is used to adjust the LCD Brightness and Contrast To display this screen go to the Setup screen select LCD CAL using the and gt keys and press OK Figure 3 18 LCD CAL screen LCD CAL lt BRIGHTNESS gt CONTRAST Procedure for adjusting LCD Brightness or Contrast Use the and gt keys to select the Brightness or Contrast setting and press OK Figure 3 19 Brightness CAL screen BRIGHTNESS Adjust Brightness Up Down Save OK Exit Esc Home m Use the and M keys to adjust the setting according to the lighting conditions 48 VIBE EM4000 Release 1 10 User Manual 46073586AB02 Chapter 3 Front Panel Operation Screen Description m Press OK to confirm and save the setting s or ESC HOME to exit this screen without saving the setting s If OK is pressed the new settings will be restored on next Encoder power up otherwise the previous settings will be recalled Info screen Th
129. al bitrate and the bandwidth will be filled with stuffing bytes which can then be replaced by opportunistic data injected on a downstream multiplexer Stuffing quantity varies as it depends on the complexity of the incoming video signals m Flextream Bitrate allocator The bitrate allocator responsible for collecting the complexity of pictures to be encoded and for allocating bitrates to each Encoder in a pool can be located on a site that is remote from the Encoder site or on the same site The allocator is built in the 9030 9040 NetProcessor multiplexer device and communicates with the Encoders via the UDP IP multicast network The allocator can manage several pools of Encoders A Flextream pool can contain ViBE EM4000 Encoders ViBE EM2000 Encoders ViBE EM1000 Encoders ViBE EM3000 Encoders and ViBE Dual Pass Encoders DP ENC AD ENC IP ENC This feature is a software option Refer to section Local Flextream on page 192 and section Remote Flextream on page 192 VIBE EM4000 Release 1 10 User Manual 46073586AB02 Appendix A Technical Specifications Features Control Command Control Command via a Web Browser The ViBE EM4000 Encoder can be operated using a Web Browser connected to the device s Web Interface application via the Ethernet CTRL CD link This operating mode is used to access all Encoder features store and recall operating configurations and view device status and alarms Control Comman
130. alcul ECM sans carte associ e 97 Calcul ECM sans carte associ e 97 Module de calcul HS 97 ECMG HS 97 Pas de module de calcul 97 Carte fille inconnue 97 L ECMG est en cours d arr t 98 Calcul ECM sans carte associ e 98 ECMG HS 98 Pas de module de calcul Page 26 Alarm Help X733 syntax 9 60 98 Carte fille inconnue 98 L ECMG est en cours d arr t 102 Defaillance mat rielle 103 D faillance mat rielle 106 Defaillance mat rielle 111 D faillance mat rielle 115 D faillance mat rielle 116 D faillance mat rielle 119 D faillance mat rielle 132 D faut liaison bloc donn es auxiliaires d codeur composite 132 Echec de l autocalibration 132 Debordement FIFO d entr e LTCe 132 Probleme dans le bloc donn es auxiliaires 132 D faut sur liaison face avant liaison maintenance utilisateur 132 D faut sur liaison face avant liaison d exploitation distante 132 D faut sur liaison face avant carte interne de traitement 138 Dysfonctionnement hardware du synth tiseur 138 Dysfonctionnement hardware de la RF phase lock DRO 138 Probl me hardware sur l oscillateur local 100MHz 138 Dysfonctionnement hardware sur l oscillateur local 7OMHz 138 Alarme interne la carte MC amp C 138 Alarme interne la carte de modulation 138 Alarme interne au module d interface 138 Architecture non reconnue 140 D faut syst me 144 Erreur mat rielle 14
131. ame rate or lower quality video signal A network switch is a computer networking device that connects network segments An Ethernet switch operates at the data link layer of the OSI model to create a separate collision domain for each switch port With 4 computers e g A B C and D on 4 switch ports A and B can transfer data back and forth while C and D also do so simultaneously and the two conversations will not interfere with one another ViBE EM4000 Release 1 10 245 User Manual 46073586AB02 Glossary TCP TCP IP TDT Time Code Time stamp Timeslicing TOT TS TSDT TVCT UDP Unicast UTC 246 Transmission Control Protocol One of the main protocols in TCP IP networks TCP enables two hosts to establish a connection and exchange streams of data TCP guarantees delivery of data and packets that will be delivered in the same order in which they were sent While IP takes care of handling the actual delivery ofthe data TCP takes care of keeping track of the individual units of data called packets that a message is divided into for efficient routing through the Internet Transmission Control Protocol Internet Protocol Two interrelated protocols that are part of the Internet protocol suite TCP operates on the OSI transport layer and breaks data into packets IP operates on the OSI network layer and routes the packets While IP takes care of handling the actual delivery ofthe data TCP ta
132. ance EN55022 Class A recommendations VCCI Class A recommendations and Laser compliance m Appendix D Customer Services indicates what you should do if you have a problem with equipment whether you need to repair it to return it or to dispose of it Appendix E Alarms gives the list of alarms which may be visible in the Alarm panel For each alarm the diagnostics action to be performed and alarm severity are given A glossary can be found at the end of the manual just before the Index Conventions Used in This Manual Warnings Cautions and Notes Heed Warnings All warnings on the product and in the operating instructions should be adhered to The manufacturer cannot be held responsible for injuries or damage where warnings and cautions have been ignored or taken lightly 2 ViBE EM4000 Release 1 10 User Manual 46073586AB02 Preface Conventions Used in This Manual Read Instructions All the safety and operating instructions should be read before this product is operated Follow Instructions All operating and use instructions should be followed Terms in this Manual Safety related statements appear in this manual in the following form Warning statements identify conditions or practices that may result A in personal injury or loss of life damage to equipment or other property or which may cause equipment crucial to your business environment to become temporarily non operational
133. apter 5 Servicing Operations performed using the Local Console Figure 5 7 Displaying Encoder IP parameters ipdisp command ixi ViBE gt ipdisp af IP address ssssscsssssssssset 10 12 54 29 IP netmask cccesccscesscssceses 255 255 255 0 IP gateWay essen aan nn OF 0 0 0 ViBE gt Jj Editing IP parameters ipset To edit the Encoder IP parameters type ipset after the ViBE prompt Figure 5 8 Editing Encoder IP parameters ipset command 10 12 54 29 PuTTY i o x ViBE gt ipset al IP address 10 12 54 29 10 12 54 29 IP netmask 255 255 255 0 255 255 255 0 IP gateway 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 New configuration will be IP address scseoscsnnenenunnnn n5 10 12 54 29 IP netmask ssasssussesssssst 255 255 255 0 IP gateway soso Sure to modify vil J m Enter the new value of the parameter s to be edited and press Return If the parameter does not require editing you do not need to enter its value Just press Return straight after to confirm the current value If the IP gateway address is not used type 0 0 0 0 m Type y after Sure to modify if you wish to confirm the new configuration or n if you wish to keep the previous configuration The changes will be acknowledged after the Encoder has been I rebooted The Encoder must be connected to the network during the boot which follows IP address configuration to facilitate detection of MAC IP address pair changes
134. arth ground prior to making any other equipment connections Identifies an external protective grounding terminal which may be connected to earth ground as a supplement to an internal grounding terminal Indicates that static sensitive components are present which may be damaged by electrostatic discharge Use anti static procedures equipment and surfaces during servicing VIBE EM4000 Release 1 10 User Manual 46073586AB02 Danger Appendix B Safety Instructions Danger The following warning statements identify conditions or practices A that can result in personal injury or loss of life Mains Power Safety Instructions RELIABLE EARTHING The product is designed for connection to an earth grounded AC outlet and must be correctly earthed through the main outlet of cable To avoid risk of electrical shock or equipment damage do not disconnect the grounding plug AC MAINS POWER CORD AC mains cords are only shipped with equipment if ordered Otherwise it is advisable to use mains cords as described in section Power Supply and Protective Ground on page 24 The mains power cords should comply with the legislation in force in the country of installation MAINS POWER CIRCUIT OVERLOADING For each branch circuit the connection panel should feature overload and earth fault protection and a bipolar cut off device or a differential circuit breaker MAINS POWER CONNECTION PANEL The connection panel should
135. ase 1 10 User Manual 46073586AB02 Chapter 3 Front Panel Operation Screen Description AID AID ext Used to indicate the alarm identifiers Alarm ID and Alarm ID Extension so that it is easier to find relevant information in the documentation Alarm Wording Used to provide the alarm description which is identical to the description displayed on the Management System If necessary the and M keys can be used to display the next or previous alarm The list of alarms is created when the Alarms screen is selected To I update the list of alarms you will need to exit the Alarms screen Setup screen The Setup screen is used to access the IP Settings Recall Reboot and LCD CALibration sub menus To display this screen go to the Main menu screen select SETUP using the arrow keys and press OK Figure 3 9 Setup screen SETUP lt IP SETTING gt RECALL REBOOT LCD CAL IP Settings screen The IP Setting screen is used to view and set the Control amp Command IP Settings To display this screen go to the Setup screen select P SETTING using the and gt keys and press OK The IP Address Netmask and Gateway will be displayed Figure 3 10 IP Settings screen IP SETTING lt IP Address gt 10 141 247 40 IP Netmask 255 255 255 0 IP Gateway 10 141 127 40 m Example Procedure for editing the IP Address the procedure is the same to edit the IP Netmask or IP Gateway values Use the and
136. assis type the following message will be displayed Figure 4 69 Loading a configuration error Upload configuration The configuration could not be uploaded ViBE EM4000 Release 1 10 113 User Manual 46073586AB02 Chapter 4 Web Browser Interface Maintenance BLANK PAGE 114 ViBE EM4000 Release 1 10 User Manual 46073586AB02 Chapter 9 Servicing Introduction This chapter describes m The Local Console Application featured on the device The Local Console application is used to perform certain servicing operations described in this chapter Access to the Local Console application Operations performed via the Local Console application m Maintenance operations relating to device fans In this Chapter Operations performed using the Local Console page 116 Accessing the Local Console application page 116 List of Local Console commands page 117 Description of basic parameters anna page 120 Managing software plans na page 124 Managing software licenses nnee nennen page 129 Software downloading na page 130 Managing Web Interface Users page 130 Managing predefined configurations page 133 Managing community strings and SNMP agent information page 137 Preventive and corrective maintenance operations page 142 VIBE EM4000 Release 1 10 115 User Manual 46073586AB02 Chapter 5 Servicing Operations performed using
137. ation in clear form Spectral Band Replication SBR is a tool used in HE AAC for broadcast transmissions Standard Definition Serial Digital Interface Service Description Table A mandatory Digital Video Broadcast DVB SI table that provides information in the SI stream about the services in the system for example the name of the service the service provider etc Standard Definition Television Service Information Digital information describing the delivery system content and scheduling timing of broadcast data streams DVB Source Input Format A video format that was developed to allow the storage and transmission of digital video The SIF format specifies resolutions of the following NTSC 525 59 94 SIF format is 352x240 x29 97fps PAL 625 50 SIF format is 352x288 x25 00fps ViBE EM4000 Release 1 10 User Manual 46073586AB02 SMPTE SNG SNMP SNTP SPTS SRTP StatMux STB STT svc Switch Network Glossary Society of Motion Picture and Television Engineers A Standards Organization devoted to advancing theory and application in motion imaging including film television video computer imaging and telecommunications Satellite News Gathering Simple Network Management Protocol SNMP provides a means to monitor and control network devices and to manage configurations statistics collection performance and security SNMP network management is based on the client and server model
138. ations Recall Predefined X X X Configurations View Encoder X X X X Configuration Edit Encoder X X X Configuration View Alarms X X X X Reboot Device X X X Create User X X The following Users are defined on device shipment Table 2 3 Users defined on device shipment User name Password Profile admin admin administrator service service service technician technician technician operator operator operator user user operator ViBE EM4000 Release 1 10 User Manual 46073586AB02 Chapter 2 Installation and Startup Performing the Initial Settings Table 2 3 Users defined on device shipment User name Password Profile guest guest guest operator It is possible to edit the characteristics of these Users and a maximum of 64 Users can be defined Adding a User usradd To add a User type usradd after the ViBE prompt Figure 2 16 Adding a Web Interface User usradd command lolx ViBE gt usradd a Add user name css techi password roeonse confirm password administrator service technician operator profile saw technician add techi as technician Done viBE gt D Enter the following fields m name User name m password password for accessing the Web Interface m confirm password re enter the password for accessing the Web Interface m profile enter the User profile The available profiles are given just above this field The following informatio
139. bient Used to indicate the airflow temperature atthe encoder input The temperature is displayed in degree Centigrade and degree Fahrenheit Encoding Board Information screen The Encoding Board Information screen is used to get Encoding Board s information The ViBE EM4000 2 video channels features one Encoding board The ViBE EM4000 4 video channels features two Encoding boards To display this screen go to the Info screen select Encoding using the and gt keys and press OK m The following information will be displayed Figure 3 23 Encoding Board Info screen ENC x x BOARD INFO HW Version XXXXXXX S N XXXXXXX HW Version Used to indicate the Encoding board Hardware release number S N Used to indicate the Encoding board serial number 50 ViBE EM4000 Release 1 10 User Manual 46073586AB02 Chapter 4 Web Browser Interface Introduction This chapter explains how to use the Web Browser Graphical User Interface to configure the equipment Operation with Web Interface is explained by using a ViBE EM4000 NEM40IN2AA Encoder The principles are identical for the VIBE EM4000 NEM40IN4AA Encoder Number of Basic encoders m ViBE EM4000 NEM4OIN2AA 2 Basic encoder a VIBE EM4000 NEM4OIN4AA 4 Basic encoders In this Chapter Encoder Web Interface Specifications page 52 Reaching the BUN na ei page 55 Quick Configuratio sisses nine page 56 Ee anna page 57 DAS OT the devie srasni nn page 60 a r T page
140. ble Upstream autobackup Impossible The following device s can raise this probable cause Net Processor 9030 Amber Net Processor 9040 ViBE EM3000 MPEG4 EM4000 Dual Channel EM4000 Quad Channel EM4000 Hexa Channel EM4000 Octal Channel ViBE ViBE Encoder Opal II ViBE Mobile TV SD Encoder ViBE Mosaic Generator ASI ViBE Mosaic Generator IP VS7000 v1 x MTEP syntax alarms matching this probable cause english 59 Problem with allocator 139 Receive failure from master 143 REMOTE FLEXTREAM Receive failure MTEP syntax alarms matching this probable cause french 59 Probleme avec l allocateur 139 Echec de r ception du maitre 143 REMOTE FLEXTREAM Echec de r ception Page 65 Alarm Help X733 syntax 9 60 Probable Cause 62 replaceableUnitMissing Category Equipment Default severity critical Wording English Replaceable unit missing Wording French Unit amovible manquante Diagnosis English Board can not be detected Diagnosis French La carte ne peut tre d tect e Action English Check that board is correctly inserted in the right slot If the problem persists contact Customer Service Action French S assurer que la carte est correctement ins r e dans l emplacement appropri Si le probleme persiste contacter le Service Clients Automatic redundancy Current autobackup Impossible Upstream autobackup Selectable The following device s can raise t
141. by E stream can theoretically contain up to 8 programs each program being either surround stereo or mono The total number of channels mono in the stream is 8 max One out of four programs can be decoded via one Dolby E decoder option After decoding the programs can be encoded in Dolby Digital AC3 or Dolby Digital Plus E AC3 Metadata are extracted from the Dolby E stream and can be sent with the encoded Dolby stream Dolby E monitoring A Dolby E monitoring specific indication is provide An area integrated in the Web Interface analyzes the Dolby E stream deembedded from the HD SDI and indicates the type of stream found according to the program number Dolby E to PCM auto switch mode Dolby Dual configuration In Dolby Dual configuration mode switching on 2 different groups channels from Dolby E to PCM and vice versa is supported The switch from Dolby E to PCM and back is almost seamless silence insertion lt 200 ms This switch mode can be set ON OFF by the User When automatic switching mode is ON the Encoder switches to the default bitrate when PCM 2 0 is detected instead of Dolby E and signals a stereo stream rather than a surround stream The default bitrate mode cannot be set by the User ViBE EM4000 Release 1 10 User Manual 46073586AB02 Appendix A Technical Specifications Options The bitrates used are Table A 25 Bitrates in Dolby Dual configuration mode Dolby
142. by phone or e mail 24 hours a day 7 days a week The Thomson call center phone numbers are available on our website Service amp Support Contact Support page http www thomson networks com contact us technical support International Support Centers EMEA APAC Canada Toll Free Number 800 9010 1010 Available from following countries Australia Belgium Canada Cyprus Finland France Germany Hong Kong Ireland Israel Italy Malaysia The Netherlands Norway Philippines Russia Singapore South Africa South Korea Spain Sweden Switzerland Taiwan The UK Hungary Toll Free Number 802 05133 India Toll Free Number 000 800 852 1339 USA Toll Free Number 1866 420 8666 LATAM Toll Free Numbers Argentina 800 9010 1010 Brazil 0800 8923 721 Mexico 001 800 514 2514 Peru 0800 54 852 For all countries including the ones above we can also be reached through our regular line caller charged at standard fee 33 1 70 48 07 76 After your call is logged by our call center you are called back by a technical support engineer m To contactthe Thomson support center by email please write to us at Email contact support thomson networks com To ensure fast customer service please include the following information when contacting Thomson by email Your contract number Your geographical location i e country you are in The name of your product 222 ViBE EM4000 Release 1 10 User Manual 4607
143. cation Select directory containing files to download 5 Releases EME v1 0 H E EM4000_01 00 00 000 D EM4000_01 00 00 001 EM4000_01 00 00 002 D EM4000_01 00 00 003 ial En D EM4000_01 00 00 008 F e Pa ush kew creation of ee E oma 4 Click OK The contents of the selected directory will be displayed Figure 6 13 Files displayed on the Software Release page Download application Download version XMS_04 50 00 004_B loj xj Devices Software Release Directory containing software release to download or to activate N EM4000 Releases V1 0 EM4000_01 00 00 004 f Check files that are part of the release For boards products ME 4000_01 00 00 004 7z EM400x 5 If necessary select the file to be downloaded Step 3 Selecting devices to upgrade 1 Click the Devices tab 2 Select the devices to upgrade To upgrade specific devices use the standard shortcut operations Shift left click or Ctrl right click To select all devices use the Select All command in the shortcut menu Step 4 Selecting the operation to be performed ViBE EM4000 Release 1 10 151 User Manual 46073586AB02 Chapter 6 Tools Download application Select the operation to be performed on the selected devices via the shortcut menu Full Update Download only View or Toggle m Full Update command This command downloads and toggles the file ch
144. cifications Interface Specifications m Source switching not compliant with RP168 2002 switch between 2 synchronous signals that have shifted or 2 asynchronous signals is not seamless picture freeze during the switch m Inthe event of an HD SDI unplug plug picture freeze for 3 seconds at most and then switch to black pattern m Inthe event of a degraded signal for more than 1 picture the Encoder will repeat the last valid frame twice freeze for 2 pictures at most and then switch to the black pattern ifthe system is not yet resynchronized Audio behavior Table A 8 Audio behavior Input format In case of degraded signal PCM Insertion of silence i e audio encoding fed with silence m Silence encoding with the same setup as the nominal stream same encoding mode and bitrate No error masking no repetition of last valid frame Precompressed With error masking AC3 transport Insertion of silence Implies repetition of last valid frame and then mute Without error masking AAC transport Insertion of silence Dolby E Auto switch from Dolby E to PCM encoding Insertion of silence VBI behavior In case of degraded signal m Repetition of last valid VBI AFD data when AFD is selected No repetition for all other VBI data VIBE EM4000 Release 1 10 165 User Manual 46073586AB02 Appendix A Technical Specifications Interface Specifications Output interfaces Tab
145. coder the encoder sends a PCR to the decoder The decoder receives the packet and compares the STC value with its own STC counter value Ifthe values are the same then no adjustment is needed but if the two values are different the decoder must either reset speed up or slow down its STC ViBE EM4000 Release 1 10 User Manual 46073586AB02 Glossary PDC Program Delivery Control VBI PDC is specified by the standard ETS 300 231 published by the European Telecommunications Standards Institute ETSI This specifies the signals sent as hidden codes in the teletext service indicating when transmission of a program starts and finishes PES Packetized Elementary Stream A specification in the MPEG 2 Part 1 Systems ISO IEC 13818 1 and ITU T H 222 0 1 2 that defines carrying of elementary streams in packets within MPEG program streams and MPEG transport streams 3 The elementary stream is packetized by encapsulating sequential data bytes from the elementary stream inside PES packet headers PID Packet Identifier A unique integer value used to identify the contents of an MPEG 2 Transport Stream packet Video component PID Audio component PID etc Profile A defined subset of the syntax specified in the MPEG 2 or MPEG 4 video coding specification PMT Program Map Table A mandatory MPEG 2 PSI table Each service has a PMT It lists the service component parts elementary streams of video audio location ofthe PCR fields etc
146. connection is required per device Each Encoder side panel features a tapped hole to connect a bonding strip The bonding strip can be fixed either on one side of the chassis right or left side or on the rear of the chassis left side m Fixing the bonding strip on the back of the chassis The bonding strip is fixed using an M4 nut provided with the product It must have a 6mm cross section and be under 500mm in length m Fixing the bonding strip on the side of the chassis The bonding strip is fixed using an M4 screw whose length depends on the bonding strip type no more than 15 mm of the screw must be inserted into the Encoder The bonding strip must have a 6 mm cross section and be under 500 mm in length The rack EMC DC bus to which the ViBE EM4000 EMC strip is connected must be connected to the rack ground pin This pin is also connected to the safety ground Figure 2 5 EMC screw rear panel EMC screw M4 Tapped hole M4 PSU 1 N O ViBE EM4000 Release 1 10 23 User Manual 46073586AB02 Chapter 2 Installation and Startup Mounting in Rack 24 Power Supply and Protective Ground Power Supply Cord s Specifications The AC mains power cords are only shipped with the device if ordered Otherwise itis advisable to use mains cables with the following features m Device end of cable IEC 320 compliant connector m Flexible wire 3x 1 mm cross section or
147. ction Problems Temporary Internet Files and History Settings Home page f To create home page tabs type each address on its own line i Teer Fr Temporary Internet File http thomson networks thomnet com km HeadEndjPro Internet Explorer stor s copies of webpages images ar a For Faster viewing lat ae Use default Use blank Check for newer versi fns of stored pages een Every time I visit the webpage ST Delete temporary fles history cookies saved passwords Every time I start Internet Explorer and web form information C Automatically T Delete browsing history on exit Cover Deleon Seins gt Disk space to use 8 1024MB 150 Search Recommended 50 250MB p Change search defaults Settings Current location Tabs C Documents and Settings thoumyp Local Settings Temp Change how webpages are displayed in Settings Internet Files tabs Appearance ne Views File 52 VIBE EM4000 Release 1 10 User Manual 46073586AB02 Chapter 4 Web Browser Interface Encoder Web Interface Specifications 2 Proxy server bypass If the Web Browser is connected to the Encoder via a proxy server bypass the proxy server Example with Internet Explorer version 8 Figure 4 2 Bypass of the proxy server N vr m x Google Giv Delete Browsing History Ctri Shift Del Toy InPrivate Browsing Ctrl Shift P We Reopen Last Browsing Session ll E EM 4000 InPrivate Filtering Ctr Shift F InPrivate F
148. d IP address sntp command ixi ViBE gt sntp Al NTP time synchronization 1 Enable 0 Disable 0 1 Preferred NTP server IP address fi 172 32 63 35 Enable NTP time synchronization servers 172 32 63 38 Change takes effect after board reboot ViBE gt Jj m To enable disable time synchronization type 1 Enable or 0 Disable m To edit the preferred IP address type the new address on the second line rebooted The first synchronization operation may take up to 20 minutes The changes will be acknowledged after the Encoder has been ViBE EM4000 Release 1 10 31 User Manual 46073586AB02 Chapter 2 Installation and Startup Performing the Initial Settings 32 Declaring Web Interface Users Foreword The Encoder can be operated via a Web Browser connected to the Web Interface featured on the device Users accessing the Encoder via this Interface must have been declared in the device User declaration and management creation deletion password rights etc are performed via the Local Console User rights are defined according to four preset profiles Operator Technician Administrator Service The rights corresponding to the profiles are as follows Table 2 2 Web Interface User Profiles and corresponding rights operator technician administrator service View Topology X X X X View Predefined X X X X Configurations Create Predefined X X X Configur
149. d command has been sent The application is waiting for a reply Get SW versions The bank content identification command has been sent The application is waiting for a reply Get SW versions 2nd attempt The first attempt at reading the software release has failed The application is trying again ViBE EM4000 Release 1 10 155 User Manual 46073586AB02 Chapter 6 Tools Download application Table 6 1 Status messages Download application Status messages Indications OK SW status read Reply to the bank content identification command all the required information is present Setup download The application is checking whether the download is necessary No need to download The download is not necessary as the software release is already in the active or inactive bank Download started for X board s The command for file downloading Please wait has been sent Downloading X The FTP download is complete the file has been transferred to the Encoder and saving has begun in the flash memory Downloading The FTP download is complete the file has been transferred to the Encoder and saving has begun in the flash memory No information is available about the progress of the operation Download successful The file has been transferred to the inactive bank and the identification command has confirmed that the inactive bank contains the appropriate s
150. d via the XMS The ViBE EM4000 Encoder features a built in XMS Interface In a system with XMS 3500 software and an XMU the XMS applications can be used with a ViBE EM4000 MPEG HD Encoder for n p redundancy management Remote Flextream configuration Alarm amp Status monitoring Control Command via SNMP The ViBE EM4000 Encoder features a MIB which can be used via the Ethernet CONTROL amp COMMAND link and SNMP protocol m SNMP V2 c m MIB Il support m Trap management Monitor alarms m Reboot unit m Recall Predefined Configurations m Display Remote Inventory Data Display Last Events NTP Time Synchronization The ViBE EM4000 Encoder features an NTP client to synchronize the real time clock ofthe product with external NTP servers The Encoder can be connected to two different NTP servers for redundancy purposes Control Command via the Encoder front panel This Liquid Crystal Display and its associated keypad can be used to m enter IP parameters address netmask and gateway m display hardware amp software release numbers VIBE EM4000 Release 1 10 183 User Manual 46073586AB02 Appendix A Technical Specifications Features m display current alarms m display internal temperature m recall preset configurations 184 VIBE EM4000 Release 1 10 User Manual 46073586AB02 Options Appendix A Technical Specifications Options Hardware options Additional AC Power Su
151. dance with provisions of 21CFR subchapter J for distribution within the U S A and in accordance with CENELEC HD 482 S1 for distribution within countries using the IEC 825 standard Laser Safety Laser safety in the United States is regulated by the Center for Devices and Radiological Health CDRH The laser safety regulations are published in the Laser Product Performance Standard Code of Federal Regulation CFR Title 21 Subchapter J The International Electrotechnical Commission IEC Standard 825 Radiation of Laser Products Equipment Classification Requirements and User s Guide governs laser products outside the United States Europe and member nations of the European Free Trade Association fall under the jurisdiction of the Comite European de Normalisation Electrotechnique CENELEC For the CDRH The radiant power is detected through a 7 mm aperture at a distance of 200 mm from the source focused through a lens with a focal length of 100 mm For IEC compliance The radiant power is detected through a 7 mm aperture at a distance of 100 mm from the source focused through a lens with a focal length of 100 mm 218 VIBE EM4000 Release 1 10 User Manual 46073586AB02 Appendix C Regulatory Notices Laser Compliance Laser Used in the Equipment The equipment may or does feature a board emitting class 1 invisible laser radiation No standard applies to this device Nevertheless you are strongly
152. dicate whether the encoded Dolby Digital bitstream is copyright protected On or not Off Default value On Original Bitstream Used to indicate whether the encoded Dolby Digital bitstream is the master version or a copy Default value On ViBE EM4000 Release 1 10 93 User Manual 46073586AB02 Chapter 4 Web Browser Interface Settings 94 LFE Channel Filter Surround 3 dB Attenuation Surround Phase Shift Surround EX mode A D Converter Type This parameter enabled in 5 0 or 5 1 mode is used to enable On or disable Off a 120 Hz filter The filter is applied to the LFE channel input of a Dolby Digital encoder prior to encoding It is ignored if the LFE channel is disabled The filter removes frequencies above 120 Hz that would cause aliasing when decoded This filter should only be switched off if the audio to be encoded is known not to have any signals above 120 Hz Default value On This value will not be acknowledged if the Mode parameter is set to 1 0 Mono left 1 0 Mono Right 2 0 Stereo This parameter enabled in 5 0 or 5 1 mode is used to enable On or disable Off a 3 dB attenuation before encoding the Surround channel s Default value Off This parameter enabled in 5 0 or 5 1 mode is used to enable On or disable Off application of a 90 degree phase shift to the Surround channels The Dolby Digital decoder can therefore easily create an Lt Rt downmix Default value
153. ding complexity This explains the need for advanced video processing to m reduce noise in video sequences to encode m slightly reduce definition in the complex areas of the picture The Encoder therefore features 2 types of processing m noise reduction processing m adaptive video filter processing Noise reduction Noise reduction is based on 2 features m a median filter to reduce impulse noise The median filter is a hybrid filter which is used to linearly weight the results of several spatial median non linear filters in different directions m a motion compensated recursive temporal filter to reduce other forms of noise Gaussian noise quantization noise etc The Noise reduction feature can be set by the User ViBE EM4000 Release 1 10 171 User Manual 46073586AB02 Appendix A Technical Specifications Features Adaptive video processing Adaptive video processing is based on 3 filters m a vertical low pass filter with 7 coefficients m a horizontal low pass filter with 7 coefficients m a filter dedicated to low luminance processing Adaptive Filter processing can be set by the User 172 ViBE EM4000 Release 1 10 User Manual 46073586AB02 HD Video processing Appendix A Technical Specifications Features Table A 13 HD Video processing specifications Parameter Description Video encoding Profile H264 MPEG4 AVC MP LA 4 2 0 H264 MPEG4 AVC HP L4 4 2 0 Limited
154. disk To save Encoder settings ViBE EM4000 Release 1 10 111 User Manual 46073586AB02 Chapter 4 Web Browser Interface Maintenance 1 Click Save Settings The following page will be displayed Figure 4 64 Saving a configuration file to the hard drive 1 3 EM CONTROLLER Save Settings Save configuration to disk Click on the link below to save the configuration on your disk 2 Click Active configuration 3 If one of the following windows is displayed click Save Figure 4 65 Saving a configuration file to the hard drive 2 3 File Download E xi File Download Ex Some files can harm your computer If the file information below D nt t this file 2 looks suspicious or you do not fully trust the source do not open or on ger cai ge eet LESC save this file a Name config zip File name config3 zip Type WinZip File 4 52 KB File type WinZip File From 10 12 38 202 From 172 16 13 13 Open Save IV Always ask before opening this type of file Would you like to open the file or save it to your computer While files from the Intemet can be useful some files can potentially oen __ Cancel _Marnie_ harm your computer If you do not trust the source do not open or save this file What s the risk IV Always ask before opening this type of file The following window will be displayed Figure 4 66 Saving a configuration file to the hard drive 3 3 Save in save contigs
155. e prendre note du calibre du fusible lors du remplacement de ce dernier Le fusible auquel il est fait r f rence dans le texte doit tre remplac par un fusible du m me calibre Identifie une borne de protection de mise la masse qui doit tre raccord e correctement avant de proc der au raccordement des autres quipements Identifie une borne de protection de mise la masse qui peut tre connect e en tant que borne de mise la masse suppl mentaire Signale la pr sence de composants sensibles l lectricit statique et qui sont susceptibles d tre endommag s par une d charge lectrostatique Utilisez des proc dures des quipements et des surfaces antistatiques durant les interventions d entretien Qu gt 210 ViBE EM4000 Release 1 10 User Manual 46073586AB02 Appendix B Safety Instructions Avertissements Avertissements Les avertissements suivants signalent des conditions ou des pratiques susceptibles d occasionner des blessures graves voire m me fatales Instructions de s curit relatives l alimentation secteur MISE LA TERRE DE PROTECTION Assurez vous que la mise la terre est correctement effectu e avant de mettre l appareil sous tension La mise la terre de protection se fait au travers du cordon d alimentation Pour viter tout risque de chocs lectriques ou de dommage l quipement ne d connectez jamais la fiche de terre CORDON D ALIMENTATION SECT
156. e kbit s kbit s Dolby Digital AC3 384 192 448 256 Dolby Digital Plus 192 96 E AC3 256 128 ViBE EM4000 Release 1 10 191 User Manual 46073586AB02 Appendix A Technical Specifications Options When auto switch mode is OFF and the Dolby E stream contains 2 0 instead of 5 1 a 5 1 signal is still encoded with front left and right using the Dolby E 2 0 input and the other channel will be silenced Flextream options Local Flextream Ordering reference NEMS4FLEAA This option enables the Flextream feature in a pool of Encoders located on the same site LAN infrastructure and sharing the bandwidth in local statistical multiplexing mode One Local Flextream option must be installed per video channel Remote Flextream Ordering reference NEMS4FLAAA This option enables the Flextream feature in a pool of Encoders located on the same and or different sites WAN infrastructure and sharing the bandwidth in remote statistical multiplexing mode One Remote Flextream option must be installed per video channel 192 VIBE EM4000 Release 1 10 User Manual 46073586AB02 Appendix A Technical Specifications Standard Compliance Standard Compliance Table A 27 Standard compliance Standards Title TV standards SMPTE 259M 2006 SDTV Digital Signal Data Serial Digital Interface SMPTE 274M 2005 1920 x 1080 Image Sample Structure Digital Representation and Digital Timing Reference
157. e User declaration and management creation deletion password rights etc are performed via the Local Console 130 ViBE EM4000 Release 1 10 User Manual 46073586AB02 Chapter 5 Servicing Operations performed using the Local Console User rights are defined according to four preset profiles Operator Technician Administrator Service The rights corresponding to the profiles are as follows Table 5 2 Web Interface User Profiles and corresponding rights operator technician administrator service View Topology X X X X View Predefined X X X X Configurations Create Predefined X X X Configurations Recall Predefined X X X Configurations View Encoder X X X X Configuration Edit Encoder X X X Configuration View Alarms X Reboot Device Create User The following Users are defined on device shipment Table 5 3 Users defined on device shipment User name Password Profile admin admin administrator service service service technician technician technician operator operator operator user user operator guest guest guest operator It is possible to edit the characteristics of these Users and a maximum of 64 Users can be defined ViBE EM4000 Release 1 10 131 User Manual 46073586AB02 Chapter 5 Servicing Operations performed using the Local Console 132 Adding a User usradd To add a User type usradd after the ViBE prompt Fi
158. e Info screen is used to access the Main Board or Encoding Board s information sub menu To display this screen go to the Main menu screen select Info using the and gt keys and press OK Figure 3 20 Info screen Te lt MAIN gt TEMPER ENC 1 2 ENC 2 2 Main Board Information screen The Main Board Information screen is used to get Main Board information To display this screen go to the Info screen select MAIN using the and gt keys and press OK m The following information will be displayed Figure 3 21 Main Board Info screen MAIN BOARD INFO Active SW EM4000 XX XXXX HW Version NEM40IN2 EOCODE XXXX S N sn XXXXXXXX Active SW Used to indicate the Main board active Software release number HW Version Used to indicate the Main board Hardware release number EOCODE Used to indicate the Main board equipment code The equipment code is used to order a software option S N Used to indicate the Main board serial number ViBE EM4000 Release 1 10 49 User Manual 46073586AB02 Chapter 3 Front Panel Operation Screen Description Temperature Information screen The Temperature Information screen is used to display the Ambient Temperature To display this screen go to the Info screen select TEMPER using the and gt keys and press OK m The following information will be displayed Figure 3 22 Temperature Info screen TEMPER BOARD INFO T Ambient XX C YY F T Am
159. e faulty equipment must be packed where possible in its original packaging protective corners and boxes If you no longer have the packaging the faulty equipment must be protected against shocks during transportation The Customer Service Department examines packaging on arrival and can refuse to carry out repairs if the packaging has been visibly damaged during transportation and this has led to further damage in addition to the fault originally noted Transportation costs and risks for equipment returns are borne by the customer Equipment should only be returned with a Return Material Authorization form WARRANTY COMPLIANCE Observe the following rules m Only pluggable board replacement by a qualified personel is allowed In all other cases replace the equipment with a spare m Never remove the cover of the equipment ViBE EM4000 Release 1 10 205 User Manual 46073586AB02 Appendix B Safety Instructions Sicherheit Begriffe Hinweise und Warnzeichen Sicherheit berblick Deutsch Sicherheit Begriffe Hinweise und Warnzeichen Am Produkt angebrachte Hinweise Folgende Hinweise k nnen sich am Produkt befinden GEFAHR Dieser Warnhinweis verweist auf eine unmittelbare Verletzungsgefahr VORSICHT Dieser Warnhinweis verweist auf ein bestehendes Risiko f r das Ger t Produkt oder Betriebsmittel Am Produkt angebrachte Warnzeichen Folgende Warnzeichen k nnen sich am Produkt befinden Wa
160. e is displayed ViBE EM4000 Release 1 10 97 User Manual 46073586AB02 Chapter 4 Web Browser Interface Settings 98 Figure 4 41 Expert parameters page Off In the Video group box Declared Expert parameters Video I Psycho Visual Enhancement Off M IDR Insertion Insert PCR on RAI I PES per Field m DTV SEI m Param A6 mM Param A7 7 Param A8 mM Param A9 mM Param A10 m Param A11 I Param A12 I Param A13 mM Param A14 m Param A15 mM Param A16 F HRRRRR RRR con Off Audio MM MPEG2 SIG ON MAC3 stream type F No Audio CRC I Param B4 MT Param BS 7 Param B6 Param B7 7 Param B8 7 Param B9 MT Param B10 Param B11 7 Param B12 7 Param B13 m Param B14 MT Param B15 7 Param B16 VBI mM Param C1 MT Param C2 7 Param C3 7 Param C4 r Param CS m Param C6 Param C7 Param C8 BERERHRRRAA Other mM Param D1 I Param D2 MT Param D3 I Param D4 7 Param DS I Param D6 m Param D7 m Param D8 The checked Expert parameters are enabled Expert parameters are disabled Psycho Visual Enhancement Off Psycho Visual Enhancement is off This parameter must only be ticked for objective measures IDR Insertion Insert PCR on RAI PES per Field DTV SEI In the Audio group box MPEG2 SIG ON l pictures are replaced by IDR Instantaneous Decoder Refresh pictures In this mode Closed GOP is set to ON IDR mode is only recommended in the event of interoperabi
161. ect a different folder click Browse C Download_XM _ 04 50 00 Browse Atleast 5 1 MB of free disk space is required About lt Back Cancel 4 Select the destination directory for the files of the Download application and click Next The following window will be displayed ViBE EM4000 Release 1 10 145 User Manual 46073586AB02 Chapter 6 Tools Download application Figure 6 3 Installation Download application 3 4 iG XMS3500DownloadSetup iol x Data import from a previous version c xms J Import data Select the installation folder of the previous version of AMUAV iBe SD ViBE HD NetProcessor Video Adapter Download application MK Browse lt Back Cancel 5 Click Next The Download application is installed On installation completion the following window will be displayed Figure 6 4 Installation Download application 4 4 iG XMS3500DownloadSetup Hio XMU ViBe SD YiBE HD NetProcessor Video Adapter installation finished Setup has finished installing XMU ViBe SD ViBE HD NetProcessor Video Adapter on your computer The application may be launched by selecting the installed icons x Click Finish to esit ms 6 Click Finish Running the application To run the Download application 1 Open the Download application folder 146 ViBE EM4000 Release 1 10 User Manual 46073586AB02 Chapter 6 Tools Download application
162. el in relation to the normal sound for the fade values Figure A 3 Principle ofthe fade command during the verbal description Description Normal sound after fade Normal sound before fade 10 dB 1248 C ee ae fade 178 ViBE EM4000 Release 1 10 User Manual 46073586AB02 Appendix A Technical Specifications Features Figure A 4 Principle of the pan command F pan 0x00 7 CENTRE y oe u is front re ron RIGHT f N va f Ne YK ye rear LEFT X Oean RIGHT 0xB2 0x4E Figure A 5 Audio Description processing in the ViBE EM4000 Main audio Stereo Audio Audio Description Figure A 6 Audio Description processing in a Decoder user control of description volume decoded audio description mono decoded main programme stereo user control of fade overall volume When the Audio Description feature is enabled and no audio signal is detected for the description the Encoder can either send silence or automatically replace encoded silence audio packets with null packets which can be removed from the component by an external device to recover bandwidth The component remains signaled in the PMT Dolby E decoding This feature is a software option Refer to section Dolby E decoding on page 190 ViBE EM4000 Release 1 10 179 User Manual 46073586AB02 Appendix A Technical Specifications Features 180 Audio oth
163. en en uns 43 Main Menu screen aceeen nn 43 Alarms screen nunnssnssnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn aaa aaa nn Sinaine 44 Setup SOHC GNM ee 45 IP Settings sereen cic icccescsuesncnienacecdcceasceesecnswarsicanecedeecasuecesedaie 45 Recall screen an errant 46 Reboot screen sisi 48 LCD CAL screen 48 IMMO SC FORME nu mans 49 Main Board Information screen 49 Temperature Information screen unsserssnnnennnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn 50 Encoding Board Information screen 50 Chapter 4 Web Browser Interface 51 Encoder Web Interface Specifications uuuuuuuu4mn nenn 52 Protocol Used N EaR Ea 52 Compatible Web Browsers 52 Web Browser setting 52 6 ViBE EM4000 Release 1 10 User Manual 46073586AB02 Contents Maximum number of connected Users 53 Definition of Encoder Users ceccsssseeceeeeesssssseeeeeeeeeeessnaaaeees 54 Reaching the Ol 55 Setting up the link between the PC and the Encoder 55 Quick Configuration 56 Screen Layout ass E a 57 General informalion nas ae 57 Status Summary page euren tea te ttes eee euer 58 Status ofthe deviee cn a 60 Summary COMMENT nent 60 Alarms command 60 HW SW information command 61 SEHINGS a een ee 63 Setting the VIBE EM4000 Encoder nuusssssnsnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnen nn 63 Configuring the number of TSs at Encoder out
164. encoding standard and mode 5 0 or 5 1 and Output Standard Dolby Digital AC3 or Dolby Digital Plus E AC3 and Auto Switch mode is checked then 2 bitrate groups are proposed In each group the 1st value indicates the encoding bitrate used with a Dolby E stream at input If the Dolby E stream is replaced by a PCM 2 0 stream then the 2nd value will be used for encoding See Auto Switch Mode parameter above When Input Format Dolby E Output mode When Standard xx Transport the Rate is the max bitrate If the transported stream has a higher bitrate an alarm is raised AD Output Stream In Audio Description encoding mode Adaptive No AD packet on output when no AD input Always AD packets on output even when no AD input null packets are generated Click AAC to display the AAC audio component parameters Figure 4 33 Editing an audio component AAC page Audio Configuration AUD1 General AAC Misc Syntax MPEG 2 z Packet ADTS hd mai LH Fraunhofer ME MPEG 4 HE AAC audio coding technology licensed by Fraunhofer IIS submit reset This page is used to set audio component AAC parameters when AAC LC HE AAC or HE AAC v2 has been chosen as the audio Output Standard on the General page Syntax Used to set the syntax of AAC encoding Choice between MPEG 2 and MPEG 4 Packet Used to set the type of AAC encapsulation Choice between ADTS Audio Data Transport Stream and LOAS Low Overhead
165. eneral service parameters Name Used to indicate the name of the service displayed by the Decoder Type Used to indicate service type TV Mosaic NVOD reference NVOD item or Other The standardized numerical value corresponding to the service type is displayed in the right hand box If the desired service type is not available select Other and enter the value in the right hand box Provider Used to indicate the name of the service provider displayed by the Decoder Service Id Used to indicate the service identifier PID PMT Used to indicate the PID of TS packets in which the PMT describing the service will be inserted Services may use PMT PIDs specific to each service or a PMT PID common to all services PID PCR Used to indicate the PID of the component in which the PCR is sent The PCR is transported by the Video component Running Status Used to select several broadcasting types Not Running Starts in few seconds Pausing or Running This parameter can be used to insert or not insert the service and its components in the outgoing TS It affects the SDT field indicating service status 74 ViBE EM4000 Release 1 10 User Manual 46073586AB02 Chapter 4 Web Browser Interface Settings Editing an HD video component Click add a component to select the shortcut menu and click Add Video HD or the video component The following page will be displayed Figure 4 26 Editing an HD video component General
166. er t ausreichend bel ften Um einer berhitzung des Ger ts vorzubeugen ist f r eine angemessene Bel ftung gem den Anweisungen in Abschnitt Installation des Benutzerhandbuchs zu sorgen Leere Ger teeinsch be sind mit Leerblenden zu verschlie en Ger t nicht bei St rung betreiben Wird ein Ger teschaden oder eine St rung vermutet ist das Ger t von qualifizierten Servicetechnikern zu berpr fen Trennung vom Stromnetz sicherstellen Verf gt das Ger t ber keine n Netzschalter ist das Ger t durch Ziehen des der Netzkabel vom Stromnetz zu trennen Die Steckdose n ist sind leicht zug nglich in unmittelbarer N he des Ger ts anzubringen Kabel richtig verlegen Netzkabel und sonstige Kabel sind so zu verlegen dass sie nicht besch digt werden k nnen Schwere Kabelb ndel sind ordnungsgem abzust tzen um Sch den an den Steckverbindungen vorzubeugen Originalverpackung aufbewahren Ist das Ger t besch digt und an den Kundendienst zur ckzuschicken sollte zum sicheren Transport m glichst die Orginalverpackung mit Eckenschutz und Schutzh llen verwendet werden oder das Ger t zumindest sto sicher verpackt werden Bei der Annahme des Ger tes untersucht der Kundendienst die Verpackung auf eventuelle Transportsch den und kann die Reparatur ablehnen sollte die Verpackung w hrend des Tranports besch digt worden sein und dies zus tzliche Sch den am Ger t verursacht haben Die mit der R ckgabe
167. er features Audio silence alarms A Detected Silence alarm indicates that the input audio signal value is below 65 dBFS The delay for raising the Detected Silence alarm can be configured from 2 s to 60 s in 2 s increments Audio saturation alarms When the input format is PCM the audio level is monitored for each mono channel and the saturation alarm is raised ifthe Audio level of one channel reaches OdBFS for at least 2 successive audio samples The saturation alarms can be disabled by the User Additional audio delay In order to compensate a delay on the video or audio path upstream of the encoder it is possible to delay the audio with a positive or negative offset The delay can be set by the User from 500 ms to 500 ms in 1 ms steps VBI Processing Time Code VITC The Encoder can extract VITC defined as per SMPTE RP188 1999 from the HD SDI input signal according to SMPTE 334M 2002 The Encoder automatically detects which line the Time Code is on The extracted VITC is then included in the encoded video component as a picture timing SEI message Closed Caption Closed caption according to EIA 708 and embedded in the HD SDI input stream according to SMPTE 334M 2002 can be extracted and embedded in the encoded video stream as a picture timing SEI message proprietary specifications PVR descriptor The Encoder supports encoding of data fields in the private data bytes of the adaptation field according to ref
168. erence AU information ETSI 101 154 If this feature is incompatible with some decoders it can be set to Off via the Management System VIBE EM4000 Release 1 10 User Manual 46073586AB02 Appendix A Technical Specifications Features Active Format Description AFD The HD receiver requires an AFD in order to correctly format the HD widescreen broadcasts for an SD 4 3 display connected to the receiver via SCART The value is inserted in a specific SEI message List and values of AFD codes 8 as coded frame 9 4 3 active picture 10 16 9 active picture 11 14 9 active picture 13 4 3 coded image with a shoot and protect 14 9 center 14 16 9 coded image with a shoot and protect 14 9 center 15 16 9 coded image with a shoot and protect 4 3 center 3 AFD transmission modes are available Off AFD value is not sent On with reversion data If the AFD value is not available on the Encoder input an AFD reversion data value is sent On with static data An AFD reversion data value is always sent HD Teletext The Encoder supports WST extraction from HD SDI and insertion in only one VBI component 1 The Encoder supports WST extraction from HD SDI according to Free TV Australia Operational Practice OP 47 Storage and Distribution of Teletext Subtitles and VBI Data for High Definition Television There is no filtering of the teletext according to the line all teletext data received on 143h 102h DID SDID i
169. ereo 2 0 component MPEG 1 Layer Il audio encoding This feature is a software option Refer to section VIPEG 1 Layer Il audio encoding on page 185 Dolby Digital AC3 Dolby Digital Plus E AC3 2 0 encoding This feature is a software option Refer to section Dolby Digital AC3 Dolby Digital Plus E AC3 2 0 encoding on page 186 Dolby Digital AC3 Dolby Digital Plus E AC3 5 1 encoding This feature is a software option Refer to section Dolby Digital AC3 Dolby Digital Plus E AC3 5 1 encoding on page 187 AAC LC HE AAC 2 0 encoding This feature is a software option Refer to section Dolby E decoding on page 190 AAC LC HE AAC 5 1 encoding This feature is a software option Refer to section AAC LC HE AAC 5 1 encoding on page 189 Dolby Digital AC3 Dolby Digital Plus E AC3 Transport external encoding Transmission format Annex of Digital Audio Compression Standard AC3 ATSC Advanced Television Systems Committee A52 Dolby Digital AC3 Dolby Digital Plus E AC3 transport mode is used to send audio samples synchronous with the video without compression or changes In this mode the device that generates the audio signal must be synchronized with the Encoder s video clock The audio samples are VIBE EM4000 Release 1 10 177 User Manual 46073586AB02 Appendix A Technical Specifications Features synchronous with the video and are sent unchanged
170. erface A type of user interface that allows users to interact with electronic devices with images rather than text commands A GUI represents the information and actions available to a user through graphical icons and visual indicators such as secondary notation as opposed to text based interfaces typed command labels or text navigation ITU ETSI name for MPEG 4 Part 10 ISO IEC 14496 10 VIBE EM4000 Release 1 10 User Manual 46073586AB02 Glossary HANC Horizontal Ancillary Ancillary packets located in the horizontal blanking interval of the video signal HD High Definition HD SDI High Definition Serial Digital Interface HDTV High Definition Television HE AAC High Efficiency Advanced Audio Encoding A lossy data compression scheme for digital audio defined as a MPEG 4 Audio profile in ISO IEC 14496 3 There are two types of HE AAC HE AAC AAC AAC LC SBR Spectral Band Reconstitution HE AACv2 eAAC AAC LC SBR PS Parametric Stereo HSYNC Horizontal line Sync HTML Hyper Text Markup Language HTML is the predominant markup language for web pages That is the basic building blocks of web pages HTTP Hyper Text Transfer Protocol I Frame Intracoded Frame A frame which is coded using purely intracoding with reference to no other field or frame information frames provide a reference point for dependent P and B frames and allow random access into the compressed video stream I Picture Refe
171. ermeidung von Verletzungen und Brandgefahr darf das Ger t nicht in explosionsgef hrdeten Umgebungen betrieben werden Atmosph re und Stoffe GER TEBETRIEB IN TROCKENER UMGEBUNG Zur Vermeidung von Stromschlaggefahr darf das Ger t nicht in feuchter oder dunstiger Umgebung betrieben werden AUSWECHSELN DES RAM SPEICHERS MIT EINGEBAUTER LITHIUMBATTERIE Einige Ger te besitzen einen nicht fl chtigen RAM Speicher mit Lithiumbatterie der i d R niemals ausgewechselt werden muss Sollte der RAM Speicher dieses Ger ts doch einmal ausgewechselt werden m ssen sind folgende Anweisungen zu beachten m Der RAM Speicher ist durch qualifiziertes Personal auszuwechseln m Denselben oder einen gleichwertigen RAM Speicher verwenden m Auf die richtige Positionierung des neuen Speichers achten m Alte Speicher gem den Anweisungen des Herstellers entsorgen Bei nicht ordnungsgem installietem Speicher besteht A Explosionsgefahr 208 VIBE EM4000 Release 1 10 User Manual 46073586AB02 Appendix B Safety Instructions Vorsichtshinweise Vorsichtshinweise Folgende Vorsichtshinweise verweisen auf Situationen und Handlungen die zu Sch den an den Ger ten oder sonstigen Betriebsmitteln f hren k nnen Angemessene Stromquelle verwenden Das Ger t darf nicht an eine Stromquelle angeschlossen werden die eine Spannung liefert die au erhalb des f r das Produkt zul ssigen Nennspannungsbereichs liegt G
172. ers and appendixes m Chapter 1 Overview gives a general description of the equipment and its main features It also identifies the controls indicators and connectors on the front and rear panels ViBE EM4000 Release 1 10 1 User Manual 46073586AB02 Preface Conventions Used in This Manual Chapter 2 Installation and setup provides the procedures required for device installation and initial configuration and describes how to connect the device to other devices in your system Chapter 3 Front Panel Operation describes how to use the Front Panel of the equipment m Chapter 4 Web Browser Interface describes how to use the Web Browser Graphical User Interface to configure the equipment m Chapter 5 Servicing describes how to install software options via the Command Line Interface and gives recommendations for cleaning the air inlet grille Chapter 6 Tools describes the tool s which can be used with the product In this release the Download Application is described Appendix A Technical Specifications gives specifications of the device Device compliance Declarations of Conformity and an Ordering guide for ordering the device and its options m Appendix B Safety Instructions gives instructions related to risk of fire electric shock or injury to persons m Appendix C Regulatory Notices provides device compliances regarding FCC emission control Canadian EMC compli
173. est EN 61000 4 4 Electrical Fast Transient Burst Immunity Test EN 61000 4 5 Surge Immunity Test EN 61000 4 6 Immunity to Conducted Disturbances Induced Radio Frequency Fields EN 61000 4 8 Power Frequency Magnetic Field Immunity Test EN 61000 4 11 Voltage Dips Short Interruptions and Voltage Variations Immunity Tests US FCC CFR 47 part 15 Federal Communication Commission part 15 USA Radio Frequency devices ViBE EM4000 Release 1 10 User Manual 46073586AB02 Appendix A Technical Specifications Certifications and environmental specifications Table A 28 Certifications and environmental specifications Category Standard Designed tested for compliance with EM AS NZS 3548 continuation C Tick Electromagnetic compatibility Australia amp New Zealand Information technology equipment modems fax machines BPL modem ICES 003 Ed4 Digital Apparatus Canada EMF Council Recommendation on the limitation of exposure of the recommendation general public to electromagnetic fields 1999 519 EC EN 62311 2008 Assessment of electronics and electrical equipment related to human exposure restrictions for electromagnetic fields CE labeling 93 68 EEC European Directive 22 07 93 Environment ETS 300 019 1 3 Classification of environmental conditions Stationary use at testing weather protected locations ETS 300 019 1 2 e Environmental class 3 1 and 3 1E e Opera
174. ettings 111 Saving Encoder settings to a disk 111 Loading Encoder settings from a disk 112 Chapter 5 Servicing sense ensure sen eure Innerer 115 Operations performed using the Local Console s nn 116 ViBE EM4000 Release 1 10 7 User Manual 46073586AB02 Contents INTFOAUCLION VORSPPERFPLERTTPFRSTHERFPFLEFTFETTRTFELES ELF aeaa anse tt 116 Accessing the Local Console application 116 IP parameter values on Encoder shipment sesse 116 SSH client application setting ussssssseennnnnnennnnnn nennen 116 Accessing the Local Console nn 117 List of Local Console commands cccccceeeseeeeteeeeeeeeesseeeaees 117 Overview of commands 118 Description of basic parameters cccceceeeettteeeeeeeeeeeee 120 Commands relating to IP parameters sessen 120 Displaying IP parameters ipdisp 444 gt 120 Editing IP parameters ipset uruuusssnnnnnnennnnnnnnnnnnn 121 Commands relating to the date and time 121 Displaying the current date and time ddate 121 Editing the date and time sdate 122 Commands relating to NTP configuration 122 Displaying NTP server status and IP address dntp 122 Editing NTP server status and IP address sntp 122 Commands relating to chassis topology 123 Displaying chassis topology read sses 123 Displaying status RID and Part Number shelf 123 Managing
175. everity minor Wording English Degraded signal Wording French Signal d grad Diagnosis English Input signal is degraded or fluctating Diagnosis French Lorsque cet v nement se produit le champ Probl me sp cifique indique un code interne utilis pour d terminer la cause de la d gradation du signal Action English Check input signal and cable s May be due to unexpected switch behaviour Action French V rifier le s c ble s et le signal d entr e Peut tre d une commutation intempestive du signal Automatic redundancy Current autobackup Selectable Upstream autobackup Selectable The following device s can raise this probable cause Net Processor 9030 Barco Quasar without RF converter Barco Agile Quasar VHF Barco Quasar MKII without RF converter Barco Agile Quasar MKII VHF Barco Agile Quasar MKII Full Band ViBE EM3000 MPEG4 EM4000 Quad Channel EM4000 Octal Channel MSU 4422 Tandberg TT5032 Mediaguard Tandberg TT5034 Viaccess Net Processor 9040 Barco Channelized Quasar Barco Agile Quasar UHF Barco Channelized Quasar MKII Barco Agile Quasar MKII UHF Net Feeder 9010 EM4000 Dual Channel EM4000 Hexa Channel N8000 Tandberg TT5031 Conax Tandberg TT5033 Nagravision VIBE Alarm Help X733 syntax 9 60 ViBE Encoder ViBE Decoder ViBE Front End PDH SD Encoder MTEP syntax alarms matching this probable cause english 110 Degraded signal 120
176. french 46 Equipement en phase de boot 140 Debut d initialisation Page 63 Alarm Help X733 syntax 9 60 Probable Cause 17 receiveFailure Category Communications Default severity major Wording English Receive failure Wording French Echec de r ception Diagnosis English In Flextream context The encoder cannot communicate with the allocator via the HDLC bus In Remote Flextream context For encoder no bitrate order from remote allocator received For allocator complexity not received Diagnosis French Dans le contexte Flextream Le codeur ne peut pas communiquer avec l allocateur via le bus HDLC Dans le contexte Remote Flextream Pour l encodeur pas de consigne d application de d bit re ue de l allocateur Pour l allocateur complexit non re ue Action English In Flextream context Check the HDLC link Check the status of the allocator If the alarm registers again contact Customer Service for analysis and repair In Remote Flextream context Check ethernet connections and encoders configuration Action French Dans le contexte Flextream V rifier la liaison HDLC et le statut de l allocateur Si l erreur persiste contacter le Service Clients pour analyse et r paration Dans le contexte Remote Flextream V rifier les connexions ethernet et la configuration des codeurs Page 64 Alarm Help X733 syntax 9 60 Automatic redundancy Current autobackup Impossi
177. g device s can raise this probable cause ViBE EM3000 MPEG4 EM4000 Dual Channel EM4000 Quad Channel EM4000 Hexa Channel EM4000 Octal Channel ViBE MTEP syntax alarms matching this probable cause english 94 Backplane failure MTEP syntax alarms matching this probable cause french 94 D faillance du fond de panier Page 2 Alarm Help X733 syntax 9 60 Probable Cause 1231 bad bitrate Category Quality of service Default severity warning Wording English Bad bitrate Wording French Mauvais debit Diagnosis English Input bitrate does not match with expected one or bitrate violation Diagnosis French Le d bit d entr e ne correspond pas au d bit attendu Action English Check receive signal bitrate Action French V rifier la configuration audio de l quipement et la configuration du codeur AC3 externe Automatic redundancy Current autobackup Impossible Upstream autobackup Selectable The following device s can raise this probable cause Net Processor 9030 Net Processor 9040 Net Feeder 9010 ViBE EM3000 MPEG4 EM4000 Dual Channel EM4000 Quad Channel EM4000 Hexa Channel EM4000 Octal Channel RD 2000 RD 5000 SD RD 5002 SD RD 1000 RD 1002 Jade ViBE ViBE Encoder RD 5000 HD SD RD 3000 SD Encoder MTEP syntax alarms matching this probable cause english 104 Bad bitrate 110 Bad bitrate Page 3 Alarm Help X733 syntax 9 60 136 Tributary rate out of band 1
178. ged if kept in that state Diagnosis French La temp rature interne exc de la limite maximum L quipement risque d tre d finitivement endommag si son tat n est pas modifi Action English Check if the ventilation is running if air inlet and outlet are not obstructed and ambiant external temperature is below 40 C Action French S assurer que la ventilation fonctionne que les entr es et sorties d air ne sont pas obstru es et que la temp rature ambiante externe est inf rieure 40 C Autre action possible r initialiser l quipement et attendre que la temp rature se stabilise pendant 25 minutes Si l alarme se produit de nouveau mettre hors tension le chassis contenant l quipement concern et contacter le Customer Service Automatic redundancy Current autobackup Impossible Upstream autobackup Selectable The following device s can raise this probable cause DBE 2100 1 external video 4 audios DBE 2110 1 internal video 4 audios DBE 2120 8 audios DBE 2120 12 audios DBE 2110 1 internal video 8 audios DBE 2120 4 audios DBE 4110 DSNG DBE 4120 Contribution DBE 4130 Broadcast SSEB DSS MSE DBE 4140 Local insertion Amber Page 28 Alarm Help X733 syntax 9 60 DBX 2200 12 TS inputs Barco Channelized Quasar Barco Agile Quasar UHF Barco Channelized Quasar MKII Barco Agile Quasar MKII UHF Vecima VistaLynx QAM Amethyst III ASI ViBE EM3000 MPEG4 EM4000 Quad Channel EM4000 Octal
179. gram Guide Provides users of television radio and other media applications with continuously updated menus displaying scheduling information for current and upcoming programming Elementary Stream A generic term for a stream of data of one particular type Typically these streams are of Video or Audio Types The most widely used local area network LAN defined by the IEEE as the 802 3 standard The European Television Standards Institute s ETSI specification for World Standard Teletext WST 237 Glossary ETSI EN 300 775 ETT FCC FEC Field Fps FTP Frame GOP GPI GUI H 264 238 The European Telecommunications Standards Institute ETSI specification for the Carriage of Vertical Blanking Information Data in DVB bitstreams VBI data is carried in MPEG 2 packetized elementary stream PES packets as private stream 1 which in turn is carried in MPEG2 transport packets The packet identifier PID of a VBI data stream associated with a service is identified in the program map table PMT of the program specific information PSI for that service A VBI PES packet contains data for only one video frame and always carries a PTS A Data_unit_ID identifies the type of data as EBU teletext non subtitle data EBU teletext subtitle data video program system VPS or widescreen signaling WSS Data encoded in the data fields are supposed to be transcoded into the VBI of 625 line video but may be interpreted direct
180. gt P gt Fr My Recent Documents CD config 6feb08 zip Desktop My Documents 4 Select the destination directory for the file on the hard drive and enter the file name 5 Click Save The file is saved on the hard drive Loading Encoder settings from a disk The Load settings command is used to load a settings file from a hard drive and to immediately apply it to the Encoder This file may have been created using the Save settings command described above or the 112 ViBE EM4000 Release 1 10 User Manual 46073586AB02 Chapter 4 Web Browser Interface Maintenance command in the Presets menu provided that the generated file is of chassis type To load Encoder settings 1 Click Load Settings The following page will be displayed Figure 4 67 Loading a configuration file from the hard drive 1 2 EM CONTROLLER Load Settings Load configuration from disk Type the complete path name of the file you want to upload or click the browse button to select a file Load from file File Browse submit 2 Enter the path to the configuration file in the File box or set the path by clicking Browse 3 Confirm the operation by clicking submit The following page will be displayed Figure 4 68 Loading a configuration file from the hard drive 2 2 Upload configuration The configuration has been successfully uploaded If the recalled file is not of ch
181. guration eeeesenennsennnnnnnnnnnn 104 Screen layout ueeerunnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn 57 BEIGE Lo LEP RP RENES noa E osei 74 Signalling Mode zurerssnonerenonnnnnnonennnnenenonn 68 Software licences ccccecceeeeeeeeseeeseeeseeees 129 SOWIE LT 75 Source L R Audio annnneesnnnuennnnnannnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn 87 Source Ls Rs Audio nassen 87 Source Audio censaaaaannnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn anna 85 87 Specifications Electrical ausser 160 Mechanical cccccsssseeeeeessseeeeeenes 161 Speed IP interface s sccesscecsssscessseeeesees 65 Standard Compliance uuenenensnennnnnnnnnnnn 193 Standard Audio sr 88 Standard Video w ccccccccccccssssssssssssssssssssseeeeees 75 Station Identification scceccccccsccssisssasssvsccccrcens 68 STE LU D SE D 76 Status Udinese 88 Status VBI vss sociis tivasscesaavesdccadeeiessectieadesiteans 96 Stored configuration recalling 105 Surround 3 dB Attenuation Dolby Audio 94 Surround Ex Mode Dolby Audio 94 Surround Phase Shift Dolby Audio 94 Syntax AAC Audio zeeesassnenasnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn 89 T Jag 8 20164 61 SR eet eee error eee 97 Time Code Video VBI nus 79 Time To Leave byte TTL IP Transmission 70 251 Appendix TOS DiffServe byte IP Transmission 70 TEBIralE a 68 TSDT repetition rate enessnsnnnnnennnennennnnnenn 68 TX Encapsulation IP Transmission 70 WSS os dace bce es T O
182. guration page for the the number of TSs Figure 4 11 Configuration menu ViBE EM4000 NEM40IN2AA Configuration menu Status mn Presets BE EM ENCODER 1 ViBE EM4000 NEMI40IN2AA 2 Basic encoders ViBE EM4000 NEMI40IN4AA 4 Basic encoders EM ENCODER 2 Configure Device User admin administrator 1 gt Logou Eth1 Out EM CONTROLLER EM ENCODER 1 Eth2 Out This command is used to configure the number of TSs at Encoder output Figure 4 12 Device configuration SPTS MPTS mode page Device Configuration SPTS MPTS Mode Logo Custom Pattern Font FTP Server 1 MPTS channel 1 MPTS shelf Warning The configuration is lost when this parameter is changed submit reset The configurations of the Basic encoders are lost when the mode is modified 1 MPTS channel Generated TS 1 TS at the output of each Basic encoder 1 MPTS shelf Generated TS 1 TS at the Encoder output ViBE EM4000 Release 1 10 63 User Manual 46073586AB02 Chapter 4 Web Browser Interface Settings Configuring LAN WAN network interfaces LAN WAN network interface Eth1 On the Configuration menu click Eth1 Out to display the LAN WAN Eth1 configuration page Figure 4 13 Configuration menu Configuration menu Status u Presets BE EM ENCODER 1 ViBE EM4000 NEMI40IN2AA 2 Basic encoders ViBE EM4000 NEMI40IN4AA 4 Basic encoders EM ENCODER 2 Configure Device
183. gure 5 25 Adding a Web Interface User usradd command DIX ViBE gt usradd af Add user DAME sonen ssossesrse techi password is confirm password administrator service technician operator profile susanne technician add techi as technician Done ViBE gt ff Enter the following fields m name User name m password password for accessing the Web Interface m confirm password re enter the password for accessing the Web Interface m profile enter the User profile The available profiles are given just above this field The following information will be displayed m add xxxxxx as yyyyyyy User xxxxxx with the profile yyyyyyy has been successfully added If the operation is not successful the reason for failure will be displayed Deleting a User usrdel To delete a User type usrdel after the ViBE prompt Figure 5 26 Deleting a Web Interface User usrdel command iolx ViBE gt usrdel Al Remove user NAME scssossosseouee techi remove techi Done ViBE gt J Enter the following fields m name name of User to be deleted The following information will be displayed remove xxxxx User xxxxx has been successfully deleted If the operation is not successful the reason for failure will be displayed VIBE EM4000 Release 1 10 User Manual 46073586AB02 Chapter 5 Servicing Operations performed using the Local Console Displaying the list of Users
184. he total number of predefined configurations 46 ViBE EM4000 Release 1 10 User Manual 46073586AB02 Chapter 3 Front Panel Operation Screen Description 22H00 ZZ Used to indicate the ID of the configuration EQU or ENC Used to indicate the type of configuration EQU chassis ENC Basic encoder Name of the configuration as set on creation m Procedure for recalling a configuration Selectthe configuration to be recalled on the Recall screen using the W or keys Confirm your choice by pressing OK If the recalled configuration is a Basic encoder type configuration the following screen will be displayed Figure 3 14 Recall Basic encoder type configuration screen RECALL Preset ZZ Select Target Id 1 Use Up Down then OK Select the Basic encoder ENCx to be configured using the W or M keys Confirm your choice by pressing OK Regardless of the type of recalled configuration the Confirm screen will be displayed Figure 3 15 Recall Confirm screen RECALL Preset ZZ Do you Confirm Recall No ESC Yes OK Press OK to enable the recall or ESC HOME to exit this screen At the end of the operation and if the recall was successful the following screen will be displayed Figure 3 16 Recall recall successful screen RECALL Preset ZZ Recall Done Press OK An error message will be displayed in the event of failure ViBE EM4000 Release 1 10 47 User Manu
185. his probable cause Net Processor 9030 Barco Quasar without RF converter Barco Agile Quasar VHF Barco Quasar MKII without RF converter Barco Agile Quasar MKII VHF Barco Agile Quasar MKII Full Band Net Feeder 9010 EM4000 Dual Channel EM4000 Hexa Channel MSU 4422 ViBE Mosaic Generator ASI VS7000 v1 x Net Processor 9040 Barco Channelized Quasar Barco Agile Quasar UHF Barco Channelized Quasar MKII Barco Agile Quasar MKII UHF Vecima VistaLynx QAM ViBE EM3000 MPEG4 EM4000 Quad Channel EM4000 Octal Channel ViBE ViBE Mosaic Generator IP CP6000 Alarm Help X733 syntax 9 60 MTEP syntax alarms matching this probable cause english 94 Replaceable unit missing 137 No channel filter 144 No input board MTEP syntax alarms matching this probable cause french 94 Unit de remplacement manquante 137 Pas de channel filter 144 Pas de carte d entr e Page 67 Alarm Help X733 syntax 9 60 Probable Cause 69 replaceableUnitProblem Category Equipment Default severity major Wording English Replaceable unit problem Wording French Probl me d unit amovible Diagnosis English The board has been configured as inhibited It is declared as a spare inactive board Note this is an informational state Diagnosis French TBD Action English If this state is not willed check configuration Action French TBD Automatic redundancy Current autobackup Impossible Upstream
186. iBE EM4000 Release 1 10 User Manual 46073586AB02 Chapter 1 Overview Introduction This chapter gives a general description of the equipment and its main features It also identifies the controls indicators and connectors on the front and rear panels In this Chapter Product Denen na page 8 Product Description een aai page 13 ViBE EM4000 Release 1 10 7 User Manual 46073586AB02 Chapter 1 Overview Product Overview Product Overview Purpose The ViBE EM4000 MPEG HD Encoder is a High Definition Video Compression Encoder that provides real time implementation of the MPEG 4 AVC H 264 compression algorithm for High Definition content format The ViBE EM4000 provides video encoding of up to 4 video channels in MP LA and HP L4 formats at 2 to 20 Mbit s The ViBE EM4000 MPEG Encoder features up to 4 HD SDI inputs for up to 4HD video and embedded audio The compressed signals are available on 2 Giga Ethernet interfaces Figure 1 1 ViBE EM4000 in a Workflow EM4000 Multi channel HD Encoder H e me NetProcessor 9030 amp HD gt 1 Es Multiplexer TEE Ee X A m SD rt CS rss gt 3 OS J Ba ra see mame ze aE 4 Main Features Some features are optional m Inputs Outputs 2 or 4 HD SDI video inputs depending of the EM4000 version 2 GigE outputs 2 100 1000 BT Ethernet Control amp Command links m Video 2or4HD T
187. ication Download version XMS_04 50 00 Devices Software Release Directory containing software release to download or to activate N EM4000 Releases V1 10 EM4000_01 10 00 000 Browse Check files that are part of the release inix For boards products ME 4000_01 10 00 000 7z EM400x This page is used to select Browse the directory containing the software release to download Download procedure The download procedure is as follows Declare the devices to be upgraded Select the directory containing the file to be downloaded Select the devices to be upgraded Select the operation to be performed upgrade download or toggle 5 software releases 1 active software release and 4 inactive software releases can be loaded in the ViBE EM4000 Encoder memory To delete a software release from the memory refer to section Uninstall an inactive software on page 153 The term software release also refers to a package 148 ViBE EM4000 Release 1 10 User Manual 46073586AB02 Chapter 6 Tools Download application Step 1 Declaring the devices to be upgraded Method 1 1 Click Add on the Devices page The following dialog box is displayed Figure 6 9 Name IP address and Device family of the device to be upgraded Download application CI x Name Em4000 IP address 10 12 54 66 Device family EERE Select device famil VIBE EM1000 2000 V
188. ice click Save active configuration on the Presets page The following page will be displayed Figure 4 46 Saving the active configuration 1 2 Save active confiquration Save to num 9 Fa Coder Chassis EM ENCODER 1 Description EM4000 Tv1 submit reset m Enter the following fields Used to indicate the number of the memory in which the configuration will be saved Only unused memory numbers will be displayed 32 memories can be used Used to indicate the type of configuration to be saved Chassis or EM ENCODER x and if the configuration is of EM ENCODER type the number of the Basic encoder to be saved Used to add any User comments Confirm the operation by clicking submit The following screen will be displayed VIBE EM4000 Release 1 10 User Manual 46073586AB02 Chapter 4 Web Browser Interface Settings Figure 4 47 Saving the active configuration 2 2 EM CONTROLLER Presets You have saved the current configuration in memory 9 The created configuration will be displayed in the Stored predefined configurations box on the Presets page Configurations may not be saved if there is insufficient memory I space Ifthis is the case delete any unused configurations Recalling a configuration stored in the device To recall a configuration stored in the device click the Q icon associated with the configuration on the Presets page m f the configuration is of chassis type
189. ier le signal d entr e Automatic redundancy Current autobackup Selectable Upstream autobackup Selectable The following device s can raise this probable cause DBE 4110 DSNG DBE 4120 Contribution DBE 4130 Broadcast SSEB DSS MSE DBE 4140 Local insertion ViBE EM3000 MPEG4 EM4000 Dual Channel EM4000 Quad Channel EM4000 Hexa Channel EM4000 Octal Channel ViBE ViBE Encoder SD Encoder MTEP syntax alarms matching this probable cause english 17 No embedded audio input 104 No embedded signal 110 No embedded signal 120 No embedded signal Page 44 Alarm Help X733 syntax 9 60 MTEP syntax alarms matching this probable cause french 17 Pas d entr e avec audio ins r e 104 Pas de signal ins r 110 Pas de signal insere 120 Pas de signal ins r Page 45 Alarm Help X733 syntax 9 60 Probable Cause 1336 No expected standard in signal Category Communications Default severity major Wording English No expected standard in signal Wording French Standard attendu absent du signal Diagnosis English Signal is not compliant with configurated and specified standard Diagnosis French Le signal n est pas compatible avec le standard configur et sp cifi Action English Check input signal Action French V rifier le signal d entr e Automatic redundancy Current autobackup Impossible Upstream autobackup Impossible The following device s can raise
190. ieure HS 189 Couche inf rieure HS 190 Couche inf rieure HS 191 Couche inf rieure HS Page 31 Alarm Help X733 syntax 9 60 Probable Cause 157 lossOfRealTimel Category Processing error Default severity major Wording English Loss of real time Wording French Perte de temps r el Diagnosis English Consequence of input signal sync error or CPU load Diagnosis French Cons quence d une erreur de synchronisation du signal d entr e ou de la charge CPU Action English Check input signal and cable s May be due to unexpected switch behaviour Action French V rifier le s c ble s et le signal d entr e Peut tre d une commutation intempestive du signal Automatic redundancy Current autobackup Impossible Upstream autobackup Impossible The following device s can raise this probable cause Net Processor 9030 Net Processor 9040 Net Feeder 9010 ViBE EM3000 MPEG4 EM4000 Dual Channel EM4000 Quad Channel EM4000 Hexa Channel EM4000 Octal Channel ViBE Encoder MTEP syntax alarms matching this probable cause english 102 Loss of real time 103 Loss of real time MTEP syntax alarms matching this probable cause french 102 Perte de temps r el Page 32 Alarm Help X733 syntax 9 60 103 Perte de temps r el Page 33 Alarm Help X733 syntax 9 60 Probable Cause 8 lossOfSignal Category Communications Default severity major Wording Engl
191. ignal Page 48 Alarm Help X733 syntax 9 60 Probable Cause 1176 no stream carried in program Category Processing error Default severity minor Wording English No stream carried in program Wording French Aucun flux achemin dans le programme Diagnosis English No stream or program found Diagnosis French Aucun flux trouv pour le service courant Action English Check source and if the problem persists Contact Customer Service Action French Aucune Automatic redundancy Current autobackup Selectable Upstream autobackup Impossible The following device s can raise this probable cause XNA 4600 adapter ViBE EM3000 MPEG4 EM4000 Dual Channel EM4000 Quad Channel EM4000 Hexa Channel EM4000 Octal Channel Rate Shaper ViBE Decoder HDD 8200 MTEP syntax alarms matching this probable cause english 63 Failed to process a program header for the program stream 64 Failed to process a program header for the program stream 107 no stream carried in program 108 no stream carried in program 190 Program not found in incoming MPTS Page 49 Alarm Help X733 syntax 9 60 MTEP syntax alarms matching this probable cause french 63 Erreur dans l ent te de programme 64 Erreur dans l ent te de programme 107 Aucun flux achemin dans le programme 108 Aucun flux achemin dans le programme 190 Programme introuvable dans MPTS d entr e Page 50 Alarm Help X733 sy
192. iltering Settings Pop up Blocker gt SmartScreen Filter Le Manage Add ons ous Recherche Imag Gompatibility View Compatibility View Settings Windows Update Developer Tools F12 Diagnose Connection Problems Internet Options Internet Options 3 xl General Security Privacy Content Connections programs Advanced Programs Advanced General security Privacy Content Connections Home page To set up an Internet connection click Setup Setup gt To create home page tabs type each address on its own line 5 http www google Fr 2 Dial up and Virtual Private Network settings i http thomson networks thomnet com km HeadEnd Pro Use current Use default Use blank Browsing history GL Delete temporary fles history cookies saved passwords and web form information Choose Settings if you need to configure a proxy server for a connection neve T Delete browsing history on exit Search i Local Area Network LAN Settings xj m Automatic configuration Automatic configuration may override manual settings To ensure the use of manual settings disable automatic configuration JT Automatically detect settings 7 Use automatic configuration script Address Local Area Network LAN settings LAN Settings do not apply to dial up connections Choose Settings above for dial up sel
193. ined configuration via the Local Console pdcrem command InIx ViBE gt pdcrem al conf number 5 remove conf 5 OK viBE gt fj E Enter the following fields m conf number enter the number of the predefined configuration to be deleted 1 to 39 Some configurations are predefined configurations stored in factory They cannot be deleted The following information will be displayed ViBE EM4000 Release 1 10 135 User Manual 46073586AB02 Chapter 5 Servicing Operations performed using the Local Console remove conf xx OK configuration xx has been successfully deleted a warning message may be displayed Ifthe operation is not successful the remove KO lt xxxx gt message will be displayed where xxxx indicates the reason for failure Reading the description of a predefined configuration pdcget To read the description of a predefined configuration type pdcget after the VIBE prompt Figure 5 31 Reading a predefined configuration description via the Local Console pdcget A ViBE gt pdeget Al conf number 0 for the list 1 64 for the description of a PDC conf nb 31 conf type Chassis status USED author PT comment date 23 06 2011 23 36 16 access mode READWRITE conf size 13 Ko data model V7 0a viBE gt fj F Enter the following fields conf number enter the predefined configuration number 1 to 39 Also refer to the note below The following i
194. ing Operations performed using the Local Console Accessing the Local Console 1 Runthe SSH application on the PC connected to the network using the Encoder IP address The Login page is displayed 2 Enteruser as Login Figure 5 2 Enter login Login page i 10 12 54 29 PuTTY lol x login as user user 10 12 54 29 s password 3 Enter user as password Figure 5 3 Local Console main screen PTE T A ViBE utilities Then see section List of Local Console commands on page 117 for a list of the commands List of Local Console commands To display all Local Console commands type help after the ViBE prompt Figure 5 4 Displaying all Local Console commands 10 12 54 29 PuTTY lolx ViBE utilities A ViBE gt help The list of available commands will be displayed ViBE EM4000 Release 1 10 117 User Manual 46073586AB02 Chapter 5 Servicing Operations performed using the Local Console 118 Figure 5 5 List of Local Console commands 1 2 0 12 54 29 PuTTY Available commands al IPDISP IP IPSET IP DDATE INFO SDATE INFO READ INFO SHELF INFO DNTP 06 NTP SNTP NTP SERVER DOWN VIEW DOWN DOWN DOWN TOGG DOWN UNINST DOWN RESULT DOWN REBOOT SYST USRADD WEB USRDEL WEB USRLIST WEB PDCSAVE CONF Display IP parameters Set IP parameters Display Date amp Time Set Date Time Get
195. ing an audio component Dolby Metadata parameters 2 page Metadata Control Metadata Parameters 1 Metadata Parameters 2 OF DC Highpass Filter con Off Room Type Not indicated z Mixing Level 105 dB Copyright Bit On Off Original Bitstream On coff LFE Channel Filter On Off Surround 3 dB Attenuation c On Off Surround Phase Shift con Off Surround EX mode Dolby SurroundEx A D Converter Type Sanaa gt DOLBY be DIGITALPLUS Dolby and the double D symbol are registered trademarks of Dolby Laboratories This page is used to set the Metadata used by the Dolby Encoder in Internal Metadata mode Bandwidth Lowpass Filter Used to enable On or disable Off the low pass filter on the input audio samples Default value On DC Highpass Filter Used to enable On or disable Off the high pass filter on the input audio samples Default value Off Dolby Surround Mode Used to indicate whether the stereo audio is Dolby Surround encoded or not Choice between Not indicated Not encoded and Encoded Default value Not indicated The value is not acknowledged in 1 0 mode Room Type Used to indicate what type of mixing room was used for the final mixing Choice between Not indicated Large Small Default value Not indicated Mixing Level Used to indicate the acoustic pressure of the sound during the final mixing Range between 80 and 111 dB in 1 dB steps Default value 105 dB Copyright Bit Used to in
196. inition of Encoder Users on page 54 Default Users are set on device shipment e g Username admin I and Password admin The Status Summary page will be displayed See section Status Summary page on page 58 ViBE EM4000 Release 1 10 55 User Manual 46073586AB02 Chapter 4 Web Browser Interface Quick configuration Quick configuration 56 To rapidly configure the Encoder please follow these steps Table 4 3 Steps for rapidly configuring the Encoder Step Section Define the number of output TS s Refer to section Configuring the number of TSs at Encoder output on page 63 Configure the output IP interfaces Refer to section Configuring LAN WAN network interfaces on page 64 Configure the TS stream and output IP encapsulation Refer to section Configuring TS streams and IP encapsulation on page 67 Load a Predefined in factory Configuration Refer to section Predefined Configurations on page 99 and section Configurations predefined in factory WBU_ISOG Conf on page 100 Fine tune the configuration to actual Encoder use Refer to section Setting a Basic encoder on page 72 VIBE EM4000 Release 1 10 User Manual 46073586AB02 Chapter 4 Web Browser Interface Screen Layout Screen Layout General information Each page comprises m a menu bar featuring the following commands
197. inst page 130 ViBE EM4000 Release 1 10 User Manual 46073586AB02 119 Chapter 5 Servicing Operations performed using the Local Console 120 Table 5 1 Commands available on the Local Console application User operations and related commands Command description amp page Managing Web Interface Users usradd To add a User page 132 usrdel To delete a User page 132 usrlist To display the list of Users page 133 Managing predefined configurations pdcsave To save a configuration page 134 pdcload To load a predefined configuration page 134 pdcrem To delete a predefined configuration page 135 pdcget To get the description of a predefined configuration page 136 Managing community strings and SNMP agent information rinfo To display SNMP agent information page 137 winfo To write SNMP agent information page 138 cread To display the list of community strings page 138 clist To display the list of temporary community strings page 139 cadd To add a community string page 140 cdel To delete a community string page 140 m csave To save the list of community strings page 140 Description of basic parameters Commands relating to IP parameters Displaying IP parameters ipdisp To display the Encoder IP parameters type ipdisp after the VIBE prompt VIBE EM4000 Release 1 10 User Manual 46073586AB02 Ch
198. ion Automatic redundancy Current autobackup Selectable Upstream autobackup Selectable The following device s can raise this probable cause DBE 2100 1 external video 4 audios DBE 2120 8 audios DBE 2110 1 internal video 8 audios DBE 4110 DSNG DBE 4130 Broadcast SSEB ISO MSE Net Processor 9030 Net Processor 9040 DBS2930 Audio Video Acquisition Switcher NAGRAVISION DVBSC MEDIAGUARD DVBSC CONAX DVBSC NDS DVBSC Page 9 DBE 2110 DBE 2120 DBE 2120 4 audios DBE 4120 Contribution SSEB DSS MSE DBE 4140 Local insertion Amber Mediation Unit Modulator Redundant Switching Unit SNA TNA 4600 coupler VIACCESS DVBSC IRDETO DVBSC SelectaVision DVBSC CRYTOWORKS DVBSC 1 internal video 4 audios 12 audios aa Alarm Help X733 syntax 9 60 EM4000 Dual Channel EM4000 Quad Channel EM4000 Hexa Channel EM4000 Octal Channel N8000 MSU 4422 DBD4431 DVB QPSK Demodulator DBD4431 COFDM DBD4431 DVB ASI Input RD 2000 RD 5000 SD RD 5002 SD Tandberg TT5031 Conax Tandberg TT5032 Mediaguard Tandberg TT5033 Nagravision Tandberg TT5034 Viaccess General Purpose Interface Jade V SFN Itis Adapter ViBE Encoder RD 5000 HD SD RD 3000 Opal II ViBE Mobile TV ViBE Mosaic Generator ASI ViBE Mosaic Generator IP VS7000 v1 x VS7000 v2 0 MTEP syntax alarms matching this probable cause english 17 Communication problem 17 Set up error 18 Unknown encoder for the PID 4 19 Config
199. ion in progress Install option done ViBE gt fj The install option done message will be displayed to indicate that the option has been installed You can also ensure that the option has been confirmed using the 1sopt command See section Displaying software options lsopt on page 124 When an installed option is edited i e if the number of AAC audios must be increased this option will need to be uninstalled before being reinstalled with the new key see section below Uninstalling a software option rmopt To uninstall a software option you will need its id This information can be displayed using the 1sopt command Figure 5 21 Displaying option id software option id 50 N 4H4i Installed 3238C8 One channel HD SD AVC encoding 4 51 EMS4FLA Installed 332FB6 WAN LAN Flextream 4 527 NEMS4FLE XXXXXX LAN Flextream 0 60 NEMS4D51 Installed 3C7450 DD DD surround encoding 1x5 1 3x2 0 8 61 NEMS4DDE Installed 3D6342 Dolby E decoding 8 62 NEMS4DOL Installed 3E083C DD DD stereo encoding 24 63 NEMS4AAC Installed 3FO9CA AAC stereo encoding 24 64 NEMS4AS1 Installed 405985 AAC HE surround encoding 1x5 1 3x2 0 8 65 NEMS4MP1 Installed 41507D MPEG1 L2 stereo encoding 24 To uninstall a software option 1 Type rmopt after the ViBE prompt 128 ViBE EM4000 Release 1 10 User Manual 46073586AB02 Chapter 5 Servicing Operations performed using the Local Console Figure 5 22 Uninstalli
200. is marker using one of the 4 arrow keys Setting LCD screen brightness and contrast For optimum readability of texts displayed on the LCD screen it may be necessary to adjust the Brightness and Contrast according to the lighting conditions Refer to section LCD CAL screen on page 48 40 VIBE EM4000 Release 1 10 User Manual 46073586AB02 Chapter 3 Front Panel Operation Screen Description Screen Description Screen tree menu Figure 3 3 Menu tree of screens displayed on the Encoder front panel ViBE EM4000 Release 1 10 41 User Manual 46073586AB02 Chapter 3 Front Panel Operation Screen Description Summary of screen functions List summarizing the functions that can be accessed via the screens Table 3 5 Functions that can be accessed via the Encoder front panel screens Screen Function section Device booting screen on page 42 Indicates that the device is starting up section Status screen on page 43 Indicates the device name and IP address section Main Menu screen on page 43 Displays available sub menus section Alarms screen on page 44 Displays alarms raised on the device section Setup screen on page 45 Displays available sub menus section IP Settings screen on page 45 Displays and used to edit device IP settings section Recall screen on page 46 Used to recall a predefined configuration
201. ish Loss of signal Wording French Perte de signal Diagnosis English No input signal detected on physical interface Diagnosis French Pas de signal d entr e d tect sur l interface physique Action English Check signal at the input physical interface and check cable Action French V rifier le cable et le signal d entr e sur le connecteur physique Automatic redundancy Current autobackup Selectable Upstream autobackup Selectable The following device s can raise this probable cause DBE 2100 1 external video 4 audios DBE 2110 1 internal video 4 audios Net Processor 9030 Net Processor 9040 Barco Quasar without RF converter Barco Channelized Quasar Barco Agile Quasar VHF Barco Agile Quasar UHF Barco Quasar MKII without RF converter Barco Channelized Quasar MKII Barco Agile Quasar MKII VHF Barco Agile Quasar MKII UHF Barco Agile Quasar MKII Full Band Newtec QPSK 2177 Newtec DVB S 2277 Newtec DVB S 2280 Audio Video Acquisition XNA 4600 adapter Net Feeder 9010 ViBE EM3000 MPEG4 EM4000 Dual Channel EM4000 Quad Channel EM4000 Hexa Channel EM4000 Octal Channel HDE 8100 N8000 MSU 4422 DBD4431 DVB QPSK Demodulator DBD 4433 QPSK Input DBD 4433 QAM Input Page 34 Alarm Help X733 syntax 9 60 DBD 4433 ASI Input DBD 4433 PDH Input DBD 4433 ATM Input DBD 4433 DSNG Input Q 8 16 DBD 4436 QPSK Input DBD 4436 QAM Input DBD 4436 ASI Input DBD 4486 PDH Input DBD 4436 AT
202. itrates kbit s Mono 48 64 96 Stereo Joint stereo Dual channels 96 128 160 Table A 21 HE AAC 2 0 encoding audio bitrates Mode Bitrates kbit s Mono 24 32 48 Stereo Joint stereo Dual channels 48 64 80 96 Table A 22 HE AAC v2 2 0 encoding audio bitrates Mode Bitrates kbit s Stereo 24 32 188 VIBE EM4000 Release 1 10 User Manual 46073586AB02 Appendix A Technical Specifications Options AAC LC HE AAC 5 1 encoding Ordering reference NEMS4A51AA This option enables AAC capability for one 5 1 or three stereos 2 0 Up to 4 AAC LC HE AAC 5 1 encoding options can be installed per chassis NEM40IN2AA Up to 8 AAC LC HE AAC 5 1 encoding options can be installed per chassis NEM40IN4AA Table A 23 AAC LC 5 1 encoding audio bitrates Mode Bitrates kbit s 5 1 Surround 256 320 384 448 Table A 24 HE AAC 5 1 encoding audio bitrates Mode Bitrates kbit s 5 1 Surround 128 160 192 256 ViBE EM4000 Release 1 10 189 User Manual 46073586AB02 Appendix A Technical Specifications Options 190 Dolby E decoding Ordering reference NEMS4DDEAA This option enables the Dolby E decoding capability for one Dolby E stream Up to 4 Dolby E decoding options can be installed per chassis NEM4OIN2AA Up to 8 Dolby E decoding options can be installed per chassis NEM4OIN4AA The Dolby E stream is de embedded from the HD SDI stream The Dol
203. ity and packing the equipment ready for pickup For further information on the Thomson Video Networks product take back system please visit our website s Environmental Policy page http www thomson networks com ViBE EM4000 Release 1 10 User Manual 46073586AB02 Appendix E Alarms Introduction This chapter gives the list of alarms which can be displayed on the Encoder For each alarm the diagnostics action to be performed and alarm severity are given VIBE EM4000 Release 1 10 231 User Manual 46073586AB02 Alarms BLANK PAGE 232 ViBE EM4000 Release 1 10 User Manual 46073586AB02 THOMSON images amp beyond Alarm Help X733 syntax 9 60 db last updated July 13 2012 11 38 AM amp doc generated July 23 2012 2 40 PM Alarm Help X733 syntax 9 60 Probable Cause 51 backplaneFailure Category Equipment Default severity major Wording English Backplane failure Wording French D faillance du fond de panier Diagnosis English CPU PIC interface initialisation failed Diagnosis French Interface CPU PIC chec de l initialisation Action English Reset the board If the alarm registers again return the board to Customer Service Action French R initialisation de la carte Si le probl me persiste retour de la carte l usine Automatic redundancy Current autobackup Impossible Upstream autobackup Impossible The followin
204. kes care of keeping track of the individual units of data called packets that a message is divided into for efficient routing through the Internet TCP IP allows the construction of very large networks with little central management Time and Date Table A mandatory Digital Video Broadcast DVB SI table that supplies the Coordinated Universal Time UTC time and date A sequence of numeric codes generated at regular intervals by a timing system A sequence of characters denoting the date and or time at which a certain event occurred Time slicing is a technique that is used in DVB H applications to increase the battery life time of mobile DVB H receivers for instance cell phones PDAs etc Chunks of data will be transmitted in bursts which allows the mobile receiver to be switched off when no data is transmitted During this inactivity the mobile receiver can scan neighboring cells in order to select the best reception conditions and be prepared for seamless handovers Time Offset Table An optional DVB SI table that supplies the actual UTC time also including time offset information coded as MJD Transport Stream A multiplex of several Elementary Streams that are contained in packets Transport Stream Descriptor Table A mandatory MPEG 2 PSI table that describes which type of Transport stream it is in i e DVB ATSC etc It may also contain other descriptors Terrestrial Virtual Channel Table ATSC User Data Protoc
205. la topologie Page 11 Alarm Help X733 syntax 9 60 Probable Cause 153 corruptData Category Processing error Default severity major Wording English Corrupt data Wording French Donn es corrompues Diagnosis English Corrupt data detected Diagnosis French Donn es corrompues d tect es Action English Report the problem to the Customer Service Action French Signaler le probl me au Service Clients Automatic redundancy Current autobackup Selectable Upstream autobackup Selectable The following device s can raise this probable cause Newtec QPSK 2080 Newtec QPSK 2077 Hx Newtec QPSK 2077 Sx Newtec QPSK 2077 Fx Newtec QPSK 2177 Newtec DVB S 2277 Newtec DVB S 2280 Audio Video Acquisition ViBE EM3000 MPEG4 EM4000 Dual Channel EM4000 Quad Channel EM4000 Hexa Channel EM4000 Octal Channel DM3200 6400 ViBE Opal II SD Encoder MTEP syntax alarms matching this probable cause english 66 Input buffer corrupted 94 Corrupt data 132 Front panel non volatile memory checksum fail Page 12 Alarm Help X733 syntax 9 60 138 Data buffer failure MTEP syntax alarms matching this probable cause french 66 Buffer d entr e corrompu 94 Donn es corrompues 132 Erreur de checksum NOVRAM contr leur de face avant 138 Echec du buffer de donn es Page 13 Alarm Help X733 syntax 9 60 Probable Cause 3 degradedSignal Category Communications Default s
206. larms matching this probable cause english Page 81 Alarm Help X733 syntax 9 60 19 Unvalid configuration 81 Recall of PCMCIA configuration failed 95 Unvalid saved configuration 102 Unvalid saved configuration 106 Unvalid saved configuration 115 Unvalid saved configuration 116 Unvalid saved configuration 119 Unvalid saved configuration 132 Saved context default 133 Saved configurations lost 140 Last Restore error MTEP syntax alarms matching this probable cause french 19 Configuration invalide 81 Echec du rappel de la configuration sauvegard e sur la carte PCMCIA 95 Configuration sauvegard e non valide 102 Configuration sauvegard e non valide 106 Configuration sauvegard e non valide 115 Configuration sauvegard e non valide 116 Configuration sauvegard e non valide 119 Configuration sauvegard e non valide 132 D faut de contexte sauvegarde 133 Perte de la configuration sauvegard e 140 Erreur lors de la derni re restauration Page 82 Alarm Help X733 syntax 9 60 Probable Cause 1076 ventilation failure Category Equipment Default severity critical Wording English Ventilation failure Wording French D faillance de la ventilation Diagnosis English Fan concerned is out of service Diagnosis French Le ventilateur concern est hors service Action English If external check that an air fan is powered on Else check that no objec
207. lator board internal alarm 138 Function module interface internal alarm 138 Unexpected architecture 140 System fault 144 Hardware error 144 MMI initialisation failed 144 Input initialisation failed 144 Euroboard input failed 144 TS initialisation failed 144 CA initialisation failed 144 DEC initialisation failed 147 625 Ln no response 147 525 Ln no response 147 PTS no response 147 Genlock no response 148 No response 148 No response 148 No response 149 No response 149 Audio not running 150 No response 151 No response 151 No response 151 No response 151 No response 154 Hardware failure 3 155 Hardware failure 173 NV RAM Fault 173 Watchdog Timer Fault 173 Program Code Checksum Error 179 Bad NVRAM Checksum All MCC options invalidated 180 Factory configuration problem on MCC board 183 Hardware failure 184 Hardware failure 190 Hardware failure 191 Hardware failure MTEP syntax alarms matching this probable cause french 17 Encodeur hors service 26 Compresseur HS 34 Compresseur HS 34 Lien HDLC HS 34 Codage premi re passe HS 34 Helper channel HS 34 Mauvaise SSEB MIGHT pour 4150 45 compresseur C1P hors service 45 Mauvais SuperEncoder MIGHT pour 4150 63 Impossible de mettre a jour la LED indiquant une alarme 64 Impossible de mettre a jour la LED indiquant une alarme 95 Defaillance materielle 97 C
208. le A 9 ViBE EM4000 output connectors Connector Description LH Lt l 1 POU 3 J IPOUT1 amp 2 Purpose Electrical Gigabit Ethernet interfaces for compressed A V output over IP Features Type IEEE 802 3 1000 BaseT Connector type RJ45 110 Ohms line impedance Standard IEEE 8 2 3 2002 Bitrate 10 Mbit s 100 Mbit s 1 Gbit s autosensing Operating mode Half Full duplex autonegotiation Autocrossover mechanism for cable connection Cabling two twisted pairs category STP5 or FTP5 gauge AWG 24 EMC and Security according to IEEE 802 3 2002 Permissible output jitter according to IEEE 802 3 2002 Pinout and indication aM E Led 1 8 1 Pin number Name 1 TDP Transmitted Data 2 TDN Transmitted Data 3 RDP Received Data 4 5 Not connected 6 RDN Received Data 7 8 Not connected Leds indicate Speed and Activity of the link Tx Rx Mode Led 1 Led 2 No link Off Off 100 Mbits s Green Off x 100 Mbits s Flashing Green Off x 100 Mbits s Flashing Yellow Off x x 100 Mbits s Flashing Yellow Off 1 Gbits s Green Green x 1 Gbits s Flashing Green Green x 1 Gbits s Flashing Yellow Green x x 1 Gbits s Flashing Yellow Green 166 ViBE EM4000 Release 1 10 User Manual 46073586AB02 Appendix A Technical Specifications Interface Specifications IP Adaptation Ethernet interface Physical
209. lease 1 10 User Manual 46073586AB02 Dolby E Program Number Source ViBE EM4000 Release 1 10 User Manual 46073586AB02 Chapter 4 Web Browser Interface Settings Used to select the program to be decoded in the Dolby E stream Choice of 1 to 4 Program selection is facilitated by the Monitoring function Click DolbyE Progr Config to display the following page Dolby Program Config Selection of the Dolby E program number by the User Program Number 1 2 DD 5 1 DD 2 0 DD 5 1 DD 1 0 D DD 2 0 DD 2 0 c DD 2 0 DD 2 0 D DD 2 0 DD 1 0 B Program Config DD 1 0 DD 1 0 D DD 5 1 DD 2 0 DD 2 0 C DD 2 0 DD 2 0 E DD 2 0 DD 1 0 H DD 2 0 DD 2 0 DD 2 0 DD 1 0 D Current Program Config p Input Dolby E stream configuration The incoming Dolby E stream program configuration is displayed The configuration related to the Program Number is used to set the program type For example if Current Program Config 0 then Program Number 1 will decode a 5 1 type stream 6 mono channels and Program Number 2 will decode a stereo type stream 2 mono channels Used to select the Source of the Dolby E stream to be decoded Choice between SDI Group 1 Channel 1 2 1 3 1 4 1 group choice for mux 1 and SDI Group 1 Channel 2 2 2 3 2 4 2 group choice for mux 2 85 Auto Switch Mode Chapter 4 Web Browser
210. letext in signal Wording French Pas de t l texte dans le signal Diagnosis English Teletext not detected Diagnosis French T l texte non d tect Action English Check input signal Action French V rifier le signal d entr e Automatic redundancy Current autobackup Selectable Upstream autobackup Selectable The following device s can raise this probable cause DBE 4110 DSNG DBE 4120 Contribution DBE 4130 Broadcast SSEB DSS MSE DBE 4140 Local insertion Audio Video Acquisition ViBE EM3000 MPEG4 EM4000 Dual Channel EM4000 Quad Channel EM4000 Hexa Channel EM4000 Octal Channel DBD4431 DVB QPSK Demodulator DBD4431 COFDM DBD4431 DVB ASI Input ViBE Encoder ViBE Decoder SD Encoder MTEP syntax alarms matching this probable cause english 26 No CEEFAX in signal 105 No teletext in signal 109 no teletext in signal Page 53 Alarm Help X733 syntax 9 60 132 No expected teletext A B or subtitle B input 148 Teletext no data MTEP syntax alarms matching this probable cause french 26 CEEFAX absent 105 Pas de t l texte dans le signal 109 Pas de t l texte dans le signal 132 Absence t l texte ou sous titre 148 Pas de donn es teletext Page 54 Alarm Help X733 syntax 9 60 Probable Cause 1198 Option missing Category Processing error Default severity minor Wording English Option missing Wording French Option non ins
211. lity problems with some decoders Insertion of PCR on RAI is authorized by the standard but could cause some accuracy errors on analyzers Configure the encoder in PES per field mode By default the encoder is in PES per frame mode Used in specific cases Audio signaling in the PMT is in compliance with the ISO IEC 13818 3 audio standard MPEG2 VIBE EM4000 Release 1 10 User Manual 46073586AB02 Chapter 4 Web Browser Interface Settings AC3 stream type Signaling adaptation for AC3 streams Standard signaling 0x06 stream type for private data plus an AC3 descriptor is replaced by specific signaling 0x81 stream type without a descriptor No Audio CRC The CRC is removed from MPEG 1 Layer II and AAC frames for all audio components generated by the Encoder This does not concern Dolby AC3 and E AC3 audio encoding Predefined Configurations The page associated with the Presets menu is used to manage predefined configurations Figure 4 42 Status Summary page breakdown To access Predefined Configurations Status Configuration Presets Maintenance BE gt gt rw er M4002 EM CONTRO L e 47 i Jser admin administrator 1 gt Logout iM CONTROLLER Summary Overview of predefined configurations Predefined configurations are configurations that are stored in the device or can also be saved to disk in the form of files There are 2 types of predefined configuration m Chassis type co
212. lost MTEP syntax alarms matching this probable cause french 7 Aucun signal sur PES INTF 17 Pas de signal SDI 25 Aucun signal en entr e 26 Pas de signal analogique Page 35 Alarm Help X733 syntax 9 60 26 Pas de signal SDI 27 Pas de signal analogique 27 Absence de synchro 34 Pas de signal SDI 45 absence signal SDI 47 Securisation interne activee 63 Pas de signal sur l entr e 2 64 Pas de signal sur l entr e 2 110 Perte de signal 115 Perte de signal 120 Perte de signal 132 Absence de la r f rence synchroniseur 132 Absence de la vid o incidente num rique 132 Absence vid o analogique d entr e 134 Perte du signal 135 Perte du signal affluent 137 Donn es perdues 138 Perte du signal ASI optique 138 Perte du signal LVDS 140 Pas de signal en entr e 140 Pas de signal en entr e 145 Absence RF 145 Absence de signal 145 Pas de signal G703 146 Pas d entr e 147 Pas de signal 154 Pas de signal d tect entr e 1 155 Perte de signal 186 Perte du signal 190 Perte du signal affluent Page 36 Alarm Help X733 syntax 9 60 Probable Cause 1029 loss of stream Category Communications Default severity warning Wording English Loss of stream Wording French Perte de flux Diagnosis English No transport stream at device input Diagnosis French Pas de flux de transport l entr e de l quipe
213. lue If the IP gateway address is not used type 0 0 0 0 Type y after Sure to modify if you wish to confirm the new configuration or n if you wish to keep the previous configuration The changes will be acknowledged after the Encoder has been I rebooted The Encoder must be connected to the network during the boot which follows IP address configuration to facilitate detection of MAC IP address pair changes ViBE EM4000 Release 1 10 29 User Manual 46073586AB02 Chapter 2 Installation and Startup Performing the Initial Settings Commands Relating to the Date and Time Displaying the current date and time ddate To display the current date and time type ddate after the ViBE prompt Figure 2 12 Displaying the current date and time ddate command GT Hox ViBE gt ddate al Thu Jun 23 20 45 32 UTC 2011 ViBE gt Jj UTC date and time will be displayed Editing the date and time sdate To edit the date and time type sdate after the ViBE prompt Figure 2 13 Editing the date and time sdate command LIT lox ViBE gt sdate al Current UTC time is Thu Jun 23 20 47 37 UTC 2011 Enter the new UTC time with the format MMDDhhmmYYYY UTC time ViBE gt sdate Current UTC time is Thu Jun 23 20 47 53 UTC 2011 Enter the new UTC time with the format MMDDhhmmYYYY UTC time 022911282012 u Apply datestime now y xl Enter the following fields m Type the new date and time values in mon
214. lus E AC3 2 0 encoding audio bitrates Mode Bitrates kbit s Mono 32 48 64 Stereo 64 96 128 192 224 VIBE EM4000 Release 1 10 User Manual 46073586AB02 Appendix A Technical Specifications Options Dolby Digital AC3 Dolby Digital Plus E AC3 5 1 encoding Ordering reference NEMS4A51AA This option enables Dolby encoding capability for one 5 1 or three stereos 2 0 Up to 4 Dolby Digital AC3 Dolby Digital Plus E AC3 5 1 encoding options can be installed per chassis NEM40IN2AA Up to 8 Dolby Digital AC3 Dolby Digital Plus E AC3 5 1 encoding options can be installed per chassis NEM40IN4AA Table A 18 Dolby Digital AC3 5 1 encoding audio bitrates Mode Bitrates kbit s 5 1 Surround 5 0 Surround 384 448 512 576 640 Table A 19 Dolby Digital Plus E AC3 5 1 encoding audio bitrates Mode Bitrates kbit s 5 1 Surround 5 0 Surround 192 224 256 384 448 ViBE EM4000 Release 1 10 187 User Manual 46073586AB02 Appendix A Technical Specifications Options AAC LC HE AAC HE AAC v2 2 0 encoding Ordering reference NEMS4AACAA This option enables AAC encoding capability for one stereo 2 0 Up to 12 AAC LC HE AAC HE AAC v2 2 0 encoding options can be installed per chassis NEM40IN2AA Up to 24 AAC LC HE AAC HE AAC v2 2 0 encoding options can be installed per chassis NEM40IN4AA Table A 20 AAC LC 2 0 encoding audio bitrates Mode B
215. ly by a decoder Extended Text Table Federal Communications Commission Forward Error Correction A system of error control for data transmission whereby the sender adds systematically generated redundant data to its messages The carefully designed redundancy allows the receiver to detect and correct a limited number of errors occurring anywhere in the message without the need to ask the sender for additional data FEC enables the receiver to correct errors without the need for a reverse channel to request retransmission of data but this advantage is at the cost of a fixed higher forward channel bandwidth For an interlaced video signal a field is the assembly of alternate lines of a frame Therefore an interlaced frame is composed of two fields a top field and a bottom field Frame Per Second File Transfer Protocol A standard network protocol used to copy a file from one host to another over a TCP based network A frame contains lines of spatial information of a video signal For progressive video these lines contain samples starting from one time instant and continuing through successive lines to the bottom of the frame For interlaced video a frame consists of two fields a top field and a bottom field One of these fields will commence one field later than the other Group of Pictures In MPEG video a GOP represents one or more pictures followed by P and B pictures General Purpose Interface Graphical User Int
216. m La mise au rebut du composant usag doit s effectuer suivant les consignes du fabricant du composant Il y a risque d explosion si la m moire est mont e de mani re A incorrecte Mises en garde Les mises en garde suivantes signalent les conditions et les pratiques susceptibles d occasionner des dommages l quipement et aux installations SOURCE D ALIMENTATION AD QUATE Ne branchez pas ce produit une source d alimentation qui d livre une tension hors de la plage de tension nominale sp cifi e pour ce produit VENTILATION AD QUATE Pour viter tout risque de surchauffe ventilez correctement le produit Reportez vous section Mounting in Rack on page 18 Pour ne pas perturber la ventilation tous les emplacements non occup s par des cartes doivent tre obtur s par des caches de bouchement DYSFONCTIONNEMENT SUSPECT Si vous constatez une anomalie faites proc der une v rification par un personnel qualifi MARCHE ARR T DE L QUIPEMENT Le ch ssis ne comporte pas d interrupteur Marche Arr t Les cordons d alimentation doivent tre port e de main afin de permettre la mise hors tension de l quipement ACHEMINEZ LES C BLES CORRECTEMENT Acheminez les c bles d alimentation et les autres c bles de telle fa on qu ils ne risquent pas d tre endommag s Supportez correctement les enroulements de c bles afin de ne pas endommager les connecteurs EMBALLAGE D ORIGINE
217. m section Reboot screen on page 48 Used to reboot the device section LCD CAL screen on page 48 Used to adjust the LCD brightness and contrast section Info screen on page 49 Displays available sub menus m section Main Board Information Displays Main board information screen on page 49 m section Temperature Information Displays Temperature information screen on page 50 m section Encoding Board Information Displays Encoder board s screen on page 50 information Device booting screen When the device is powered on after a few seconds the LCD lights on and the following message is displayed during the booting process 42 ViBE EM4000 Release 1 10 User Manual 46073586AB02 Chapter 3 Front Panel Operation Screen Description Figure 3 4 Booting screen ViBE Launching The Status screen will be displayed once the booting process is complete Figure 3 5 Status screen ViBE EM4000 STATUS EM400x XXXXXXXX IP Address 10 12 54 24 The Status screen is described below Status screen Figure 3 6 Status screen ViBE EM4000 STATUS EM400x XXXXXXXX IP Address 10 12 54 24 lt Animated symbol used to indicate that the Encoder is operational EM400x Indicates the name of the Encoder This name is assigned via the Management System Web Browser or XMS IP Address Indicates the Encoder IP address Main Menu screen To display the Main Men
218. ment Action English Check input stream Action French V rifier le flux d entr e Automatic redundancy Current autobackup Selectable Upstream autobackup Selectable The following device s can raise this probable cause Net Processor 9030 Net Processor 9040 Net Feeder 9010 ViBE EM3000 MPEG4 EM4000 Dual Channel EM4000 Quad Channel EM4000 Hexa Channel EM4000 Octal Channel RD 2000 RD 5000 SD RD 5002 SD RD 1000 RD 1002 ViBE Encoder ViBE Decoder ViBE Front End PDH ViBE Front End 100BT ViBE Front End ASI RD 5000 HD SD RD 3000 MTEP syntax alarms matching this probable cause english 110 Loss of stream 117 Loss of stream Page 37 Alarm Help X733 syntax 9 60 MTEP syntax alarms matching this probable cause french 110 Perte de flux 117 Perte de flux Page 38 Alarm Help X733 syntax 9 60 Probable Cause 1348 no AD control track in signal Category Communications Default severity major Wording English No AD control track in signal Wording French Pas de contr le AD dans le signal Diagnosis English Input signal does not contain Audio Description Control Track Diagnosis French Le signal d entr e ne contient pas de donn es de contr le pour l Audio Description Action English Check input signal Action French V rifier le signal d entr e Automatic redundancy Current autobackup Selectable Upstream autobackup Impossible The following device
219. meters Use Expert parameters c On Off Other No empty packet on IP Param D2 I Param D3 mM Param D4 F Param DS 7 Param D6 m Param D7 Fr Param D8 submit reset Use Expert parameters If On the checked Expert parameters are enabled If Off Expert parametres are disabled No empty packet on IP Empty packets are deleted on both IP outputs Setting a Basic encoder The following section will explain how to configure a Basic encoder The Basic encoder number depends on the ViBE EM4000 model In this section the Basic encoder number is 2 VIBE EM4000 NEM40IN2AA m EM ENCODER 1 m EM ENCODER 2 The name of the Basic encoders can be set on the Maintenancel ldentification page See section Configuring the names of the Encoder and Basic encoders on page 110 Basic encoder configuration On the Configuration menu click the EM ENCODER to configure 72 ViBE EM4000 Release 1 10 User Manual 46073586AB02 Chapter 4 Web Browser Interface Settings Figure 4 23 Configuration menu Configuration menu Status BE wi Presets Maintenance EM ENCODER 1 M EM ENCODER 2 EM CONTROLLER EM ENCODER 1 This command is encoder No x Configure Device Eth1 Out Eth2 Out used to access the configuration page for Basic Configuration of Basic encoders must only be performed after configuration of the Encoder s operating mode See section Configuri
220. meters Output enabled disabled Destination IP Address 233 246 0 1 Destination UDP port sooo Virtual Source IP Address enabled disabled 172 16 111 112 TOS DiffServe byte othe lox10 Time To Live byte TTL 132 TX Encapsulation Tx Encapsulation MPEG RTP UDP IP v Number of MPEG packets per IP frame 3 submit reset Except for the Mirroring parameter the other parameters are identical to those on the Transmission P 1 page Mirroring If the parameter is enabled the Transmission IP 2 parameters will be identical to Transmission IP 1 and the other parameters on the page will be disabled If this parameter is disabled the configuration parameters that follow will be enabled and can be used to configure Transmission IP 2 Configuring Expert Parameters On the Configuration menu click Expert Parameters to display the Expert parameters configuration page Figure 4 21 Configuration menu Configuration menu ViBE EM4000 NEMI40IN2AA 2 Basic encoders N ViBE EM4000 NEMI40IN4AA 4 Basic encoders Status Configuration BE x Presets EM ENCODER 1 EM CONTROLLER Summary Eth2 Out r Outputs Expert Parameters Expert parameters OFF a This command is used to configure the Expert parameters that do not affect encoding features ViBE EM4000 Release 1 10 71 User Manual 46073586AB02 Chapter 4 Web Browser Interface Settings Figure 4 22 Expert Parameters page Declared Expert para
221. mmands relating to chassis topology Displaying chassis topology read To display the Encoder chassis topology type read after the ViBE prompt Figure 5 13 Displaying Encoder chassis topology read command 10 12 54 24 PuTTY 10 x ViBE gt read al Chassis 1 1 slots id type Boards 1 1 EM Encoder ENCODING Board NEMA40IN2 1 2 EM Encoder ENCODING Board 2 3 EM Encoder ENCODING Board 2 4 EM Encoder LENCODING Boara NEMA4OIN4 5 9 EM Controller MAIN Board The following information will be displayed slots Slot number id Board ID number type Type of the board m Boards Name of the board Displaying status RID and Part Number shelf To display the boards installed in the chassis together with their ordering references and names type shelf after the VIBE prompt ViBE EM4000 Release 1 10 123 User Manual 46073586AB02 Chapter 5 Servicing Operations performed using the Local Console Figure 5 14 Displaying Encoder status RID and Part Number shelf command 10 12 54 24 PuTTY E O x ViBE gt shelf al Slot Status RID Part number Name Shelf EM4004 shelf OK NEM40IN4 EM4000 viBE gt Jj The following information will be displayed Slot slot number Shelf refers to the chassis m Status status of board in the slot Possible messages are Encoder shelf Running the application has been run Error xxx an error was detected while the board was
222. n 45 mauvaise configuration 2 61 Carte 5 non d clar e 61 Carte 4 non d tect e 61 Carte fille 1 absente 75 Mauvaise adresse IP Gateway par d faut 75 Mauvaise adresse IP pour le contr le commande 75 Mauvais masque IP pour le contr le commande 75 Mauvaise adresse IP pour l injection de donn es 75 Mauvais masque IP pour l injection de donn es 76 Configuration instable 76 Impossible d appliquer la configuration sauvegard e 87 configuration incoh rente 88 Configuration DBP incorrecte 1 89 Configuration des cartes DBP incorrecte 1 92 Configuration quipement incorrecte 97 Identificateur de super CAS inconnu 97 Identificateur de canal inconnu 97 Identificateur de voie ECM inconnu 98 Identificateur de super CAS inconnu 98 Identificateur de canal inconnu 98 Identificateur de voie ECM inconnu 101 configuration incoh rente avec celle du CAC 2 102 Incoh rence dans la configuration 133 Perte de la configuration courante 134 Perte de configuration 135 Perte de la configuration 136 Perte de la configuration 137 Systeme non configur 138 Probleme de configuration 140 Erreur de configuration 144 Configuration illegale 144 Configuration non support e 145 Nombre de cellule invalide 166 Incoh rence avec la configuration d clar e sur l unit de contr le 177 Commande rejet e par la grille 206 Etat de diffusion incompatible avec
223. n Digital Satellite News Gathering Digital Signal Processor Digital Television Closed Captioning Digital Video Broadcasting The Digital Video Broadcasting Project DVB is an industry led consortium of around 250 broadcasters manufacturers network operators software developers regulatory bodies and others in over 35 countries committed to designing open technical standards for the global delivery of digital television and data services Services using DVB standards are available on every continent with more than 500 million DVB receivers deployed Digital Video Broadcasting Handheld A technical specification for bringing broadcast services to mobile handsets DVB H was formally adopted as ETSI standard EN 302 304 in November 2004 Digital Video Broadcasting baseline system for digital terrestrial television Digital Video Broadcasting Service Information See ANSI SCTE 21 See ANSI SCTE 20 ViBE EM4000 Release 1 10 User Manual 46073586AB02 DVS 706 EBU ECM ECMG EDI EIA 708 B EIT Elementary Stream EMC EMM Encryption EPG ES Ethernet ETSI EN 300 706 ViBE EM4000 Release 1 10 User Manual 46073586AB02 Glossary The Carriage of Vertical Blanking Information Data in North American Digital Television Bitstream Based on the ETSI EN 301 775 standard and provides extensions for the carriage of VBI data VBI data is carried in MPEG 2 packetized elementary stream PES packets as priva
224. n 0 0 0 0 and 255 255 255 255 Interface netmask value It must be between 0 0 0 0 and 255 255 255 255 Default gateway value It must be between 0 0 0 0 and 255 255 255 255 In the Interface State when disabled group box Interface Deactivation ViBE EM4000 Release 1 10 User Manual 46073586AB02 Operating mode for the IP interface when it is not enabled enabled disabled set to disabled Link Down The interface is not powered electrically Link Up No Traffic The interface is powered electrically but it does not support any traffic A ping sent to the interface will not get a response Link Up No Multicast The interface is powered electrically but no stream is sent to the network A ping sent to the interface will get a response The Interface Deactivation parameter value must be selected according to the redundancy scheme adopted In this release only the Link Up No Traffic mode is available 65 Chapter 4 Web Browser Interface Settings In the Interface State when standby group box Interface Status Status for the IP interface when the XMS XMU sets it to standby Disabled The interface status is set to Disabled see above Interface Deactivation parameter Unchanged The interface status is not modified Click Routing to display the routing configuration page for the LAN WAN ETH1 network interface Figure 4 15 Eth1 Out configuration Routing page IP Configuration Network In
225. n Mode Dolby Audio 90 Metadata Source Dolby Audio eeenesreennenne 90 Min Bitrate Video mms 81 Mirroring IP Transmission zeuessssnennennnnnnnen 71 Mixing Level Dolby Audio 93 Mode AUTO a assteisssteinntenssnsderenenskganhnanente 88 Mode IP interface nissan 65 Mosquito Noise Reducer Video 83 Mounting in Rack nsssssseessssrsrrssrsssressss 18 MPEG2 SIG ON Expert parameter 98 N Name EE E ETETE 74 Negotiation IP interface assesseer 65 Netmask IP interface uuuunnnsssnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn 65 NIT in PAT for ISO mode uuuunnnssasnaannnnnnn 68 No Audio CRC Expert parameter 99 Noise Reduction Video nissan 82 Number of MPEG packets per IP frame IP Tr RSMISSIGA ana 70 O Original Bitstream Dolby Audio asssssase2 93 ViBE EM4000 Release 1 10 User Manual 46073586AB02 Original Network Id and Transport Stream Id aa a Dennis hate tels tete disant ee 68 Output IP Transmission 69 P P Picture Period MN 78 Packet AAC Audio sans 89 Password i i d scccdeicditedaacavetescisisanvvieteenieneeass 55 PCM Reversion Source Audio v ccccccsseeeeeees 87 AUS SR EE EEE EE PEL EPP 76 PCER AUS PE i noon 88 PES per Field Expert parameter 00 98 Piet re D finitiQin sscccccccssssscsaisssaesssseesanaaeasans 77 Picture Resolution us 77 Picture Structure nn 77 Pride ete nnnanie 76 PID POR siatinenerarnerereemianses cases engeecateca
226. n networks a unit of data transmitted over a packet switching network A packet consists of a header followed by a number of contiguous bytes from an elementary data stream In transport streams a packet is a small fixed size data quantum Picture Adaptive Frame Field coding Allows a freely selected mixture of pictures coded either as complete frames where both fields are combined together for encoding or as individual single fields Program Association Table It lists all programs available in the MPEG 2 transport stream Each of the listed programs is identified by a 16 bit value called program_number Each of the programs listed in the PAT has an associated value of PID for its Program Map Table PMT Pulse Code Modulation PCM is a modulation technique It is a digital representation of an analog signal where the magnitude of the signal is sampled regularly at uniform intervals Every sample is quantized to a series of symbols in a digital code which is usually a binary code Program Clock Reference A time stamp used in digital video compression that indicates the system time clock s STC value the instant the time stamped packet leaves the encoder In the Moving Pictures Experts Group 2 MPEG 2 system the digital video source is clocked at 27 MHz and the decoder must generate the same 27 MHz clock so that the encoder and decoder clocks are synchronized These clocks are called System Time Clocks STC To synchronize the de
227. n the Presets page as follows Figure 4 44 Displaying predefined configurations Date and UTC time that the configuration was saved Stored predefined configurations x x x x 00000 x Add new configuration dom file Save active confiquration 0 KB del save amp nu 33 34 35 36 1 date time 14 03 985302788 14 03 985302788 14 03 985302788 14 03 985302788 09 02 985302789 Description given when the configuration was saved User configuration rights 23 54 19 23 57 36 23 56 24 23 58 18 04 23 22 user admin admin admin admin admin RO RO RO RO RW size 18Kb 18Kb 18Kb 18Kb 9Kb type Chassis Chassis Chassis Chassis EM Encoder description WBU ISOG_59 94_1080i WBU ISOG_59 94_720p WBU ISOG_50_1080i WBU ISOG_50_720p my encoder 2 No ofthe memory used Configurations predefined in factory WBU_ISOG Conf User who saved the configuration Configuration type Memory space used by the configuration 4 WBU ISOG configurations are stored in the Encoder on device shipment 1 per video standard and frequency with 1 audio AC3 passthrough 1 audio MPEG 1 Layer Il stereo They cannot be edited or deleted They enable the Operator to quickly configure the Encoder with standard settings The WBU_ISOG configurations configure only the components of the Encoder The Inputs Outputs IP TS etc must be configured separately VIB
228. n will be displayed m add xxxxxx as yyyyyyy User xxxxxx with the profile yyyyyyy has been successfully added If the operation is not successful the reason for failure will be displayed Deleting a User usrdel To delete a User type usrdel after the ViBE prompt ViBE EM4000 Release 1 10 33 User Manual 46073586AB02 Chapter 2 Installation and Startup Performing the Initial Settings Figure 2 17 Deleting a Web Interface User usrdel command 01x ViBE gt usrdel Al Remove user NAME osseuses techi remove techi Done ViBE gt J Enter the following fields m name name of User to be deleted The following information will be displayed remove xxxxx User xxxxx has been successfully deleted If the operation is not successful the reason for failure will be displayed Displaying the list of Users usrlist To display the list of Users and their profiles type usrlist after the ViBE prompt Figure 2 18 Displaying the list of Web Interface Users usrlist command i 10 12 54 29 PuTTY 15 x ViBE gt usrlist Users list 0 No User Profile 1 admin administrator 2 service service 3 technician technician 4 operator operator 5 guest guest 6 xms xms 7 user operator ViBE gt Jj The following information will be displayed m User User name Profile User profile Declaring Software options if required If software options need to be installed see the Servicing chapter
229. nage operation of these interfaces Saving a current configuration pdcsave To save a current configuration type pdcsave after the ViBE prompt Figure 5 28 Saving a current configuration via the Local Console pdcsave command LT lolx ViBE gt pdcsave Al Topology cuid 0 CHASSIS cuid 1 EM_ENCODER cuid 2 EM_ENCODER cuid to save 0 conf number 5 author PT comment EM4000_2 save cuid O in conf 5 OK ViBE gt fj Enter the following fields m cuid to save 0 The configurations of the chassis IP etc and Basic encoder parameters are saved chassis type configuration x The configuration of the Basic encoder x is saved EM Encoder type configuration m conf number enter the number assigned to the configuration 1 to 32 If the number is already being used the predefined configuration corresponding to this number will be overwritten Some numbers are reserved for predefined configurations stored at I the factory and can not be overwritten m author enter the name of the predefined configuration s author m comment enter a personal comment to identify the configuration The following information will be displayed m save cuid x in conf yy OK storage in memory has been performed successfully If the operation is not successful the save KO lt xxxx gt message will be displayed where xxxx indicates the reason for failure Loading a predefined configuration pdcload To
230. nfigurations which contain the configuration parameters concerning services and components all other parameters IP etc m EM Encoder type configurations which store the configuration parameters concerning services and components for one Basic encoder The User can m Set configurations m Save the active configuration m Recall predefined configurations stored in the device Delete predefined configurations stored in the device ViBE EM4000 Release 1 10 99 User Manual 46073586AB02 100 Chapter 4 Web Browser Interface Settings m Save predefined configuration files to disk m Load predefined configuration files stored on a disk The Presets command displays the following screen Figure 4 43 Presets page Configurations stored in the device Stored predefined confiqurations recall 00000 del x x x x x save 4 num _ date time access size tvpe description 33 14 03 985302788 23 54 19 admin RO 18Kb Chassis WBU IS0G_59 94_1080i 34 14 03 985302788 23 57 36 admin RO 18Kb Chassis WBU ISOG_59 94_720p 35 14 03 985302788 23 56 24 admin RO 18Kb Chassis WBU ISOG_50_1080i 36 14 03 985302788 23 58 18 admin RO 18Kb Chassis WBU ISOG_50_720p 1 09 02 985302789 04 23 22 admin RW 9Kb EM Encoder my encoder 2 Add new configuration from file Save active configuration 0 KB Displaying predefined configurations Configurations stored in the device are displayed o
231. nformation will be displayed 136 conf nb predefined configuration number conf type type of predefined configuration chassis or EM Encoder status USED indicates that the configuration is being used UNUSED if not author name of the configuration s author entered on creation of the predefined configuration comment comment entered on creation of the predefined configuration date UTC time and date when the configuration was created access mode configuration rights READ WRITE or READ ONLY size size of the memory used by the configuration data model release of the NCCP protocol ViBE EM4000 Release 1 10 User Manual 46073586AB02 Chapter 5 Servicing Operations performed using the Local Console To display the status size and creation date of all the predefined I configurations type 0 as the conf number value i andromede andromede app Dj x E ViBE gt pdeget conf number 0 for the list 1 64 for the description of a PDC 0 conf nb conf type status size date 01 EM Encoder USED OSKo 12 11 2011 23 05 12 zei 02 Chassis USED 15Ko 12 11 2011 23 15 08 03 UNUSED 04 UNUSED xl Managing community strings and SNMP agent information Foreword Community strings are identifiers that validate SNMP messages Community string principles are used in order to have a simplified access rights mechanism for SNMP requests Each community string is associated with an access level
232. ng a software option rmopt command 1 2 lolx ViBE gt rmopt Al Option id ff 2 Enterthe Option id ofthe option to be uninstalled Figure 5 23 Uninstalling a software option rmopt command 2 2 PTE EEE o E ViBE gt rmopt Option id 65 Remove option done ViBE gt fj E The remove option done message will be displayed to indicate that the option has been uninstalled Recovering lost keys If you lose a software option key please contact Thomson Video Networks Customer Services with m Option purchase order m Encoder equipment code m Ordering reference of the option relating to the lost key Managing software licenses Software licenses are managed via the Local Console Software license management follows the same procedures as software option management refer to section Managing software options on page 124 If software licenses are ordered with the product they will have been I installed in factory and be immediately available to the operator Example Displaying software licenses ViBE EM4000 Release 1 10 129 User Manual 46073586AB02 Chapter 5 Servicing Operations performed using the Local Console Figure 5 24 Displaying software license s Isopt command Software license 10 x El id ref status key comment nb 50 NEMS4H4A Installed 3238C8 One channel HD SD AVC encoding 4 51 NEMNS4FLE Installed 33Z2FB6 WAN LAN Flextream 4 52 NEMS4
233. ng the number of TSs at Encoder output on page 63 Figure 4 24 Basic encoder configuration page EM CONTROLLER Summary EM ENCODER 1 service1 1 i TV Service el Audio H264 512 pcr i 4128 4112 HD SDI SDI AUD1 SDI AUD2 Expert parameters OFF 1920x1080 8000 kbit s H MPEG 1 stereo 192 kbit s H AC3 ext dual ch 192 kbit s H The Basic encoder can be set by clicking the following links Table 4 6 Setting a Basic encoder link Description Service name Components Edit the service parameters Edit the component parameters Video audio or VBI add service add component Add a service to the Basic encoder Add a component video audio or VBI to the service A service must contain a video component Expert parameters xx Delete a service or component A video component can not be deleted if another component is in the service Edit the Expert parameters of the Basic encoder ViBE EM4000 Release 1 10 User Manual 46073586AB02 73 Chapter 4 Web Browser Interface Settings Editing a service Click Service name or add a service If a service is already configured add a service is not displayed Figure 4 25 Service Configuration General page Service Configuration General DPI Name service1 Type TV X Provider Service Id fa PID PMT 256 Running Status Running i submit reset This page is used to set g
234. not insert timestamp invalid picture header 66 Packet payload errors 66 Cannot reconstruct output stream 66 Transport_error_indicator set in packets 104 Stream error 110 Stream error 117 Stream error 137 No valid data 138 Data interface failure 147 Error in stream 147 Unknown error 147 Error in stream 155 TS Error 155 Decoder Stream Error MTEP syntax alarms matching this probable cause french 28 Taille paquet incorrecte 63 La r cuperation de l ent amp te du programme a chou 64 La r cuperation de l ent te du programme a chou 66 Erreur de Packet Continuity Error 66 Impossible d ins rer le timestamp ent te d image non valide 66 Erreurs sur les paquets MPEG 66 Impossible de reconstruire le flux de sortie 66 Transport_error_indicator mis 1 sur les paquets 104 Erreur de flux 110 Erreur de flux 117 Erreur de flux 137 Pas de donn es valides 138 Echec de l interface donn es 147 Erreur dans le flux 147 Erreur inconnue 147 Erreur de trame 155 Erreur de TS 155 Erreurs sur le flux desortie du codeur Page 74 Alarm Help X733 syntax 9 60 Probable Cause 1031 stream overflow Category Communications Default severity major Wording English Stream overflow Wording French Debordement du flux Diagnosis English Input rate is too high Diagnosis French Le d bit d entr e est trop lev Action
235. nsole Figure 5 38 Saving the list of SNMP communities csave command i 10 12 54 29 PuTTY 10 x ViBE gt csave al Save communities to file Done viBE gt fj The following information will be displayed m Save communities to file Done the save operation has been performed successfully If the contents of the community memory have not be edited by the transfer the following message will be displayed Communities already saved Q The Encoder must be rebooted for the changes to be applied ViBE EM4000 Release 1 10 141 User Manual 46073586AB02 Chapter 5 Servicing Preventive and corrective maintenance operations Preventive and corrective maintenance operations 142 Cleaning chassis ventilation grids If dust is left to build up on the Encoder ventilation grids the internal temperature of the chassis will rise and this will affect device performance service life and reliability You are therefore advised to regularly clean the ventilation grids approximately every year Replacing chassis fans The fans fitted in the chassis have a service life of 65 000 hours They should therefore be replaced every six years The fans also need to be replaced if one of them is faulty To perform these operations please contact Thomson Video Networks Customer Service Fault diagnosis The chassis features a monitoring device that feeds an alarm back to the Management or Monitoring System
236. ntact Customer Service for analysis and repair Action French S assurer que l unit d alimentation concern e est branch e dans le ch ssis que le cordon d alimentation est correctement raccord et que l interrupteur est en position marche ON Autre action possible mettre hors tension l unit d alimentation concern e puis la remettre sous tension Si l alarme se produit de nouveau remplacer l unit d alimentation concern e et dans tous les cas contacter le Service Clients pour analyse et r paration Automatic redundancy Current autobackup Impossible Upstream autobackup Selectable The following device s can raise this probable cause DBE 2100 1 external video 4 audios DBE 2110 1 internal video 4 audios DBE 2120 8 audios DBE 2120 12 audios DBE 2110 1 internal video 8 audios DBE 2120 4 audios DBE 4110 DSNG DBE 4120 Contribution DBE 4130 Broadcast SSEB DSS MSE DBE 4140 Local insertion DBX 2200 4 TS inputs Page 60 Alarm Help X733 syntax 9 60 DBX 2200 8 TS inputs DBX 2200 12 TS inputs MUXEMB DSS 23 TS inputs DBX 4300 6 to 26 TS inputs Vecima VistaLynx QAM Sandar EM4000 Dual Channel EM4000 Quad Channel EM4000 Hexa Channel EM4000 Octal Channel DM3200 6400 ViBE Gecko 8900FFN Gecko 8900TFN V Cisco Catalyst 2960 Cisco Catalyst 3560 3750 SD Encoder MTEP syntax alarms matching this probable cause english 5 Alimentation alarm Code 3 66 Power supply or process failure
237. ntax 9 60 Probable Cause 1051 no TC in signal Category Communications Default severity warning Wording English No TC in signal Wording French Pas de TC dans le signal Diagnosis English Time Code VITC DVITC not detected Diagnosis French Time Code VITC DVITC non d tect Action English Check input signal Action French V rifier le signal d entr e Automatic redundancy Current autobackup Impossible Upstream autobackup Selectable The following device s can raise this probable cause DBE 4110 DSNG DBE 4120 Contribution DBE 4130 Broadcast SSEB DSS MSE DBE 4140 Local insertion Audio Video Acquisition ViBE EM3000 MPEG4 EM4000 Dual Channel EM4000 Quad Channel EM4000 Hexa Channel EM4000 Octal Channel ViBE Encoder ViBE Decoder SD Encoder MTEP syntax alarms matching this probable cause english 26 No VITC DVITC Time Code 105 no TC in signal 107 no TC in signal 109 no TC in signal 132 No expected VITC analog TC Page 51 Alarm Help X733 syntax 9 60 MTEP syntax alarms matching this probable cause french 26 Pas de time code dans le signal VITC DVITC 105 Pas de TC dans le signal 107 Pas de TC dans le signal 109 Pas de TC dans le signal 132 Absence VITC Page 52 Alarm Help X733 syntax 9 60 Probable Cause 1046 no teletext in signal Category Communications Default severity warning Wording English No te
238. oad version XMS_04 50 00 Devices Software Release Devices to upgrade Add Remove Update All Device Address Family Status 0 e jaget 10 12 54 9 OK SW status read e EM4000 10 12 54 si OK SW status read Remove Unstall inactive software Full Update Download only View or Toggle Uninstall inactive software 2 Select Uninstall inactive software The following window will be displayed Figure 6 17 Uninstall an inactive software Download application 2 2 Uninstall Inactive software for EM4000 Bi ol x Check device to uninstall selected inactive software Select Devices Board DeviceType Active SW Inactive SW EM400x EM4000 01 00 01 001_T EM4000_01 00 00 020_RC EM4000_01 00 00 EM4000_01 00 00 019_RC Check the box EM4000 01 00 00 020 RC EM4000_01 00 01 001 Inactive software to uninstall Refresh OK 3 Select the Inactive SW to be uninstalled and check the box to select the device 4 Click OK Control Panel All Control Panel Items Display and switch to 100 9 On a Windows 7 platform ifthe OK button is not displayed go to Then click Apply and log off log on OOE gt comreifane AucontolPenaihems Opiy File Edit View Tools Help Control Panel Home Reais P Make it easier to read what s on your screen You can change the size of text and other items on your screen by choosing one of these options To
239. oftware release Toggle done The toggle command has been sent No need to update The device does not require an upgrade Error messages The following error messages may be displayed in the Status column on the Devices page Table 6 2 Error messages Download application Error messages Indications Failed Connection error Impossible to set up the session The Encoder is unavailable or in the process of rebooting Failed Login rejected Too many Too many applications are open connections 156 VIBE EM4000 Release 1 10 User Manual 46073586AB02 Chapter 6 Tools Download application Table 6 2 Error messages Download application Error messages Indications Failed No answer from some boards Impossible to execute the command as some installed boards are not responding Aborted Already downloading Impossible to execute the command as downloading is in progress Failed Software error Software error in the ViBE Download application Failed Impossible to connect Failed SW not found in inactive bank for X function s The connection has been lost Impossible to toggle banks as inactive bank does not contain the required software ViBE EM4000 Release 1 10 User Manual 46073586AB02 157 Chapter 6 Tools Download application BLANK PAGE 158 VIBE EM4000 Release 1 10 User Manual 46073586AB
240. ol A connectionless protocol like TCP that runs on top of IP networks Unlike TCP IP UDP IP provides very few error recovery services offering instead a direct way to send and receive datagrams over an IP network without acknowledgement for guaranteed delivery Unicast is communication between a single sender and a single receiver over a network Coordinated Universal Time UTC is the time standard by which the world regulates clocks and time In casual use UTC corresponds to Greenwich Mean Time or GMT ViBE EM4000 Release 1 10 User Manual 46073586AB02 VANC VBI VBR VBV VCT VGA VITC VITS VLAN VPS Weighted prediction Glossary Vertical Ancillary Ancillary packets located in the vertical blanking interval Vertical Blanking Interval In analog video the interval after the last displayed line of video in a field and before the first displayed line of video in the next field during which a television receiver will synchronize vertically Variable Bit Rate VBR is an encoding method that is designed to achieve a better video quality vs bitrate ratio than CBR Constant Bit Rate encoding This is achieved by continuously changing the bit rate during the encoding process depending on the picture complexity Refer to Statmux Video Buffering Verifier The video buffering verifier is a theoretical MPEG video buffer model used to ensure that an encoded video stream can be correctly buffered and
241. ommunity strings clist 139 Adding a community string cadd uuusssenennnnennnnnnnnn 140 Deleting a community string cdel 140 Saving the list of community strings csave 140 Preventive and corrective maintenance operations 142 Cleaning chassis ventilation grids 142 8 ViBE EM4000 Release 1 10 User Manual 46073586AB02 Contents Replacing chassis fansa nun 142 Chapter 6 MOONS a ee ende enormen 143 Download application VU 144 VEN NN en ee a er 144 A ATV een 144 Installing and running the application 144 Installing the application 144 Running the application 146 Screen description 147 Download procedure 148 Uninstall an inactive software unnsssssnsnennnnnennnnnnnnnnnnnnn nn 153 Other application commands 444sss4snnnnnnnnnnnnennnn nenn 155 Status MessagesS unesennennnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnennnnnnannnnnnnnn 155 Error messages 156 Appendix A Technical Specifications 159 General Device Specifications 160 Electrical Specitications ae 160 POWEr SUPDIY kin san ee en 160 Power Consumption ss 160 Mechanical Features non nn nn n nennen nennen 161 DIMENSIONS ics riaa oa E E teens ess anse 161 Weight inisiasi ae 162 Ventilation ses 162 Heat dissipating power 162 Reliability sors ee 163 Interface
242. on Quantity Name NEMS4H4A 0 One channel HD SD AVC encoding NEMS4FLA 0 WAN LAN Flextream NEMS4FLE 0 LAN Flextream NEMS4D51 0 DD DD surround encoding 1x5 1 3x2 0 NEMS4DDE 0 Dolby E decoding NEMS4DOL 0 DD DD stereo encoding NEMS4AAC 0 AAC stereo encoding NEMS4A51 0 AAC HE surround encoding 1x5 1 3x2 0 NEMS4MP1 0 MPEG1 L2 stereo encoding L Software Active packages EM4000 01 00 00 008 Inactive packages EM4000 00 00 04 001 __MAIN Board Board Type MAIN Board Prod Unit Part Number NEM40IN2 Product Serial Number Main Unit Part Number Main Serial Number Equipment Code 3B0A Hardware Level 0 Prod Unit Variant Number Power2 Product Unit Variant Power2 Option Unit Part Number AES Board Unit Part Number AES Option Unit Part Number __ENCODING Board 1 Board Type ENCODING Board Prod Unit Part Number Product Serial Number Main Unit Part Number Main Serial Number Hardware Level o The ENCODING Board number depends on the Encoder type In the Hardware Installed options group box NXXXXXXX Reference quantity and name of the hardware option s declared in the Encoder ViBE EM4000 Release 1 10 61 User Manual 46073586AB02 Chapter 4 Web Browser Interface Status of the device 62 In the Software Installed options group box NXXXXXXX Reference quantity and name of the software option s declared in the Encoder In the Software group box Active package Inactive packages Software ve
243. on page 18 related to cabling see section Cabling on page 23 related to EMC ground see section EMC Ground on page 23 related to Power supply and protective ground see section Power Supply and Protective Ground on page 24 Ventilation Please note that product failure rates are increased by high temperatures The following precautions should therefore be observed Prevent hot air from one device being introduced into other devices Ensure adequate distribution of air flows to the device intakes Avoid the effects of natural convection between devices Avoid hot cold air short circuits Avoid transverse effects in coupled racks Prevent hot air from accumulating in the rack Check the air flows the rack should ensure a sufficient supply of cold air and sufficient evacuation of hot air according to the number of devices mounted in the rack and their corresponding air flows The following important requirements should be noted in addition to the general recommendations 18 VIBE EM4000 Release 1 10 User Manual 46073586AB02 Chapter 2 Installation and Startup Mounting in Rack m The device must be installed in a room with low dust levels The maximum density of dust in the air must not exceed 100ug m and the maximum number of particles with a diameter greater than 1um must not exceed 1 million m To prevent the power supply from overheating remember to regularly clean the rack filter if
244. or Dolby Digital Plus 5 1 audio can be encoded at the same time 8 Dolby E streams can be decoded at the same time The Audio component General page will be displayed The Input group box of the General page depends on the audio Input Format Dolby E Audio PCM or Precompressed ViBE EM4000 Release 1 10 83 User Manual 46073586AB02 Chapter 4 Web Browser Interface Settings Figure 4 32 Editing an audio component General page INPUT INPUT Input Format AudioPCM Input Format Precompressed Source SDI Group 1 Channel M source 3D1 Group 1 Channel gt SD1 Group 1 Channelt auto switch mode FF soi Group 1 Channel 1 gt SDI Group 1 Channel 1 Audio Configuration AUD1 General AAC Dolby Misc INPUT Input Format Pave Dolby E Decoder ID CE to 4 Dolby E Program Number 1 1104 Source SDI Group 1 Channel1 Auto Switch Mode O SDI Group 1 Channel 1 OUTPUT Standard Dolby Digital AC 3 7 Mode 3 2L 5 1 Surround z N A s PID 258 2 to 819 s o Status On Air gt Bsl 2 Bsr Rate 384 kbit s This page is used to set general audio component parameters In the Input group box Input format Dolby E Input Format Used to indicate the format of the de embedded audio Choice between Dolby E Audio PCM Precompressed Dolby E Decoder ID Used to indicate the Dolby E decoder which must be used 84 ViBE EM4000 Re
245. or an Encoder or a group of Encoders Full upgrade downloading toggling Downloading only Device firmware upgrades can also be performed via the XMS I eXtended Management System Refer to the XMS User Manual Operation Installing and running the application Installing the application To install the Download application 1 Copy the DownloadSetup exe file on the PC s hard drive 144 ViBE EM4000 Release 1 10 User Manual 46073586AB02 Chapter 6 Tools Download application 2 Launch DownloadSetup exe to install the Download application The following window will be displayed Figure 6 1 Installation Download application 1 4 6 xMS3500DownloadSetup io x Welcome to the XMU ViBe SD VIiBE HD NetProcessor Video Adapter version XMS_04 50 00 Download application setup This program lets you download softwares to XMU ViBE SD VIBE HD NetProcessor and Video Adapter products Click Next to continue or Cancel to exit Setup xms caen 3 Click Next The following window will be displayed Figure 6 2 Installation Download application 2 4 f XMS3500DownloadSetup 10l x Select Destination Location c Where should xMU ViBe SD ViBE HD NetProcessor Video Adapter Download xms application be installed Setup will install XMU ViBe SD YiBE HD NetProcessor Video Adapter Download application into the following folder To continue click Next If you would like to sel
246. ordinates in the decoded picture to the coordinates in a reference picture MP ML Main Profile at Main Level A subset of the MPEG 2 standard which supports transmissions up to 15 Mbit s MP HL Main Profile at High Level A subset of the MPEG 2 standard which supports transmissions up to 80 Mbit s MPEG Moving Pictures Experts Group An international standards setting group working to develop standards for compressed full motion video audio and other associated information Current standards are MPEG 1 MPEG 2 and MPEG 4 MPEG 2 Industry standard for video and audio source coding using compression and multiplexing techniques to minimize video signal bit rate in preparation for broadcasting Specified in ISO IEC 13818 The standard is split into layers and profiles defining bit rates and picture resolutions MPEG 4 Industry standard for video and audio source coding using compression and multiplexing techniques to minimize video signal bit rate in preparation for broadcasting Specified in ISO IEC 14496 Part 2 of this standard defines the original MPEG 4 video compression whereas Part 10 is the new algorithm also known as H264 MPTS Multiprogram Transport Stream Multicast Process where a single stream is served from one source to multiple receivers The multicast address range is 224 0 0 0 239 255 255 255 Multiplex The combination of two or more signals into one single output stream A number of discrete data streams typically 8 to
247. orrect but it is recommended to work in Full Duplex Mode Action French Le flux de transmission et de r ception pourrait tre correct mais il est recommand de travailler en mode full duplex Automatic redundancy Current autobackup Impossible Upstream autobackup Impossible The following device s can raise this probable cause Net Processor 9030 Net Processor 9040 Net Feeder 9010 ViBE EM3000 MPEG4 EM4000 Dual Channel EM4000 Quad Channel EM4000 Hexa Channel EM4000 Octal Channel ViBE Encoder ViBE Front End 100BT SD Encoder MTEP syntax alarms matching this probable cause english 111 Half duplex mode 116 Half duplex mode Page 22 Alarm Help X733 syntax 9 60 MTEP syntax alarms matching this probable cause french 111 Mode half duplex 116 Mode half duplex Page 23 Alarm Help X733 syntax 9 60 Probable Cause 1075 hardware failure Category Equipment Default severity critical Wording English Hardware failure Wording French D faillance mat rielle Diagnosis English One or more key hardware modules of the unit are not responding Diagnosis French Un ou plusieurs modules mat riels cl s de la carte ne r pondent pas Action English Reboot the equipment If the alarm registers again contact Customer Service Action French Rebooter l quipement Si l alarme est toujours lev e contacter le Service Clients Automatic redundancy Current autobackup Selec
248. osed Captions and Non Real Time Sampled Video It defines how to implement VBI Vertical Blanking Interval services using the user data field of the picture layer ofthe MPEG 2 video bitstream and according to ISO IEC 13818 2 The Standard for Carriage of NTSC VBI Data in Cable Digital Transport Stream It defines a standard for the carriage of VBI services in MPEG 2 compliant bitstreams constructed according to ISO IEC 13818 2 Association of Radio Industries and Businesses ARIB is a standardization organization in Japan It is a designated center for the promotion of efficient use of the radio spectrum and frequency change support agency Its activities include those previously performed by the Research and Development Center for Radio Systems RCR and Broadcasting Technology Association BTA Address Resolution Protocol Internet protocol used to map an IP address to physical hardware addresses on local area networks Asynchronous Serial Interface Advanced Television Standards Committee ATSC is a set of standards developed for digital television transmission over terrestrial cable and satellite networks for the USA Advanced Video Coding Bidirectional Frame A frame type in the MPEG compression scheme that is predicted from past and future reference frames An audio signal that consists of two wires carrying an audio signal in anti phase with each other Balanced audio has greater ability to reject interference Bouq
249. osen on the Software Release page in each selected device If the file is already in the device active bank no operation will be performed If it is in the inactive bank this command will toggle it into the active bank If this file is neither the active bank nor the inactive bank the file will be downloaded into the inactive bank and then toggled into the active bank m Download only command For each selected device this command checks whether the file selected on the Software Release page is in the active or inactive bank If it cannot be found the file will be downloaded into the inactive bank m View or Toggle command The View or Toggle command will be grayed out unavailable if several Encoders have been selected This command displays the software releases of the active and inactive banks for the selected Encoder and is used to toggle between these active and inactive banks Figure 6 14 View or Toggle command Download application Yiew or Toggle smart boards Devices for EM4000 loj x Check smart boards devices to toggle amp reboot Slot Devices Board DeviceType Active SW Inactive SW m EM400x EM4000 01 00 00 0070 EM4000_01 00 00 004 TECONA Check the box Inactive software release to active Refresh OK To toggle between the active and inactive banks 1 If necessary select the inactive software release to active 152 VIBE EM4000 Release 1 10 User Manual 46073586AB02 Chapter 6
250. ounting in Rack on page 18 ist daf r zu sorgen dass die vom Hersteller vorgeschriebene maximale Betriebstemperatur nicht berschritten wird Temperaturangaben siehe Abschnitt Technische Daten des Benutzerhandbuchs ViBE EM4000 Release 1 10 207 User Manual 46073586AB02 Appendix B Safety Instructions Gefahr STROMKREIS BERLASTUNG Beim Anschluss des Ger ts an den Stromkreis sind die eventuellen Auswirkungen einer Stromkreis berlastung auf den berstromschutz und die elektrischen Leitungen zu ber cksichtigen ORDNUNGSGEM RE ERDUNG Rack montierte Ger te sind vorschriftsm ig zu erden Hierbei ist besonders auf Netzanschl sse ohne direkten Anschluss an den Abzweigstromkreis zu achten z B bei der Verwendung von Mehrfachsteckdosen VERWENDUNG VON L PROFILEN Zur ordnungsgem en Anbringung des Ger ts im Rack sind neben den Trag sen L Profile zu verwenden Beim Einbau sind die im Abschnitt section Mounting in Rack on page 18 angef hrten Sicherheitshinweise und Bel ftungsanweisungen zu beachten SICHERHEITSMARNAHMEN BEIM EIN AUSBAU Zur Vermeidung von Verletzungen beim Ein und Ausbau des Ger ts in das bzw aus dem Rack sind alle erforderlichen Vorsichtsma nahmen zu treffen Es sollte eine weitere Person um Hilfe gebeten oder eine entsprechende Hubvorrichtung verwendet werden Sicherheitshinweise bez glich des Betriebs GER TEBETRIEB IN EXPLOSIONSGESCH TZTER UMGEBUNG Zur V
251. page HD Video Configuration General Advanced AVC Advanced MPEG 2 HD VBI Misc VBR PreProc Source HD SDI Default Pattern Black Pattern gt Standard 10801 z Frequency Area oz S Profile HP L4 H264 High Profile x Compression Delay Long 249 fields 4 9 s 7 Rate 8000 kbit s PID 512 PCR On Status On Air submit reset This page is used to set general component parameters Source Default Pattern Standard Frequency Area Format ViBE EM4000 Release 1 10 User Manual 46073586AB02 Used to select the video source to be encoded Choice between HD SDI HD SDI input on the device rear panel Pattern Pattern selected in the Default Pattern field below Used to select the pattern that will be displayed if no video component is present at Encoder input or if Pattern has been selected in the Source field above Choice between Black Pattern or Bar Pattern Used to select the video standard at Encoder input Choice between 1080i and 720p Changing this parameter stops the outgoing I video signal for approximately 5 to 10 seconds Used to select the video field frequency at Encoder input Choice between 50 Hz and 59 94 Hz Changing this parameter stops the outgoing video signal for approximately 5 to 10 seconds Only the 16 9 format is available 75 Chapter 4 Web Browser Interface Settings 76 Profile Compression Delay Rate
252. page as the page displayed by clicking on the logo Refer to section Status Summary page on page 58 Alarms command This command displays the page of alarms raised on the device Figure 4 8 Description of Alarms EM CONTROLLER Alarms Major LAN WAN1 Link down Help Major LAN WAN2 Link down Help Major ENC 1 VIDEO INPUT Loss of signal Help Major ENC 2 VIDEO INPUT Loss of signal Help Alarm location Alarm severity Cause of the alarm Critical Major or Warning Click Help associated with an alarm to display the details of the alarm 60 ViBE EM4000 Release 1 10 User Manual 46073586AB02 Chapter 4 Web Browser Interface Status of the device Figure 4 9 Alarm details EY http 172 16 15 117 files alr_liste_complete html Microsoft Internet Explorer provider Cause Detected silence on right channel Cause Identification Pb Cause 1026 Alarm Category t Category Communications Possible cause Cause Silence detected on right channel Action to be taken T Action Check input signal level or increase delay for silence detection HW SW information command This command displays device Hardware and Software information Figure 4 10 HW SW information EM CONTROLLER HW SW Information Hardware Installed options Option Quantity Name NEMH4PSU 0 Additional PSU Software Installed options Opti
253. performing motion compensation and providing a significant benefit in performance in special cases such as fade to black fade in and cross fade transitions ViBE EM4000 Release 1 10 247 User Manual 46073586AB02 Glossary WSS WST Y Luminance 248 Wide Screen Signalling WSS is digital information embedded in the TV signal describing the qualities of the broadcast in particular the intended aspect ratio of the image This can be used by a widescreen TV to switch to the correct display mode The WSS signal is placed in line 23 PAL and lines 20 283 PALM and NTSC and has 14 data bits World System Teletext WST is the name of a standard for encoding and displaying teletext information which is used in 625 line 50 Hz television systems ITUR 653 It is used for teletext throughout Europe today The actual version of the WST is Word System B Defines the brightness of a TV picture ViBE EM4000 Release 1 10 User Manual 46073586AB02 Numerics 1 MPTS channel TS seniii 63 1 MPTS shelf TS een 63 A A D Converter Type Dolby Audio 94 AC Mains power supply cord s 24 AC3 stream type Expert parameter 99 Accessing the Local Console 27 Accessing the Local Console Login 27 Active configuration saving ss 104 AD Output Stream Audio description 89 Adaptive Filter Video cssscecccsssssteeeesseees 82 Adaptive
254. plexing The following components are multiplexed a Video Audio VBI Signaling Component PID allocation PSI SI rule compliant A component PID is automatically allocated by the encoder but it can be set manually Number of services and components Service 1 generated per Basic encoder a Video component 1 per service Audio components up to 12 stereos per device a VBI component 1 HD Teletext VIBE EM4000 Release 1 10 User Manual 46073586AB02 Appendix A Technical Specifications Features HD Video encoding Input HD video encoding formats Table A 12 HD video encoding formats Mode Vertical Horizontal Frame Rate Resolution Resolution Fps Interlaced 1080i 1920 1440 1280 29 97 interlaced 960 Interlaced 1080i 1920 1440 1280 25 interlaced 960 Progressive 720p 1280 960 640 59 94 progressive Progressive 720p 1280 960 640 50 progressive HD Video preprocessing Video compression provided by the ViBE EM4000 Encoder is designed to eliminate intra frame and inter frame redundancy Any phenomenon such as noise which reduces the original picture redundancy will have a negative effect on encoding Noise is particularly disadvantageous as it adds high frequencies to the picture and the encoder is then unable to distinguish these high frequencies from the useful information The same applies to picture sequences where high frequency spatial texture noticeably increases enco
255. port The Basic encoders number depends on the Encoder type On this page m The Encoder name is set on the Maintenance Identification page See section Configuring the names of the Encoder and Basic encoders on page 110 m Click the service name link to display the encoded service configuration page See section Editing a service on page 74 m Click a component link to display the component configuration page See section Editing an HD video component on page 75 section Editing an Audio component on page 83 or section Editing a VBI HD component on page 96 m Click the Ethx Out link Physical output to display the IP Physical output configuration page See section LAN WAN network interface Eth1 on page 64 m Click the TS ID link to display the TS and IP Encapsulation configuration page This page can only be accessed via this Status Summary page and is described below ViBE EM4000 Release 1 10 59 User Manual 46073586AB02 Chapter 4 Web Browser Interface Status of the device Status ofthe device The following section will explain how to display the status of the device To display the Summary Alarms and HW SW Information pages click Status on the Menu bar Figure 4 7 Status menu Status menu Status Configuration Presets Maintenance BE M4002 EM CONTROLLER i Summary bay Alarms gt HW SW Information Summary command This command displays the same
256. pply Ordering reference NEMH4PSUAA This option must be ordered at the same time as the Encoder When the additional AC Power Supply is installed the two AC Power Supplies are automatically redundant Software options Audio options MPEG 1 Layer Il audio encoding Ordering reference NEMS4MP1AA This option enables MPEG 1 LII encoding capability for one stereo 2 0 Up to 12 MPEG 1 Layer II audio encoding options can be installed per chassis NEM40IN2AA Up to 24 MPEG 1 Layer II audio encoding options can be installed per chassis NEM40IN4AA Table A 15 MPEG 1 Layer Il encoding audio bitrates Mode Bitrates kbit s Mono 64 80 96 112 128 Stereo Joint stereo Dual channels 128 160 192 224 256 ViBE EM4000 Release 1 10 185 User Manual 46073586AB02 Appendix A Technical Specifications Options 186 Dolby Digital AC3 Dolby Digital Plus E AC3 2 0 encoding Ordering reference NEMS4DOLAA This option enables Dolby encoding capability for one stereo 2 0 Up to 12 Dolby Digital AC3 Dolby Digital Plus E AC3 2 0 encoding options can be installed per chassis NEM40IN2AA Up to 24 Dolby Digital AC3 Dolby Digital Plus E AC3 2 0 encoding options can be installed per chassis NEM40IN4AA Table A 16 Dolby Digital AC3 Dolby Digital Plus E AC3 2 0 encoding audio bitrates Mode Bitrates kbit s Mono 32 48 64 Stereo 192 224 256 384 448 Table A 17 Dolby Digital P
257. public rw private ViBE gt J The following information will be displayed m Rights community rights ro read only authorized and rw read write authorized m Community community name If the list has been edited beforehand using the cdel or cadd commands but has not been saved using the csave command the following question will be displayed do you want to discard changes Y N lt N gt Type Y to reset the temporary list viewed using clist with the contents of the community string memory the previous changes will be deleted or type N to cancel the operation without applying the changes Displaying the list of temporary community strings clist To display the list of temporary community strings type clist after the VIBE prompt Figure 5 35 Displaying temporary community strings clist command ViBE gt clist LT lolx al Communities that can be used to access the agent Rights Community ro public rw private ViBE gt Jj The following information will be displayed m Rights community rights ro read only authorized and rw read write authorized m Community community name If the list has been edited beforehand using the cdel or cadd commands but has not been saved using the csave command the following message will be displayed lt don t forget to save changes gt ViBE EM4000 Release 1 10 139 User Manual 46073586AB02 Chapter 5 Servicing Operations performed using the
258. put 63 Configuring LAN WAN network interfaces 64 LAN WAN network interface Eth cceeeeseeeeeeeeeeees 64 LAN WAN network interface Eth2 uusennnnsnnnnnnnennnnnnnnnn 67 Configuring TS streams and IP encapsulation 67 Configuring Expert Parameters sssssessssssesrrnrnssssrrrrrnnessene 71 Setting a Basic ENCOdEn anna 72 Basic encoder configuration uu22sssennnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn 72 Editing service drsi iaga ee 74 Editing an HD video component cette 75 Editing an Audio component ee 83 Editing a VBI HD component e eect 96 Adding a PMT descriptor 96 Editing Expert parameters nn 97 Predefined Configurations 99 Overview of predefined configurations 99 Displaying predefined configurations 100 Configurations predefined in factory WBU_ISOG Conf 100 WBU ISOG configuration specifications sssesseseee 101 Save Recall Configur ati ns unsueueuseneunuennn 104 Saving the active configuration in the device 104 Recalling a configuration stored in the device 105 Deleting a predefined configuration from the device 106 Saving a configuration file to disk sses 106 Loading a predefined configuration file from a disk 107 Ma lnlen nte aan 109 Rebooting the Encoder Ran nano nano nn n anna 109 Configuring the names of the Encoder and Basic encoders 110 Save Load Encoder s
259. r Category Communications Default severity major Wording English Stream error Wording French Erreur de flux Diagnosis English Error in stream Diagnosis French Erreur dans le flux Action English Check input stream Action French Contacter le Service Client Automatic redundancy Current autobackup Impossible Upstream autobackup Impossible The following device s can raise this probable cause DBX 2200 4 TS inputs DBX 2200 12 TS inputs Newtec QPSK 2077 Hx Barco Quasar without RF converter Barco Agile Quasar VHF Barco Quasar MKII without RF converter Barco Agile Quasar MKII VHF Newtec QPSK 2077 Fx Newtec QPSK 2177 EM4000 Dual Channel EM4000 Hexa Channel Integrated Receiver Decoder RD 1002 Rate Shaper ViBE Decoder DBX 2200 8 TS inputs Newtec QPSK 2080 Newtec QPSK 2077 Sx Barco Channelized Quasar Barco Agile Quasar UHF Barco Channelized Quasar MKII Barco Agile Quasar MKII UHF Barco Agile Quasar MKII Full Band ViBE EM3000 MPEG4 EM4000 Quad Channel EM4000 Octal Channel RD 1000 Jade ViBE Encoder ViBE Front End PDH Alarm Help X733 syntax 9 60 ViBE Front End 100BT ViBE Front End ASI RD 5000 HD SD HDD 8200 RD 3000 Opal MTEP syntax alarms matching this probable cause english 28 Bad packet size 63 Request to get the program headers failed 64 Request to get the program headers failed 66 Packet continuity counter error 66 Can
260. r mechanism for cable connection EMC and Security according to IEEE 802 3 2002 Permissible output jitter according to IEEE 802 3 2002 Input jitter tolerance according to IEEE 802 3 2002 Pinout and indication L i 8 1 Pin number Name 1 TDP Transmitted Data 2 TDN Transmitted Data 3 RDP ReceivedData 4 5 Not connected 6 0 JRDN Received Data 78 Notconnected gt Leds indicate Speed and Activity of the link Mode 10 Led 100 Led No link Off Off 10BT Half Duplex out of operation Yellow Off 10BT Half Duplex in operation Flashing Off Yellow 10BT Full Duplex out of operation Green Off 10BT Full Duplex in operation Flashing Off Green 100 BT Half Duplex out of operation Off Yellow 100 BT Half Duplex in operation Off Flashing Yellow 100 BT Full Duplex out of operation Off Green 100 BT Full Duplex in operation Off Flashing Green 169 Appendix A Technical Specifications Features Features 170 MPEG system layer Table A 11 MPEG system layer specifications Parameter Description System layer MPEG 4 ISO IEC 13818 1 amp Amendment 3 Transport of AVC video data over ITU T Rec H 222 0 compliant Additional service component formats DVB compliant ETSI 101154 v1 8 1 VBI anc data Signaling ISO Signaling PAT CAT PMT a DVB Signaling ISO SDT NIT TDT TOT EIT p f MPEG TS bitrate 1 to 54 Mbit s in 1 bit s increments Multi
261. r to I Frame ID Identifier IDR Instantaneous Decoding Refresh IDR pictures can be decoded without reference to previous frames IEC International Electrotechnical Committee IGMP Internet Group Management Protocol IGMP is acommunication protocol used by hosts and adjacent routers on IP networks to establish multicast group memberships There are three versions of IGMP as defined by Request for Comments RFC documents of the Internet Engineering Task Force IETF IGMPv1 is defined by RFC 1112 IGMPv2 is defined by RFC 2236 and IGMPv3 was initially defined by RFC 3376 but has since been superseded by RFC 4604 IP Internet Protocol IP Address A 32 bit IPv4 or 128 bit IPv6 numerical identifier for a specific TCP IP host device on a network that represents the sender or receiver of information sent across the network IRD Integrated Receiver Decoder The IRD is the official name for the satellite receiver which has a built in decoder for unscrambling subscription channels Also known as a Set Top Box for cable ISO International Standards Organization ViBE EM4000 Release 1 10 239 User Manual 46073586AB02 Glossary ITU R ITU T Joint Stereo JPEG JVT kbit s LATM LC AAC LCD LED LOAS Macroblock MBAFF Mbit s MGT 240 International Telecommunications Union Radio Formerly CCIR Deals with the standardization of wireless communication International Telecommunications Union
262. rameter enabled in 5 0 or 5 1 mode is used to select the level shift applied to the Center channel when adding to the left and right outputs as a result of downmixing to an Lt Rt output Choice between 1 414 3 0 dB 1 189 1 5 dB 1 000 0 0 dB 0 841 1 5dB 0 707 3 dB 0 595 4 5 dB 0 500 6 0dB Default value 0 707 3 dB This parameter enabled in 5 0 or 5 1 mode is used to select the level shift applied to the Surround channels when downmixing to an Lt Rt output Choice between 0 841 1 5dB 0 707 3 dB 0 595 4 5 dB 0 500 6 0dB Default value 0 707 3 dB This parameter enabled in 5 0 or 5 1 mode is used to select the level shift applied to the Center channel when adding to the left and right outputs as a result of downmixing to an Lo Ro output Choice between 1 414 3 0 dB 1 189 1 5 dB 1 000 0 0 dB 0 841 1 5dB 0 707 3 dB 0 595 4 5 dB 0 500 6 0dB Default value 0 707 3 dB This parameter enabled in 5 0 or 5 1 mode is used to select the level shift applied to the Surround channels when downmixing to an Lo Ro output Choice between 0 841 1 5dB 0 707 3 dB 0 595 4 5 dB 0 500 6 0dB Default value 0 707 3 dB On the Dolby page click the Metadata Parameters 2 tab to display the 2nd Dolby Metadata configuration page ViBE EM4000 Release 1 10 User Manual 46073586AB02 Chapter 4 Web Browser Interface Settings Figure 4 36 Edit
263. rate AAC Advanced Audio Compression algorithm that has been ratified for both MPEG 2 ISO IEC 11818 7 and MPEG 4 ISO IEC 14496 3 AAC LC Low Complexity Advanced Audio Coding AC 3 Audio Coding 3 AC 3 is a digital audio encoding also called Dolby Digital technique developed by Dolby for multi channel sound applications ADTS Audio Data Transport Stream ADTS is a method for encapsulating AAC bitstreams into transport streams AAC bitstream is packaged in a streaming format called Audio Data Transport Stream ADTS consisting of a series of frames each frame having a header followed by the AAC audio data AES Audio Engineering Society Professional organization of electrical engineers whose concern is with the standards of audio engineering AFD Active Format Descriptor Standard set of codes that can be sent in the MPEG video stream or in the baseband SDI video signal that carries information about their aspect ratio and active picture characteristics AGC Automatic Gain Control AMOL I and Il Automatic Measure of Lineups Data inserted in the VBI lines and used by automated equipment to measure program viewing ratings NTSC AMOL 48 bits line AMOL II 96 bits line VIBE EM4000 Release 1 10 233 User Manual 46073586AB02 Glossary ANSI SCTE 20 ANSI SCTE 21 ARIB ARP ASI ATSC AVC B Frame Balanced Audio BAT BISS Bouquet Buffer CA CABAC 234 Methods for Carriage of Cl
264. recommended not to look directly at the optical connector when the device is switched on or the end of the fibre connected to it The laser characteristics are as follows For 1000BASE SX ordering reference NIOOGSFOGA Class1 850 nm maximum optical output power OdBm AVAGO AFBR 5710LZ CDRH 9720151 13 TUV e9971083 07 UL e173874 For 1000BASE LX ordering reference N900GSF1GA Class1 1300 nm maximum optical output power 3dBm AVAGO AFCT 5710LZ CDRH 9521220 52 TUV 933 510206 02 UL e173874 ViBE EM4000 Release 1 10 219 User Manual 46073586AB02 Appendix C Regulatory Notices Laser Compliance BLANK PAGE 220 ViBE EM4000 Release 1 10 User Manual 46073586AB02 Appendix D Customer Services Introduction This chapter indicates what you should do if you have a problem with your equipment whether you need to repair it to return it orto dispose of it In this Chapter Support Center Conlaals ns ninri page 222 ENV EE LS EE DL page 224 DAUER nennen page 225 Opare Pas en accreted page 226 Returning EQUIPMENT ans eat page 227 Repackaging for Speer ea page 228 Recycling the Prague engen page 230 ViBE EM4000 Release 1 10 221 User Manual 46073586AB02 Appendix D Customer Services Support Center Contacts Support Center Contacts Our international call center provides Thomson team members to answer your product and customer service questions It is available
265. rence of the manual to the email address Email techpubs thomson networks com Important notice Thomson Video Networks reserves the right to make corrections modifications enhancements improvements and other changes to its products or services at any time and to discontinue any product or service without notice 4 ViBE EM4000 Release 1 10 User Manual 46073586AB02 Trademarks DOLBY DIGITAL DOLBY DIGITAL PLUS wm CH S Institut Integrierte Schaltungen Fraunhofer THOMSON Preface Trademarks Dolby and the double D symbol are registered trademarks of Dolby laboratories Supply of this Implementation of Dolby technology does not convey a license nor imply a right under any patent or any other industrial or intellectual property right of Dolby Laboratories to use this Implementation in any finished end user or ready to use final product It is hereby notified that a license for such use is required from Dolby Laboratories MPEG 2 MPEG 4 AAC audio encoding technology is authorized by the Fraunhofer IIS license http www iis fraunhofer de amm Thomson is a trademark of Technicolor S A All other tradenames referenced are service marks trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective companies Copyrights Copyright 2012 Thomson Video Networks All rights reserved ViBE EM4000 Release 1 10 User Manual 46073586AB02 Preface Copyrights BLANK PAGE 6 V
266. rent protection and supply wiring RELIABLE EARTHING Reliable earthing of rack mounted equipment should be maintained Particular attention should be given to supply connections other than direct connections to the branch circuit e g use of power strips L PROFILES USE The equipment must not be fixed with its rack mounting ears only If you intend to install it in a rack L profiles are required and you must observe the ventilation and safety instructions described in section Mounting in Rack on page 18 HANDLING PRECAUTIONS To avoid injury while installing the equipment in a rack or removing it from a rack take all the necessary precautions Ask another person for help or use a suitable carry lift Operating Safety Instructions DO NOT OPERATE IN EXPLOSIVE ATMOSPHERE To avoid injury or fire hazard do not operate this equipment in an explosive environment atmosphere and materials DO NOT OPERATE IN WET DAMP CONDITIONS To avoid electric shock this equipment should only be operated in dry conditions REPLACEMENT OF RAM WITH BUILT IN LITHIUM BATTERY The equipment includes non volatile RAM with built in lithium batteries which should never require replacing If for any reason replacement does prove necessary please observe the following conditions m The operation must only be performed by qualified personnel m Only replace with the same or equivalent memory type m Ensure the memory is inserted the
267. ription 1 ViBE EM4000 Encoder 1 ViBE EM4000 Quick Start Guide 1 CD ROM 1 Acceptance Test Report x Power cables if ordered 16 ViBE EM4000 Release 1 10 User Manual 46073586AB02 Chapter 2 Installation and Startup Installing the Device Steps Installing the Device Steps The following steps are required for device installation and initial configuration 1 Remove the protective film from both sides before installation 2 Mount the device in a rack 3 Power up the device 4 Enter the initial parameters via the Local Console application IP parameters Date Time etc 5 Connect the device to the other devices 6 Launch a Web Browser ViBE EM4000 Release 1 10 17 User Manual 46073586AB02 Chapter 2 Installation and Startup Mounting in Rack Mounting in Rack Rack mounting is not mandatory for ViBE EM4000 but the ventilation and safety requirements given in this section must be observed in all cases The chassis must not be fixed with its rack mounting ears only If you intend to install it in a rack L profiles are required and you must observe the ventilation and safety instructions described in the following sections ViBE EM4000 Installation Requirements This section lists the principles to be observed and the steps to be taken when installing VIBE EM4000 in a 19 rack Restrictions must be observed related to ventilation see section Ventilation
268. rnung vor einer gef hrlichen elektrischen Spannung im Ger tegeh use die stark genug sein kann um eine Stromschlaggefahr darzustellen Aufforderung an den Benutzer Bediener oder Servicetechniker die in den Produkthandb chern angef hrten wichtigen Bedienungs Wartungs und Seviceanweisungen zur Kenntnis zu nehmen Aufforderung beim Auswechseln von Sicherungen den vorgeschriebenen Nennwert f r die im Text angef hrte Sicherung einzuhalten Obligatorische Erdungsklemme zur ordnungsgem en Erdung bevor weitere Ger te angeschlossen werden k nnen Zus tzliche nicht obligatorische externe Erdungsklemme als Erg nzung zur internen Erdungsklemme Statikempfindliche Bauteile die durch elektrostatische Entladung ESD besch digt werden k nnen sind durch ESD geeignete Verfahren Werkzeuge und antistatische Oberfl chen w hrend der Wartung zu sch tzen ot BE b gt gt 206 ViBE EM4000 Release 1 10 User Manual 46073586AB02 Appendix B Safety Instructions Gefahr Gefahr Folgende Warnungen verweisen auf Situationen und Handlungen die Verletzungs oder Lebensgefahr zur Folge haben k nnen Sicherheitshinweise bez glich des Stromnetzes ORDNUNGSGEMABE ERDUNG Das Ger t muss an einen geerdeten AC Ausgang angeschlossen und ordnungsgem ber den Hauptkabelausgang geerdet werden Zum Vermeiden von Stromschlaggefahr und Ger tesch den den Schutzkontaktstecker nicht herausziehen AC NETZKABEL
269. rs which belong to the same pool Action French Pour le Remote Flextream v rifier le bon fonctionnement de l allocateur distant V rifier si une erreur de transmission a t d tect e V rifier si des erreurs apparaissent sur les codeurs appartenant au m me groupe Automatic redundancy Current autobackup Impossible Upstream autobackup Impossible The following device s can raise this probable cause ViBE EM3000 MPEG4 EM4000 Dual Channel EM4000 Quad Channel EM4000 Hexa Channel EM4000 Octal Channel ViBE Encoder SD Encoder MTEP syntax alarms matching this probable cause english 143 REMOTE FLEXTREAM PCR bitrate error MTEP syntax alarms matching this probable cause french Page 58 Alarm Help X733 syntax 9 60 143 REMOTE FLEXTREAM Erreur de d bit PCR Page 59 Alarm Help X733 syntax 9 60 Probable Cause 58 powerProblem Category Equipment Default severity major Wording English Power problem Wording French Probl me d alimentation Diagnosis English Power supply unit reports a power supply problem Diagnosis French L unit d alimentation signale un probl me d alimentation Action English Check if Power Supply Unit concerned is plugged in the chassis if power cord is plugged and if switch is ON Otherwise switch off the Power Supply Unit concerned and then switch on If the alarm registers again replace the Power Supply Unit concerned and in any case co
270. rsion in use on the Encoder Software version loaded onto the Encoder but not in use For more information refer to Servicing chapter in this User Manual In the Main Board group box Board Type Prod Unit Part Number Product Serial Number Main Unit Part Number Main Serial Number Equipment Code Hardware Level Prod Unit Variant Number Power2 Product Unit Variant Power2 Option Unit Part Number AES Board Unit Part Number AES Option Unit Number Part Type of Board Encoder reference Encoder serial number Factory use Factory use Equipment code This code is used to order software options For more information on ordering software options refer to Servicing chapter in this User Manual Hardware version Factory use Factory use Factory use Factory use Factory use In the Encoding Board 1 group box Board Type Product Unit Part Number Product Serial Number Main Unit Part Number Main Serial Number Hardware Level Type of Board Factory use Factory use Factory use Factory use Hardware version ViBE EM4000 Release 1 10 User Manual 46073586AB02 Chapter 4 Web Browser Interface Settings Settings Setting the VIBE EM4000 Encoder The following section will explain how to set all the parameters of the Encoder and display the status of the device Configuring the number of TSs at Encoder output On the Configuration menu click Configure Device to display the confi
271. s 0x00 The other choices correspond to the following DiffServ values Label DiffServ byte value Best Effort BE 0x00 AF11 0x28 AF12 0x30 AF13 0x38 AF21 0x48 AF22 0x50 AF23 0x58 AF31 0x68 AF32 0x70 AF33 0x78 AF41 0x88 AF42 0x90 AF43 0x98 Expedited Forwarding EF 0xB8 a AF stands for Assured Forward Time To Live byte TTL This parameter sets the data stream time to live expressed as a number of hops Each time the IP packet goes through a router the TTL value is decreased by one unit When the TTL reaches zero the packet is discarded The default value is 32 In the Tx Encapsulation group box TX Encapsulation This parameter is used to choose between MPEG RTP UDP IP encapsulation and MPEG UDP IP encapsulation The default value is MPEG UDP IP Number of MPEG packets This parameter is used to set the number of MPEG per IP frame packets per IP frame sent Possible values are between 1 and 7 The recommended value is 7 to get the smallest IP overhead This value is identical for all the IP streams Click Transmission IP 2 to display the configuration page for stream IP 2 ViBE EM4000 Release 1 10 User Manual 46073586AB02 Chapter 4 Web Browser Interface Settings Figure 4 20 Transmission IP 2 configuration page TS parameters Transport Stream Transmission IP 1 Transmission IP 2 Scrambling Mirroring c enabled disabled Tx para
272. s and repair Action French Recueillir des informations suppl mentaires dans le journal et contacter le Service Clients pour analyse et r paration Automatic redundancy Current autobackup Impossible Upstream autobackup Selectable The following device s can raise this probable cause DBE 4140 Local insertion Vecima VistaLynx QAM ViBE EM3000 MPEG4 EM4000 Dual Channel EM4000 Quad Channel EM4000 Hexa Channel EM4000 Octal Channel ViBE ViBE Encoder ViBE Decoder SD Encoder DBE 2100 1 external video 4 audios DBE 2110 1 internal video 4 audios DBE 2120 8 audios DBE 2120 12 audios DBE 2110 1 internal video 8 audios DBE 2120 4 audios DBE 4110 DSNG DBE 4120 Contribution DBE 4130 Broadcast SSEB DSS MSE SSEB ISO MSE MTEP syntax alarms matching this probable cause english Page 71 Alarm Help X733 syntax 9 60 17 Can t load firmware 26 Can t load firmware 34 Can t load firmware 45 can t load flex 2 95 Sfwr download failure 102 Sfwr download failure 106 Sfwr download failure MTEP syntax alarms matching this probable cause french 17 Impossible de charger le logiciel 26 Chargement du logiciel impossible 34 Chargement du logiciel impossible 45 pb avec flex 2 95 Echec de t l chargement de logiciel 102 Echec de t l chargement de logiciel 106 Echec de t l chargement de logiciel Page 72 Alarm Help X733 syntax 9 60 Probable Cause 1030 stream erro
273. s cn 29 Commands Relating to IP Parameters seese 29 ViBE EM4000 Release 1 10 5 User Manual 46073586AB02 Contents Displaying IP Parameters ipdisp u24444040snenn een 29 Editing IP parameters ipset nn 29 Commands Relating to the Date and Time 30 Displaying the current date and time ddate 30 Editing the date and time sdate uuuuuuu0nnennneennenn 30 Commands relating to the NTP configuration 0 31 Displaying NTP server status and IP address dntp 31 Editing NTP server status and IP address sntp 31 Declaring Web Interface Users 32 FOL W ONG wediei omsat egenen nana AS a aaen 32 Adding a User usradd cccccccsecceeeeeceeeeeeseeseeeeeeseeeseeeess 33 Deleting a User usrdel 33 Displaying the list of Users usrlist eee eee erence 34 Declaring Software options if required 34 Connecting the Signal Cables 35 On the Tear Hamelin nine 35 Running the Web Browser 36 Chapter 3 Front Panel Operation 37 Front Panel Deseripfion aea en a uns 38 Foreword PERERESBEERSTRFREFIEFFTEN a EaR aE E RASED 38 Description and overview 38 Setting LCD screen brightness and contrast 40 Screen Description u 41 Sreem tr e MEN een inne 41 Summary of screen functions 42 Device booting screen ss 42 St t S SEIEN e
274. s inserted in a unique component unique PID Up to 6 VANC data packets can be extracted per frame 1200 bytes frame In addition the maximum bitrate allowed for a teletext component is 240 kbit s 50 Hz VBI component insertion in the TS layer is according to ETSI EN 300 472 Specification for Conveying ITU R System B Teletext in DVB Bitstreams ViBE EM4000 Release 1 10 181 User Manual 46073586AB02 Appendix A Technical Specifications Features 182 Flextream m Principle Flextream a statistical multiplexing device has been designed to increase video compression quality when several encoders share a given bitrate The Operator configures each encoder with a minimum and maximum bitrate and a quality level The bitrate of each Encoder varies and is dependent on the complexity of the signal to be encoded the complexity being evaluated by each of the encoders and the quality level requested Each Encoder sends information about video source complexity and the bitrate required to reach the requested quality level to the bitrate allocator for each frame The bitrate allocator allocates each Encoder with a bitrate which is proportional to the complexity level ofthe video source If the Operator so wishes the allocator can limit the allocated bitrates to the values required to reach the set quality levels In this way if none of the Encoders have complex frames the allocator will only allocate a portion of the tot
275. s not available if Input format is Precompressed Dolby Digital Plus E AC 3 E AC3 encoding parameters are set on the Dolby page This standard is not available if Input format is Precompressed AC3 Transport or E AC3 Transport This standard Dolby AC3 packetization is used to send audio samples synchronous with the video without any compression or changes This standard can only be chosen if the Input Format above is set to Precompressed Used to select the encoding mode The modes available depend on the encoding standard In MPEG1 layer II Choice between Stereo Joint Stereo Mono Left Mono Right and Dual channel In AAC LC or HE AAC Choice between Stereo Joint Stereo Mono Left Mono Right and 5 1 Surround In HE AAC v2 Only Stereo mode is available In Dolby Digital AC 3 or Dolby Digital Plus E AC 3 Choice between 1 0 Mono Left 2 0 Stereo 3 2 5 0 Surround 3 2L 5 1 Surround Used to indicate the PID value assigned to the audio component Used to indicate if the Audio component carries the PCR Used to select the broadcast status for the audio component Choice between Off Air Component broadcasting is postponed but the component remains in the service configuration On Air The component is On Air ViBE EM4000 Release 1 10 User Manual 46073586AB02 Chapter 4 Web Browser Interface Settings Rate Used to select audio bitrates The bitrates available depend on the audio
276. said software The Distributor Warranty Policy described in the individual distributorship agreement applies For details on the Thomson warranty policy please contact your Thomson sales representative list of sales representatives available on the Thomson website at http www thomson networks com ViBE EM4000 Release 1 10 User Manual 46073586AB02 Appendix D Customer Services Services Services Training and assistance service offers are available and can be quoted for upon request Thomson OneCare service level agreement offers apply to this product ViBE EM4000 Release 1 10 225 User Manual 46073586AB02 Appendix D Customer Services Spare Parts Spare Parts The spare part is the product itself there are no other subsets available as spare parts 226 ViBE EM4000 Release 1 10 User Manual 46073586AB02 Appendix D Customer Services Returning Equipment Returning Equipment Please contact the call center with questions about the process for returning Thomson equipment Within the standard Thomson warranty period there is a 30 day turnaround factory in out guarantee for repairs Unless specifically agreed cost and risks for return shipment of equipment are borne by the Customer The faulty device must be packed where possible in its original packaging protective corners and boxes If you no longer have the packaging the faulty device must be protected against shocks
277. should be sent On or not sent Off inthe encoded video component as a picture timing SEI message Changing this parameter stops the outgoing video signal for approximately 5 to 10 seconds 79 Chapter 4 Web Browser Interface Settings 80 AFD insertion AFD data Priority Copyright Content This parameter determines whether the AFD value should be sent in a specific SEI message or not sent Off AFD value is not sent On with reversion data lf the AFD value is not available on the input the AFD reversion data value below is sent On with static data The AFD data value below is always sent This parameter determines the value of the AFD Refer to the AFD insertion parameter above Choice between 16 9 Full frame image in a 16 9 frame follow user display 4 3 Pillarbox image in a 16 9 frame 16 9 Full frame image in a 16 9 frame 16 9 letterbox on 4 3 14 9 Pillarbox image in a 16 9 frame 16 9 image shoot amp protect 14 9 in a 16 9 frame 16 9 image shoot amp protect 4 3 centre in 16 9 frame Click Misc to display the other HD video component parameters Figure 4 29 Editing an HD video component Misc page HD Video Configuration General Advanced AVC Advanced MPEG 2 HD VBI Misc VBR PreProc Priority High E Copyright With E Content Original This page is used to set other HD video component parameters Used to set Normal or High priori
278. signal is an original or acopy Choice between Original or Copy flag in the PES packet header Editing a VBI HD component Click add a component to select the shorcut menu and click Add VBI HD or click the VBI component If the maximum number of VBI components per service has already been reached Add VBI HD will not be underlined and the link will be unavailable The VBI HD configuration page will be displayed Figure 4 38 Editing a VBI HD component page __VBIHD Configuration PID 260 Status On Air 7 VBI Type HD Teletext El submit reset This page is used to set VBI HD component parameters Used to indicate the PID of the VBI HD component Used to indicate the broadcast status of the VBI component Choice between Off Air Component broadcasting is postponed but the component is present in the service configuration On Air The component is on air Only the HD Teletext type is available Adding a PMT descriptor The command used to edit PMT descriptors associates descriptors with services or components Descriptor editing should comply with the DVB standard in reference document ETS 300 468 Specification for service information SI in Digital Video Broadcasting DVB systems Descriptors are added to components or services that have already been created Edit the component or the service and click Add PMT Descriptor in the Descriptors group box ViBE EM4000 Release 1 10 User Manual 4607
279. sion Delay Long Delay PVE On PVR Off Adaptive GOP Full Preprocessing Noise Reduction 1 Adapt Filter 2 Entropy Shaping 1 Mosquito Off No expert parameter m Conf_59_94_720p_WBU_ISOG Audio parameter definition Audio1 Standard AC3 Transport Source SDI Grp1 Ch1 Mode Stereo Rate 192 kbit s Audio2 Standard MPEG 1 Layer Il Source SDI Grp1 Ch1 Mode Stereo Rate 192 kbit s Video parameter definition Frequency 59 94 Hz Profile HP L4 Standard Resolution 720p x 1280 Bitrate 8 Mbps GOP 64 8 PAFF Frame Compression Delay Long Delay PVE On PVR Off Adaptive GOP Full Preprocessing Noise Reduction 1 Adapt Filter 2 Entropy Shaping 1 Mosquito Off No expert parameter m Conf_50_1080i_WBU_ISOG Audio parameter definition Audio1 Standard AC3 Transport Source SDI Grp1 Ch1 Mode Stereo Rate 192 kbit s Audio2 Standard MPEG 1 Layer Il Source SDI Grp1 Ch1 Mode Stereo Rate 192 kbit s Video parameter definition Frequency 50 Hz 102 VIBE EM4000 Release 1 10 User Manual 46073586AB02 Chapter 4 Web Browser Interface Settings Profile HP L4 Standard Resolution 1080i x 1920 Bitrate 8 Mbps GOP 24 8 PAFF Auto Compression Delay Long Delay PVE On PVR Off Adaptive GOP Full Preprocessing Noise Reduction 1 Adapt Filter 2 Entropy Shaping 1
280. size varies from M up to N 1 This restriction can lead to lower video quality around scene changes Fixed GOP mode For this mode both P picture period and GOP size are set to the value set by the user Seamless M and N change during configuration by the User Note The GOP size 1 is authorized a CBR and VBR Local amp Remote Flextream or Capped mode a Bitrate from 2 to 20 Mbit s CBR in 1kbit s steps Seamless bitrate change during configuration by the User VIBE EM4000 Release 1 10 User Manual 46073586AB02 Appendix A Technical Specifications Features Table A 13 HD Video processing specifications Parameter Description Video buffer management Leak mode Miscellaneous features Detection of scene cuts fades PVR descriptor support i e insertion of AU information in adaptation field of MPEG 2 Transport Stream according to ETSI TS 101 154 V1 8 1 This feature is used by Personal Video Recorders PVR to process streams especially encrypted ones because the adaptation field is not encrypted Picture Definition 4 levels with Auto level set by the User IDR I pictures are replaced by IDR Instantaneous Decoder Refresh pictures Note IDR mode is only recommended in the event of interoperability problems with some decoders If there is no video input signal and the video component is not set to Off air the Encoder will generate a video component containing a black
281. software options VU 124 Displaying software options Isopt 124 Ordering and installing software options 125 Ordering a software option eqcod drid 125 Installing a software option insopt unseeseneneneennnne 127 Uninstalling a software option rmopt 128 Recovering lost keys 129 Managing software licenses 129 Software downloading u a 130 Managing Web Interface Users 130 ForeWword rnsieiiin hernie tonnes liens 130 Adding a User usradd 132 Deleting a User usrdel ccccccccccceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeseeseeeeees 132 Displaying the list of Users usrlist uuu000ssnen nenn 133 Managing predefined configurations 133 FOTEW OG aasar aaa Secessarstaguseesectnee rhonda let ne at 133 Saving a current configuration pdcsave s s s 134 Loading a predefined configuration pdcload 134 Deleting a predefined configuration pdcrem 135 Reading the description of a predefined configuration pdcget 136 Managing community strings and SNMP agent information 137 FOREWOPG en sera nennen rer re 137 Reading SNMP agent information rinfo 137 Writing SNMP agent information winfo 138 Displaying the list of community strings cread 138 Displaying the list of temporary c
282. sures aux personnes Les avertissements compl mentaires qui ne sont pas n cessairement repris dans le paragraphe sus cit mais pr sents dans tous les paragraphes du manuel sont galement prendre en consid ration le capot de l amp quipement Si le capot de l quipement est enlev la garantie cesse de s appliquer Pour pr venir les risques de d charges lectriques n enlevez jamais ViBE EM4000 Release 1 10 201 User Manual 46073586AB02 Appendix B Safety Instructions Safety Terms and Symbols Safety Summary English Safety Terms and Symbols Terms on the Product The following terms may appear on the product DANGER A personal injury hazard is immediately accessible as you read the marking CAUTION A hazard to property product and other equipment is present Symbols on the Product The following symbols may appear on the product Qu BE ES 202 Indicates that dangerous high voltage is present within the equipment enclosure that may be of sufficient magnitude to constitute a risk of electric shock Indicates that the user operator or service technician should refer to product manual s for important operating maintenance or service instructions This is a prompt to note fuse rating when replacing fuse s The fuse referenced in the text must be replaced with one having the ratings indicated Identifies a protective grounding terminal which must be connected to e
283. t Safety Part 1 General Requirements ANSI UL 60950 1 First Edition Dated 2007 03 27 Certified IEC 60950 Standard for Safety of Information Technology Equipment Safety Part 1 General Requirements IEC 60950 1 First Edition 2005 CAN CSA C22 2 No 60950 Standard for Safety of Information Technology Equipment Safety Part 1 General Requirements CAN CSA C22 2 No 60950 1 03 2 nd Edition Dated 2007 03 01 Certified EMI 194 2004 108 EEC EMC European Directive 2004 108 EC replacing 89 336 EEC and 93 68 EEC EN 55022 standard EN55024 standard Electromagnetic compatibility Europe Information technology equipment Radio disturbance characteristics Limits and methods of measurement EN 61000 3 2 Electromagnetic compatibility EMC Part 3 2 Limits Limits for harmonic current emissions equipment input current up to and including 16 A per phase EN 61000 3 3 Electromagnetic compatibility EMC Part 3 3 Limits Limitation of voltage changes voltage fluctuations and flicker in public low voltage supply systems for equipment with rated current lt 16 A per phase and not subject to conditional connection Electromagnetic compatibility Europe Information technology equipment Immunity characteristics Limits and methods of measurement EN 61000 4 2 Electrostatic Discharge Immunity Test EN 61000 4 3 Radiated Radio Frequency Electromagnetic Field Immunity T
284. t Overview 12 Figure 1 4 1 MPTS per channel Basic encoder operation mode EM4000 NEM40IN2AA Video Audio IP OUT Video Audio Figure 1 5 1 MPTS per shelf ViBE EM4000 Encoder operation mode EM4000 NEM40IN2AA er TR SR RER aj Video Audio IP OUT Video Audio ViBE EM4000 Release 1 10 User Manual 46073586AB02 Chapter 1 Overview Product Description Product Description Chassis Overview ViBE EM4000 is amodular product in a 1 RU 19 chassis with dual built in power supplies a 2nd power supply can be supplied on an optional basis Front Panel Figure 1 6 ViBE EM4000 front panel LEDs LCD and keypad The features of the ViBE EM4000 front panel are described in the Front Panel Operation chapter of this User Manual Rear Panel Figure 1 7 ViBE EM4000 NEM40IN2AA rear panel SDI In Reserved IP Out g JA Mains connector Input O Mains connector Input Control In Out for the optional AC Power Supply only Figure 1 8 ViBE EM4000 NEM40IN4AA rear panel SDI In Reserved IP Out q wi i 1 g See 5
285. t has been inserted in the unit and is blocking a fan If no external cause is detected contact Customer Service Action French Mettre le ch ssis hors tension afin d viter toute temp rature excessive susceptible de causer un dommage mat riel Pour les produits 5U remplacer l unit de ventilation Pour les produits 1U remplacer le ch ssis Automatic redundancy Current autobackup Impossible Upstream autobackup Selectable The following device s can raise this probable cause DBE 2100 1 external video 4 audios DBE 2110 1 internal video 4 audios DBE 2120 8 audios DBE 2120 12 audios DBE 2110 1 internal video 8 audios DBE 2120 4 audios DBE 4110 DSNG DBE 4120 Contribution DBE 4130 Broadcast DBE 4140 Local insertion Amber DBX 2200 4 TS inputs DBX 2200 8 TS inputs DBX 2200 12 TS inputs Mediation Unit Vecima VistaLynx QAM Audio Video Acquisition Amethyst Ill ASI XNA 4600 adapter ViBE EM3000 MPEG4 EM4000 Dual Channel EM4000 Quad Channel Page 83 Alarm Help X733 syntax 9 60 EM4000 Hexa Channel EM4000 Octal Channel RD 2000 RD 5000 SD RD 5002 SD RD 1000 RD 1002 Maestream ViBE RD 5000 HD SD RD 3000 Opal II ViBE Mobile TV Cisco Catalyst 2960 Cisco Catalyst 4510R Cisco Catalyst 3560 3750 SD Encoder ViBE Mosaic Generator ASI ViBE Mosaic Generator IP VS7000 v1 x VS7000 v2 0 CP6000 MTEP syntax alarms matching this probable cause english 32 Ventilator fault 94 Ventilation failure 132
286. t their output dynamic according to a profile Choice between None Film standard Film light Music standard Music light Speech Default value Film standard This information is used by Dolby Digital audio decoders with an RF remodulated output to adjust their output dynamic according to a profile Choice between None Film standard Film light Music standard Music light Speech Default value Film standard 91 Chapter 4 Web Browser Interface Settings 92 Preferred Stereo Downmix Mode Lt Rt Center Downmix Level Lt Rt Surround Downmix Level Lo Ro Center Downmix Level Lo Ro Surround Downmix Level This parameter enabled in 5 0 or 5 1 mode is used to select either the Lt Rt or Lo Ro downmix in a decoder with stereo outputs Choice between Not indicated Lt Rt Preferred Lo Ro Preferred Lt Rt Left total Right total The Lt Rt downmix totals the Surround channels and adds them in phase to the Left channel and out of phase to the Right channel This enables a Dolby Surround Pro Logic decoder to rebuild the L C R S channels for a Pro Logic home theater Lo Ro Left only Right only The Lo Ro downmix discretely adds the Left and Right Surround channels to the Left and Right speaker channels respectively This preserves stereo separation for stereo only monitoring and produces a mono compatible signal The LFE channel is not included in any downmixes Default value Lt Rt Preferred This pa
287. t toute intervention ViBE EM4000 Release 1 10 211 User Manual 46073586AB02 Appendix B Safety Instructions Avertissements 212 Instructions de s curit relatives l installation du ch ssis dans une baie TEMP RATURE D AMBIANCE LEV E Si l quipement est install dans une baie la temp rature d ambiance de l quipement peut tre sup rieure la temp rature du local technique Assurez vous que la ventilation est conforme ce qui est indiqu section Mounting in Rack on page 18 pour maintenir l quipement dans un environnement compatible avec la temp rature ambiante maximum sp cifi e par le Constructeur CHARGE M CANIQUE Si l quipement est install dans une baie veillez ce que les conditions de montage soient conformes ce qui est indiqu section Mounting in Rack on page 18 CIRCUIT DE SURCHARGE Le produit est quip de circuit de protection de surcharge des circuits d alimentation et de protection contre les court circuits Appliquez les valeurs appropri es indiqu es sur la plaque signal tique LIAISON DE TERRE Assurez vous de la continuit de la liaison de terre pour l quipement mont en baie Une attention particuli re doit tre apport e en cas d utilisation de nourrices ou de bo tiers de raccordement EQUERRES INVERS ES OU EQUERRES EN L est strictement interdit de supporter le ch ssis par ses oreilles Si le ch ssis doit tre install
288. table Upstream autobackup Selectable The following device s can raise this probable cause DBE 2100 1 external video 4 audios DBE 2110 1 internal video 4 audios DBE 2120 8 audios DBE 2120 12 audios DBE 2110 1 internal video 8 audios DBE 2120 4 audios DBE 4110 DSNG DBE 4120 Contribution DBE 4130 Broadcast SSEB DSS MSE DBE 4140 Local insertion Mediation Unit Newtec QPSK 2080 Newtec QPSK 2077 Hx Newtec QPSK 2077 Sx Newtec QPSK 2077 Fx Newtec QPSK 2177 Newtec DVB S 2277 Newtec DVB S 2280 Vecima VistaLynx QAM Audio Video Acquisition DBP 282 M 2x1 channels Amethyst Ill ASI XNA 4600 adapter Net Feeder 9010 VIACCESS FT MEDIAGUARD CANAL NAGRAVISION DVBSC VIACCESS DVBSC MEDIAGUARD DVBSC Page 24 Alarm Help X733 syntax 9 60 IRDETO DVBSC CONAX DVBSC SelectaVision DVBSC NDS DVBSC CRYTOWORKS DVBSC ViBE EM3000 MPEG4 EM4000 Dual Channel EM4000 Quad Channel EM4000 Octal Channel HDE 8100 N8000 Integrated Receiver Decoder Tandberg TT5031 Conax Tandberg TT5032 Mediaguard Tandberg TT5033 Nagravision Tandberg TT5034 Viaccess Rate Shaper V SFN Itis Adapter HDD 8200 Opal II Gecko 8900FFN Gecko 8900TFN V ViBE Mobile TV SD Encoder ViBE Mosaic Generator ASI ViBE Mosaic Generator IP VS7000 v1 x VS7000 v2 0 CP6000 MTEP syntax alarms matching this probable cause english 17 Encoder out of use 26 Encoder out of use 34 Encoder out of use 34 HDLC link out of use 34 irst pass encoding out of use
289. tall amp e Diagnosis English The current configuration cannot be fully applied due to a software option not installed or due to an unsufficient count of software options The function works in a degraded mode that does not render the expected service The reference of the missing software option is displayed in the alarm wording Diagnosis French La configuration courante ne peut pas tre compl tement appliqu e parce qu il manque une option logicielle ou parce que le nombre d instance de l option est insuffisant La fonction op re en mode d grad et ne rend pas le service attendue La r f rence de l option manquante est affich e dans le libell de l alarme Action English Install the missing option or reconfigure the board in order to avoid the usage of this optional feature Action French Installer l option manquante ou re configurer la carte pour ne pas faire usage de cette fonctionnalit optionnelle Automatic redundancy Current autobackup Impossible Upstream autobackup Impossible The following device s can raise this probable cause Net Processor 9030 Net Processor 9040 XMS ViBE EM3000 MPEG4 EM4000 Dual Channel EM4000 Quad Channel EM4000 Hexa Channel EM4000 Octal Channel RD 2000 RD 5000 SD 82 Page 5 Alarm Help X733 syntax 9 60 RD 5002 SD Jade ViBE ViBE Encoder ViBE Decoder ViBE Front End PDH ViBE Front End 100BT ViBE Front End ASI RD 5000 HD SD RD 3000 SD Encoder ViBE Mosaic Generator
290. tallation and Startup Performing the Initial Settings Performing the Initial Settings Accessing the Local Console application Introduction The device features the Local Console application The Local Console application can be accessed by connecting to the Encoder via the CONTROL 1 Ethernet link and an SSH client application The free PUTTY SSH client application is used in this chapter The PuTTY application can be downloaded on http www putty org Figure 2 6 PuTTY application ik PuTTY Configuration x Category E Session 26 Logging Terminal Keyboard Bell Features Window Appearance Behaviour Translation Selection Colours Connection Basic options for your PuTTY session M Specify the destination you want to connect to Host Name or IP address Port 2 Connection type C Raw Telnet Rlogin SSH C Serial M Load save or delete a stored session Saved Sessions Default Settings Load ViBE EM4000 Release 1 10 User Manual 46073586AB02 Chapter 2 Installation and Startup Performing the Initial Settings Figure 2 7 Control 1 connector ViBE EM4000 NEM40IN2AA rear panel g a um Control 1 The ViBE EM4000 IP address which is required for the first I connection is given on the Acceptance Test Report
291. te stream 1 which in turn is carried in MPEG2 transport packets The Data_unit_ID values identify the type of data as AMOL 1 AMOL II or TV Guide Data encoded in the data fields are supposed to be transcoded into the VBI of 525 line video but may be interpreted directly by a decoder European Broadcast Union Entitlement Control Message Private Conditional Access information that specifies control words and possibly other stream specific scrambling and or control parameters ECM Generator Ethernet Data Input Digital Television Closed Captioning specifies the standards for DTV technology DTV closed captioning is transported in the bitstream as a logical data channel in MPEG 2 picture user data field of the DTV digital bitstream as defined in the ATSC A 53 and ISO IEC 13818 standards To ensure compatibility the transport channel is designed to carry analog EIA 608 B and digital closed captioning EIA 708 B Event Information Table A mandatory Digital Video Broadcast DVB SI table that transmits information relating to the events in the MPEG transport stream A generic term for a coded bit stream be it video audio or other Electromagnetic Compatibility Entitlement Management Message Private Conditional Access information that specifies the authorization level or services of specific decoders Encoding of a transmission to prevent access without the appropriate decryption equipment and authorization Electronic Pro
292. teessane 74 GTR EN LP Res 74 PID PUG RSR PRE PE teas 88 PID VED RER ER Re 96 Power consumption nnunnessnnnnnnnnennnennnn 160 Power supply nunnennennnnnnnnnnnnnnn nennen 160 Power Supply Cord s Specifications 24 Power a A nunen 25 Predefined configuration deleting 106 Predefined configuration loading from a hard drive Predefined configuration saving to disk 106 Predefined configurations displaying 100 Prefered stereo Downmix Mode Dolby Au e E D EE Pr nr IL 92 Priority Video siccis 80 Product Description uunnnnnnnnnnnnnn 13 Front panel u ussssssnnnnnnnnnne nenn 13 Rear panel nn 13 121 RL 76 Protective ground eee 24 ROWED sz ssseccasssciccietecheccousteseteudeeesbeecteeeteness 74 Psycho Visual Enhancement off Expert pa FAMBTOT ss srsc sscsssas narerenmnne danses ennsennureeerseue 98 PuTTY SSH client application 0 26 PYR Descriptor u 79 Q Quality VideO une 81 ViBE EM4000 Release 1 10 User Manual 46073586AB02 Appendix R Rack Installation c csscceesesseeeesesseeeeees 18 Cables 23 EMC Ground 23 Ventilation uuusssseneneennnnnnneennnnnnnennn 18 53 e SORRRRHREUEETEERFERERENEREELEEFEER THREE EEE SEELE IEEFSEILEEER 76 Rate Audio engere 89 Reboot the unit 109 Reliability aussen 163 RF Mode DRC Dolby Audio uneesssseeeneeen 91 Room Type Dolby Audio 93 Runking Status scannen sn 74 S Save to Confi
293. terface Static IP routing IndexDestination 0 1 2 3 enabled disabled In the Static IP Routing enabled disabled Destination Subnet Mask Gateway 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 submit reset Used to enable IP routing Used to disable IP routing routing group box 4 routes can be set in this group box Destination Destination Subnet Mask Gateway 66 IP address ofthe network or destination host Subnet mask of the network or destination host IP address ofthe router to be used to reach the network or destination host ViBE EM4000 Release 1 10 User Manual 46073586AB02 Chapter 4 Web Browser Interface Settings LAN WAN network interface Eth2 On the Configuration menu click Eth2 Out to display the LAN WAN Eth2 configuration page Figure 4 16 Configuration menu Configuration menu Status I BE EM ENCODER 1 EM ENCODER 2 Configure Device User admin administrator 1 gt Logouf Eth1 Out EM CONTROLLER EM ENCODER 1 ViBE EM4000 NEMI40IN2AA 2 Basic encoders ViBE EM4000 NEMI40IN4AA 4 Basic encoders Maintenance Preset Eth2 Out This command is used to configure the Encoder s LAN WAN ETH2 network interface The configuration pages are identical to those displayed with the Eth1 Out command See section LAN WAN network interface Eth1
294. th day hour minute and year format without spaces after UTC time m Type y after Apply date amp time now if you wish to confirm the new values or n if you wish to keep the previous values The Done message will be displayed to indicate that the changes have been acknowledged 30 VIBE EM4000 Release 1 10 User Manual 46073586AB02 Chapter 2 Installation and Startup Performing the Initial Settings Commands relating to the NTP configuration The purpose of NTP Network Time Protocol is to synchronize devices via a shared network An external NTP server serves as reference for the Encoder which is an NTP client its internal clock is synchronized with the NTP server You are advised to manually set the ViBE EM4000 system clock as I close as possible to the NTP server clock Several minutes are required to achieve perfect synchronization between the two platforms Displaying NTP server status and IP address dntp To display the NTP server status and IP address type dntp after the ViBE prompt Figure 2 14 Displaying NTP server status and IP address dntp command iF 10 12 54 29 PuTTY o x ViBE gt dntp Al NTP time synchronization Disable Preferred NTP server address Secondary NTP server address ViBE gt Jj Editing NTP server status and IP address sntp To edit the NTP server status and IP address type sntp after the ViBE prompt Figure 2 15 Editing NTP server status an
295. the Metadata Parameters 1 tab to display the 1st Dolby Metadata configuration page Figure 4 35 Editing an audio component Dolby Metadata parameters 1 page Bitstream Mode Complete main gt Dialogue Normalisation 27 dB 31d8to 14 Line Mode DRC Film standard x RF Mode DRC Film standard A Preferred Stereo Downmix Mode LURt Preferred x Lt Rt Center Downmix Level 0 707 ee Lt Rt Surround Downmix Level 0 707 eB Lo Ro Center Downmix Level 0 707 ea Lo Ro Surround Downmix Level 0 707 348 DRC for Dynamic Ra nge Compression DOLBY I DIGITALPLUS Dolby and the double D symbol are registered trademarks of Dolby Laboratories This page is used to set the Metadata used by the Dolby Encoder in Internal Metada Bitstream Mode Dialogue Normalisation Line Mode DRC RF Mode DRC ViBE EM4000 Release 1 10 User Manual 46073586AB02 ta mode Used to indicate the type of audio service Choice between Main audio service Complete main Main audio service Music and effects Associated service Visually impaired Associated service Hearing impaired Associated service Dialogue Associated service Commentary Associated service Emergency Associated service Voiceover Karaoke Used to indicate the average dialog level Range from 1 dB to 31 dB in 1 dB steps Default value 27 dB This information is used by Dolby Digital audio decoders with line level outputs to adjus
296. the following page will be displayed Figure 4 48 Configurations stored in factory Message from webpage x re you sure to recall memory 35 cn Click OK The recalled configuration is immediately applied to the chassis m f the configuration is of Encoder type the following page will be displayed Figure 4 49 Recalling an EM Encoder type stored configuration 1 3 Message from webpage x J Are you sure to recall memory 1 cn m Click OK The following window will be displayed Figure 4 50 Recalling an EM ENCODER type stored configuration 2 3 Select the target Location memory 1 Coder EM ENCODER 1 EM ENCODER 1 EM ENCODER 2 lt 1 Select the Basic encoder that is to receive the configuration VIBE EM4000 Release 1 10 105 User Manual 46073586AB02 Chapter 4 Web Browser Interface Settings 2 Confirm the operation by clicking on submit The following screen will be displayed Figure 4 51 Recalling an EM ENCODER type stored configuration 3 3 Predefined configurations You have recalled the memory 1 Deleting a predefined configuration from the device To delete a predefined configuration click the X icon associated with the configuration on the Presets page The following dialog box will be displayed Figure 4 52 Confirming deletion of a predefined configuration Microsoft Internet Explorer x 2 Are you sure to delete memory 8 en
297. the outgoing signal DVB Conformity The device also generates and sends DVB tables NIT SDT EIT TDT TOT Without Signalling The device does not send any signalling NIT in PAT for ISO mode Off The NIT is not referenced in the PAT On The NIT is referenced in the PAT Generate TSDT Available only in DVB Conformity Signalling mode Off The Transport Stream Description Table is not generated On The Transport Stream Description Table is generated Station Identification Identication of the station Available only if Generate TSDT is On TSDT Repetition Rate Repetition period of the TSDT Available only if Generate TSDT is On The value must be 10s 5s 2s 1s 500ms 200ms or 100ms TS bitrate TS CBR bitrate with null packets The minimum rate depends on the bitrate allocated to the services The maximum bitrate depends on the Encoder configuration number of SPTS at output Click Transmission IP 1 to display the configuration page for stream IP 1 68 ViBE EM4000 Release 1 10 User Manual 46073586AB02 Chapter 4 Web Browser Interface Settings Figure 4 19 Transmission IP 1 configuration page TS parameters Transport Stream Transmission IP 1 Transmission IP 2 Scrambling Tx parameters Output Destination IP Address Destination UDP port TOS DiffServe byte Time To Live byte TTL TX Encapsulation Virtual Source IP Address enabled disabled 172 16 111 112 othe foxio
298. tion Used to enable On or disable Off feedback of alarm saturation generated when 2 consecutive audio samples have a value corresponding to 0 dBFS If the source is permanently saturated disable this parameter to prevent feedback of untimely and unimportant alarms Alarm Detected Silence Used to set activation of the Detected Silence alarm The Detected Silence alarm indicates that the input audio signal value is below 65 dBFS for at least the duration set by this parameter Range between 2 and 60 in 2 s steps Language Used to indicate the audio component language The language code will be displayed in the right hand box It is possible to directly enter the language code in this box The 3 letter language codes comply with ISO 639 2 Choice between French fra English eng German deu Spanish spa Basque bas Italian ita Russian rus Dutch ndl Portuguese por Danish dan Greek gre Finnish fin Swedish swe Norwegian nor Other Audio Type Used to indicate the audio component type Choice between Undefined Clean effects Hearing impaired Visual Impaired ViBE EM4000 Release 1 10 95 User Manual 46073586AB02 Chapter 4 Web Browser Interface Settings 96 Copyright Content PID Status VBI Type Used to indicate whether or not the audio signal is protected by copyright flag in the PES packet header Choice between With or Without Used to indicate whether the audio
299. tion in temperature controlled locations e 5 C to 40 C e 85 humidity compliant with the climatogram featured in the standard Classification of environmental conditions Transportation e Environmental class 2 2 Careful transportation for mechanical conditions e 25 C to 70 C e 95 humidity compliant with the climatogram featured in the standard e Sinusoidal vibrations in packaging e Random vibrations in packaging e Shocks in packaging e Falls in packaging e Falls in packaging Green Book Option ETS 300 019 1 1 Classification of environmental conditions Storage e Environmental class 1 2 e Storage in weather protected partly temperature controlled locations e 25 C to 70 C 95 humidity compliant with the climatogram featured in the standard e Shocks during In Use Pollution specifications No 2 pollution Protection IEC 60529 1989 specifications IP20 protection ViBE EM4000 Release 1 10 User Manual 46073586AB02 195 Appendix A Technical Specifications EU declaration of conformity EU declaration of conformity THOMSON gt VIDEO NETWORKS Ref DECLARATION DE CONFORMITE CE EU DECLARATION OF CONFORMITY Thomson Video Networks SAS 6 rue du Clos Courtel CS 31719 35517 CESSON SEVIGNE Cedex France Mat riels Equipments Code Article Produit Part number Products ViBE 4000 XXXXXX ViBE EM4000 Multi Channel Encoder
300. to install them using the Local Console If options are ordered with the product they will have been installed I at the factory and will be immediately available to the operator 34 ViBE EM4000 Release 1 10 User Manual 46073586AB02 Chapter 2 Installation and Startup Connecting the Signal Cables Connecting the Signal Cables On the rear panel Figure 2 19 Rear Panel ViBE EM4000 Encoder Connect the SDI In Connect the IP 1 amp IP 2 out to the video put s to the downstream sources Not Used device s 1 2 CPS oO g o mi LEJ g suisse Optional Connect the CONTROL 1 Ethernet Not Used link used to operate the device Note Rear Panel depends on the Encoder type and Hardware option installed ViBE EM4000 Release 1 10 35 User Manual 46073586AB02 Chapter 2 Installation and Startup Running the Web Browser Running the Web Browser When the previous installation procedure is complete device operation can begin Set up the connection between the PC and the Encoder To do this 1 Run the Web Browser on the PC connected to the Encoder via the Control Ethernet link 2 Connect to the Encoder by entering its IP address The Login page will be displayed
301. to formats listed in section Input HD video encoding formats on page 171 Encoding syntax AU Delimiters Compliant with DVB recommendation VUI parameters Compliant with DVB recommendation SEI pic_timing Compliant with DVB recommendation SEI recovery point Compliant with DVB recommendation TS RAI Compliant with DVB recommendation Entropy Coding CABAC Picture Structure Encoding tools ViBE EM4000 Release 1 10 User Manual 46073586AB02 Frame MBAFF Field and PAFF Dual Pass encoding All Intra Luma 4x4 modes All Intra Luma 8x8 modes All Intra Luma 16x16 modes All Intra Chroma 8x8 modes Inter modes down to 8x8 partition size Submotion vectors 1 4 pixel 4x4 Transform 8x8 Transform Skipped MB Spatial Direct modes Multiple reference for P amp B pictures 173 Appendix A Technical Specifications Features 174 Table A 13 HD Video processing specifications Description a M lt N lt 64 a Possibility of full adaptive restricted or fixed GOP Full adaptive GOP mode variable M and N This mode allows P picture period and effective GOP size to vary according to video content i e spatio temporal complexity and events such as scene changes or fades In this case the effective GOP size varies from M up to N 8 max encoding order where M and N are user set Restricted GOP mode This mode is a limitation of the full adaptive mode where the effective GOP
302. tream is constant see VBR Close Caption Chrominance chroma or C for short is the signal used in video systems to convey the color information of the picture separately from the accompanying luma signal or Y for short Common Intermediate Format A format used to standardize the horizontal and vertical resolutions in pixels of YCbCr sequences in video signals commonly used in video teleconferencing systems video size 352p x 288p A TV picture subtitling system used with 525 line analog transmissions A baseband representation of a video signal containing luminance and chrominance information The process of removing redundant data from audio or video streams to reduce the amount of data transferred or stored CPU Central Processing Unit CrCb Digital Color difference signals These signals in combination with the luminance signal Y define the color and brightness of each picture element pixel on a TV line See Chrominance CRC Cyclic Redundancy Check A cyclic redundancy check CRC is an error detecting code designed to detect accidental changes to raw computer data and is commonly used in digital networks and storage devices such as hard disk drives CVBS Composite Video Blanking and Sync CVCT Cable Virtual Channel Table ATSC CW Control Word CWG Control Word Generator dB Decibel The decibel is a logarithmic unit that indicates the ratio of a physical quantity usually power or intensity relative
303. ty by positioning a flag in the PES packet header Used to indicate whether the video content is With or Without a Copyright by positioning a flag in the PES packet header Used to indicate whether the video content is a Copy or an Original by positioning a flag in the PES packet header ViBE EM4000 Release 1 10 User Manual 46073586AB02 Chapter 4 Web Browser Interface Settings Click VBR to display the HD video component VBR page Figure 4 30 Editing an HD video component VBR page HD Video Configuration General Advanced AVC Advanced MPEG 2 HD VBI Misc VBR PreProc VBR Mode Of CBR 2000 kbit s 20000 kbit s 10 submit reset This page is used to set video component VBR parameters VBR Mode Min Bitrate Max Bitrate Quality ViBE EM4000 Release 1 10 User Manual 46073586AB02 Used to set the operating mode for HD component bitrate at Encoder output Choice between Off CBR The output bitrate is fixed Capped The bitrate varies within the range set by the Min Bitrate and Max Bitrate parameters according to the complexity of the picture to be encoded and the Quality parameter If the Encoder is in Flextream mode VBR Mode cannot be edited in this case Used to set the minimum bitrate in Capped mode The value must be between 2000 kbit s and 20000 kbit s Used to set the maximum bitrate in Capped mode The value must be between 2000 kbit s and 20
304. u screen m From the Status screen press the OK key m From a sub menu press the ESC key once or more depending on the sub menu displayed ViBE EM4000 Release 1 10 43 User Manual 46073586AB02 Chapter 3 Front Panel Operation Screen Description Figure 3 7 Main Menu screen MAIN lt ALARMS gt NIRO To select a sub menu use the gt WV and keys and then confirm your choice by pressing the OK key Available sub menus Alarms Used to display alarms raised on the Encoder Setup Used to Set device IP settings Recall a predefined configuration Reboot the device LCD adjustments Contrast and Brightness Info Used to get information about Encoder board references chassis references serial numbers release numbers and temperatures Alarms screen The Alarms screen is used to view alarms raised on the device To display this screen go to the Main menu screen select ALARMS using the arrow keys and press OK Figure 3 8 Alarms Menu screen ALARMS Severity av Name XX YY AID AID ext Alarm Wording first line Alarm Wording last line Severity Used to indicate alarm severity The alarm can be Critical Major Minor or Warning Name Used to indicate the name of the function with the alarm s MAIN Brd ENCODER 1 Brd ENCODER 2 Brd etc XX YY XX indicates the number of the alarm in the YY list where YY represents the total number of alarms raised 44 ViBE EM4000 Rele
305. uet Association Table The BAT provides information about bouquets It gives the name of the bouquet and a list of associated services Basic Interoperable Scrambling System BISS is a satellite signal scrambling system developed by the European Broadcasting Union and a consortium of hardware manufacturers A collection of services TV radio and data or any combination of the three grouped and sold together and identified in the SI as a group A single service may be in several bouquets A memory store used to provide a consistent rate of data flow Conditional Access System to control subscriber access to services programs and events Context based Adaptive Binary Arithmetic Coding CABAC is a form of entropy coding used in H 264 video encoding It is notable for providing much better compression than CAVLC but is more computationally expensive CABAC is not supported in Baseline and Extended profiles ViBE EM4000 Release 1 10 User Manual 46073586AB02 CAT CAVLC CBR cc Chrominance CIF Closed Caption Composite Video Compression Glossary Conditional Access Table CAT table is used for conditional access to the streams It provides association with the EMM stream Context Adaptive Variable Length Coding CAVLC is a form of entropy coding used in H 264 video encoding CAVLC has lower coding efficiency than CABAC but is less computationally expensive Constant Bit rate The bit rate of the bit s
306. uration mismatch 45 setup error 2 61 5 board not declared 61 4 board not detected 61 Daugther board 1 is missing 75 bad IP Default Gateway Addr 75 bad Ctrl Cmd IP Addr 75 bad Ctrl Cmd IP Mask 75 bad Data Injection IP Addr 75 bad Data Injection IP Mask 76 unstable configuration 76 configuration can t be applied 87 configuration inconsistency 88 Incorrect DBP configuration 1 89 Incorrect DBP boards configuration 1 92 Incorrect device configuration 97 unknown super CAS id 97 unknown channel id 97 unknown ECM stream id 98 unknown super CAS id 98 unknown channel id 98 unknown ECM stream id 101 incoherent configuration with CAC error code 2 102 Configuration inconsistency 133 Current configuration lost 134 current configuration lost 135 Current configuration lost 136 Current configuration lost Bad EEPROM 137 System not configured 138 Settings failure 140 Configuration error 144 Illegal configuration 144 Configuration not supported 145 Invalid cell number 166 Consistensy problem with C and C unit configuration 177 Switcher rejected command 206 Broadcast status inconsistent with the topology MTEP syntax alarms matching this probable cause french 17 Probleme de communication Page 10 Alarm Help X733 syntax 9 60 17 Erreur set up 18 Encodeur inconnu pour le PID 4 19 Incompatibilit de configuratio
307. vanced AVC Advanced MPEG 2 HD VBI Misc VBR PreProc Picture Resolution 1080i 1920 Picture Definition Faute Picture Structure Auto PAFF P Picture Period M EB H GOP Size N 32 6 Adaptive GOP Adaptive GOP Restricted Closed GOP con Off PVR Descriptor con Off submit reset This page is used to set Advanced parameters Picture Resolution Picture Definition Picture Structure ViBE EM4000 Release 1 10 User Manual 46073586AB02 Used to adjust picture resolution according to the desired video bitrate Picture resolution depends on the video standard Choice between 1080i 720p 1080i 1920 720p 1280 1080i 1440 720p 960 1080i 1280 720p 640 1080i 960 Changing this parameter stops the outgoing video signal for approximately 5 to 10 seconds Used to set the definition of the picture Choice between Auto Soft Standard Sharp Structure of the picture at Encoder input Choice between Field Frame Auto PAFF Auto corresponds to Picture Adaptive Field Frame 77 Chapter 4 Web Browser Interface Settings P Picture Period M Used to set the repetition rate for P pictures This parameter depends on the Adaptive GOP parameter It is always lower than the GOP size parameter or egal to 1 A lower value will reduce the number of B pictures in the GOP these pictures are the most efficient in terms of compression ratio M 3 P3
308. wser Interface Maintenance Maintenance Rebooting the Encoder On the Maintenance menu click Reboot to display the reboot page Figure 4 58 Maintenance menu Maintenance menu Status Configuration Presets Maintenance BE Reboot Identification Load Settings User admin administrator 3 gt Logout Save Settings FM CONTROII FR Rehoot This command is used to reboot ViBE EM4000 Encoder Figure 4 59 Encoder Reboot page M Reboot the unit Reboot the unit Reboot the ViBE EM4000 Encoder To reboot the Encoder check Reboot the unit and click Yes during the reboot process Once the Encoder reboot is complete the Operator will have to reconnect to the Encoder by clicking on the Er logo for instance An error page may be displayed if reconnection is attempted too soon If this is the case try reconnecting by clicking on the Browser Refresh button Connection with the Encoder will be lost ViBE EM4000 Release 1 10 109 User Manual 46073586AB02 Chapter 4 Web Browser Interface Maintenance Configuring the names of the Encoder and Basic encoders On the Maintenance menu click Identification to display the identification page Figure 4 60 Maintenance menu Maintenance menu Status Configuration Presets Maintenance Reboot Identification Load Settings Save Settings FM CONTROIIFR Rehoot This command is used to configure the names of the
309. x 117 D bordement du flux 135 D bordement de l interface 137 D bit trop lev en entr e 137 D bit en entr e incorrect 148 D bordement 148 D bordement du buffer teletext 155 Overflow du buffer TS 183 AAL5 packet buffer overflow Page 76 Alarm Help X733 syntax 9 60 Probable Cause 1278 Unreachable destination Category Communications Default severity major Wording English Unreachable destination Wording French Destination inaccessible Diagnosis English Unreachable destination Destination host is not connected to network or bad IP settings of destination host or problem of configuration on intermediate routers Diagnosis French Impossible d atteindre la destination H te de destination non connect au r seau param tres IP de lh te de destination incorrects ou probl me de configuration des routeurs interm diaires Action English Check destination host Contact your network infrastructure representative Action French V rifier l h te de destination Contacter votre service infrastructure r seau Automatic redundancy Current autobackup Impossible Upstream autobackup Impossible The following device s can raise this probable cause Net Processor 9030 Net Processor 9040 Mediation Unit ViBE EM3000 MPEG4 EM4000 Dual Channel EM4000 Quad Channel EM4000 Hexa Channel EM4000 Octal Channel ViBE Encoder ViBE Front End 100BT SD Encoder ViBE Mosaic Generator
310. yntax 9 60 Probable Cause 605 duplicatelnformation Category Communications Default severity major Wording English Duplicate information Wording French Information dupliqu e Diagnosis English The specified parameter is duplicated in the context Diagnosis French Le param tre sp cifi est dupliqu dans le contexte Action English Check the specified parameter Action French V rifier le param tre sp cifi Automatic redundancy Current autobackup Impossible Upstream autobackup Impossible The following device s can raise this probable cause EM4000 Dual Channel EM4000 Quad Channel EM4000 Hexa Channel EM4000 Octal Channel SD Encoder MTEP syntax alarms matching this probable cause english MTEP syntax alarms matching this probable cause french Page 17 Alarm Help X733 syntax 9 60 Probable Cause 204 excessiveResponse Time Category Quality of service Default severity warning Wording English Excessive response time Wording French Temps de r amp ponse excessif Diagnosis English In Remote Flextream context For encoder time before bitrate application is inferior to 20 of Round Trip Delay RTD For allocator complexity received too late Diagnosis French Dans le contexte Remote Flextream Pour le codeur le temps restant avant l application du bitrate est inf rieur 20 du Round Trip Delay RTD Pour l allocateur complexit

ViBE EM4000

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents